Sie sind auf Seite 1von 2086

MULTIPLE CHOICE

PAPER ONE

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

0625/1

PHYSICS
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Wednesday

19 MAY 1999

Morning

45 minutes

Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

TIME

45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SB (SC) QF91698/4
UCLES 1999

[Turn over

A measuring cylinder contains some liquid.


cm3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

What does the reading of the measuring cylinder scale give?

the density of the liquid

the height of the liquid

the mass of the liquid

the volume of the liquid

A tennis ball falls from the upstairs window of a house.

Ignoring air resistance, what happens to the acceleration of the ball?


A

It decreases.

It increases.

It is constant.

It is zero.

0625/1 S99

The graph shows how the speed of a car changes over 200 s.
20
speed
m/s
0

50

100

150 200
time/s

For how many seconds is the car moving at constant speed?


A

50 s

100 s

150 s

200 s

Two apples are placed on a balance. The balance stays level.

apple 1

apple 2

What does this show about the mass and the weight of the apples?
mass of apples

weight of apples

different

different

different

the same

the same

different

the same

the same

0625/1 S99

[Turn over

The diagram shows a racing car.

32

PETROIL

VA LV O I L

Where should the centre of mass be, and why?

centre of mass

where

why

as high as possible

to give the car more acceleration

as high as possible

to give the car more stability

as low as possible

to give the car more acceleration

as low as possible

to give the car more stability

An object is pushed and then allowed to slide along a table.


The diagram shows the direction of the friction force acting on the object.

object

object sliding
this way
table

friction force
What is the effect of the friction force on the sliding object?
A

It has no effect.

It increases the objects weight.

It slows the object down.

It speeds the object up.

0625/1 S99

A student swings on a rope tied to a branch of a tree.


At which position is the students energy of motion (kinetic energy) the greatest?

D
C

The diagram shows four types of power station.


Which type of power station uses chemical energy to generate electricity?
A
geothermal

B
coal-fired

C
nuclear

hot rocks heat


water, steam turns
turbine and generator

coal burned to heat


water, steam turns
turbine and generator

nuclear fuel heats


water, steam turns
turbine and generator

0625/1 S99

D
hydroelectric

water from mountain


reservoir turns
turbine and generator

[Turn over

Four people each have to lift bricks to the same height with a rope and pulley. Some lift more
bricks, and some lift the bricks faster.
Which person develops the most power?
A

10 bricks
in
2 seconds

10 bricks
in
4 seconds

20 bricks
in
2 seconds

20 bricks
in
4 seconds

10 The diagram shows a drawing pin (thumb tack) and a wooden board.
force
drawing pin
wooden board

The drawing pin is easily pushed into the wooden board.


Why is this?
A

The flat head raises the centre of mass.

The force produces a large moment about the point.

The large area of the flat head increases the force.

The small area of the point increases the pressure.

0625/1 S99

11 A liquid evaporates quickly.


How does its temperature change, and which of its molecules leave the surface?
temperature
change

molecules
leaving surface

rises

fastest-moving

rises

slowest-moving

falls

fastest-moving

falls

slowest-moving

12 A pupil looks through a microscope into a small, glass container in which tiny smoke particles
have been mixed with air. The container is very brightly lit and the pupil sees bright specks moving
randomly.
What are these specks?
A

air molecules being hit by air molecules

air molecules being hit by smoke particles

smoke particles being hit by air molecules

smoke particles being hit by smoke particles

13 A substance that melts at 60 C is heated in a test-tube to a temperature of 95 C. The substance


is then allowed to cool.
Which graph best shows how the temperature changes with time as the substance cools?

temperature / C

temperature / C

temperature / C

100

100

time

D
temperature / C

100

time

0625/1 S99

100

time

time

[Turn over

14 The diagram shows an experiment to investigate the effect of a rise in temperature on an iron bar.
iron bar

pointer
roller with
pointer attached

fixed support
heat

What would be seen after heating?

15 A flask with a narrow tube contains some coloured liquid. The diagram shows the height of the
liquid column at 0C, 100 C and X C.

80
70
60
50
millimetres 40
30
20
10
0

0 C

100 C

The liquid expands uniformly with temperature.


What is temperature X?
A

40 C

50 C

60 C
0625/1 S99

80 C

X C

16 Four wires of equal length, made of different materials, are placed on heat-sensitive paper. The
four ends of the wire are put together, as shown, and are heated for three minutes.

heat-sensitive paper

heated here
Heat-sensitive paper changes colour when it gets hot. The diagram below shows the marks on the
heat-sensitive paper due to the conduction of heat energy along the wires.
Which mark was made by the best conductor of heat?
B
C
A
D

17 A hot-air balloon rises when the air inside it is heated.


Why does this happen?
A

The air contracts and becomes less dense.

The air contracts and becomes more dense.

The air expands and becomes less dense.

The air expands and becomes more dense.

0625/1 S99

[Turn over

18 Different surfaces reflect different proportions of the Suns radiant energy. The chart shows the
percentage of heat energy that is reflected by some surfaces.
100
% of heat
energy
reflected

80
60
40
20
0
whitewashed

red
brick

soil

tar

What is the best way to treat a flat roof so as to increase the amount of heat absorbed by the roof?
A

cover it with a layer of red brick dust

cover it with a layer of soil

paint it with tar

paint it with whitewash

19 A barrier lies at the mouth of a harbour. It is closer to one side of the mouth of the harbour than the
other. Sea waves come towards the harbour and pass through the two gaps.
Which diagram shows the pattern that the waves make when they pass through the gaps?
waves moving
this way
A
sea

barrier
harbour

0625/1 S99

20 Which diagram shows the path of a ray of light through a glass prism and into the air beyond?

45

light
ray

light
ray

45

C
light
ray

45

D
light
ray

45

21 Which diagram shows how a converging lens in a camera forms an image on the film?

A
object

image

object

image

object

image

object

image

22 What is heard when the frequency of a sound wave is increased at constant amplitude?
A

higher pitch

lower pitch

louder sound

quieter sound

0625/1 S99

[Turn over

23 A bat is flying near a house. It makes a high-pitched sound. It hears the echo 0.5 s later. The
speed of sound in air is 300 m/s.
How far away is the house from the bat?
A

600 m

300 m

150 m

75 m

24 A student holds two pins on to a magnet as shown.

The student removes his thumb.


Which diagram shows the positions of the pins and the poles induced on them?
A

S
N

S
N

S
S

25 Different metals are separated by passing them under an electromagnet, which attracts and lifts
out some of the metals.
electromagnet

different metals

moving belt

Which line in the table shows what happens to the metals?


attracted

not attracted

copper

aluminium

copper

steel

iron

aluminium

iron

steel

0625/1 S99

26 Which diagram shows the directions of the forces between two charged particles?
A

27 A battery is labelled 9 VOLTS.

BATTERY
9 VOLTS

Which information does the label give about the battery?


A

the power it can supply

the current it can supply

its electromotive force (e.m.f.)

its resistance

28 The diagram shows how a student has connected some electrical components. The lamp does
not light because the circuit has not been completed.
crocodile clip

connecting wire

switch

lamp

battery
P
Q

crocodile clip
Where must the crocodile clips be connected, so that the lamp lights only when the switch is
closed?
A

at P and R

at P and S

at Q and R

0625/1 S99

at Q and S
[Turn over

29 The diagram shows a circuit in which all the lamps are lit.

The lamp marked X blows and breaks the circuit.


How many lamps remain lit?
A

30 In which diagram is the fuse correctly connected?

live
to mains
supply

live

earth

to mains
supply

neutral

earth
neutral

heater

heater

metal case

metal case

live
to mains
supply

live

earth

to mains
supply

neutral

heater

earth
neutral

heater

metal case

metal case

0625/1 S99

31 The diagram shows an electrical hazard.

soft plastic insulation


bare copper wire

hard plastic lamp holder

glass bulb

Which part gives an electric shock if touched?


A

soft plastic insulation

bare copper wire

hard plastic lamp holder

glass bulb

32 Which diagram shows the correct wiring of a transformer?


A

33 Which object makes use of the force on a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field?
A

electric fan

electric kettle

lamp

transformer

0625/1 S99

[Turn over

34 Which diagram shows an electric bell correctly connected?


A

35 A straight wire connected to a milliammeter is placed between the poles of a magnet.


1
3

straight wire

milliammeter

Which change causes a current in the milliameter?


A

moving the wire in direction 1

moving the wire in direction 2

moving the magnet in direction 2

moving the magnet in direction 3

0625/1 S99

36 Particles given off by a hot cathode in a vacuum are attracted to a plate P. There is a high potential
difference between the cathode and plate as shown.
vacuum
hot
cathode

What are these particles?


A

-particles

electrons

neutrons

protons

37 Which of the following is a correct statement about -particles?


A

They are fast-moving electrons.

They are more ionising than -particles.

They are stopped by a thin sheet of paper.

They can pass through a thick sheet of lead.

0625/1 S99

[Turn over

38 The graph shows how the activity of a radioactive source varies with time.
count rate 400
count/minute
300
200
100
0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time
minute

What is the half-life of the source?


A

50 minutes

100 minutes

200 minutes

400 minutes

39 Hydrogen may be written as 11H.


Which line is correct for a neutral hydrogen atom?
number of
electrons

number of
protons

number of
neutrons

0625/1 S99

40 The diagram represents the radioactive decay of a nucleus.

238
92

4
2

He

A
Z

Th

What are the values of A and Z ?

238

93

238

92

236

88

234

90

Go to answers

0625/1 S99

International General Certificate of Secondary Education

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

0625/1

PHYSICS
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Tuesday

9 NOVEMBER 1999

Morning

45 minutes

Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

TIME

45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This question paper consists of 16 printed pages.


(NH) QK93704/4
UCLES 1999

[Turn over

2
1

The digital stopwatches show the finishing times of two runners in a race.
runner 1

min

runner 2

min

What is the time difference between the two runners?


A

1.14 s

7.28 s

8.42 s

15.70 s

The graph shows how the speed of an object changes with time.

speed
m/s

0
0

4
time
s

For how long does the object move?


A

2s

4s

6s

8s

Which statement is true about the weight of an object?


A

Its weight is the same everywhere.

Its weight is measured in kilograms.

Its weight is the force of gravity on it.

Its weight is zero on the Moon.

0625/1 W99

3
4

The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
cm3
30
20
10

What is the density of the liquid?


320 g/cm3

36 g/cm3

1.25 g/cm3

0.8 g/cm3

A heavy box is lifted by a force F, using a lever as shown.

x
F

What happens when the length x is made shorter?


distance F
moves

size of F

bigger

bigger

bigger

smaller

smaller

bigger

smaller

smaller

0625/1 W99

[Turn over

4
6

In which situation is there no resultant force on the car?


40 m/s
A

decreasing speed on a level road

30
B

m/s

going at a constant speed uphill

30
C

30 m/s

m/s
40

increasing speed downhill

30 m/s
D

m/s

40 m/s

increasing speed on a level road

A steel ball is allowed to roll along a frictionless track.


What is the highest point the ball reaches before rolling backwards? Ignore the effects of friction.
B
steel ball
C

What is the source of geothermal energy?


A

coal

hot rocks

tides

waves

0625/1 W99

5
9

Which object converts sound energy into electrical energy?


A

electric bell

loudspeaker

microphone

radio

10 A manometer is connected to a gas tap. Diagram X shows the liquid levels before opening the gas
tap. The gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure.
Which diagram shows what happens to the liquid levels after opening the gas tap?
X

gas tap

from gas supply

liquid
before opening
gas tap

11 The diagram shows water in an outdoor swimming pool.

Sun

water

swimming pool
The water level drops during a hot, sunny day.
What does this show?
A

that water boils at only one temperature

that water can evaporate below its boiling point

that water can expand as it becomes warmer

that water is a poor conductor of heat

0625/1 W99

[Turn over

6
12 A closed container full of gas is left to stand on a bench for a long time.
Which statement about the molecules of the gas is correct?
A

All the molecules are at the bottom of the container.

The fastest moving molecules are at the top of the container.

The molecules are moving at random throughout the container.

The pressure caused by the molecules on the container is greatest at the top of the container.

13 Metal railway lines can be laid in sections with small gaps in between, as shown. The sections are
connected by metal plates.
gap
railway line

metal plate

What is the reason for leaving the gaps?


A

to allow for contraction when the temperature falls

to allow for expansion when the temperature rises

to prevent an electric current in the railway line

to stop large vibrations

14 Four cooking pots are each made of iron.


Which cooking pot has the greatest heat capacity?

mass = 2.0 kg

mass = 1.8 kg

mass = 1.6 kg

mass = 1.4 kg

0625/1 W99

7
15 Two balloons are inflated at the same room temperature until they have the same volume of air
inside. They are then sealed. Balloon X is placed in a refrigerator for some time, while balloon Y
stays at room temperature. The diagram shows the balloons after this time.

balloon
X

balloon
Y

Assuming no air has leaked out of the balloons, which statement is correct?
A

The air in balloon X has contracted.

The air in balloon Y has expanded.

The rubber of balloon Y has expanded.

The rubber of balloon X has frozen and has compressed the air.

16 On a day when the temperature is low, the metal handlebars of a bicycle feel colder than the
plastic handlegrips.
What is the explanation for this?
A

Metals are colder than plastics.

Metals conduct heat better than plastics.

Plastics are softer than metals.

Plastics conduct heat better than metals.

17 A man puts a saucer on top of a cup of tea to keep the tea hot.
saucer

cup

Why does this help to keep the tea hot?


A

Conduction through the cup is reduced.

Convection in the air above the surface of the tea is reduced.

Convection in the tea is reduced.

Radiation from the shiny surface of the cup is reduced.


0625/1 W99

[Turn over

8
18 The following diagram represents a wave.

1 cm
1 cm

What is the wavelength of the wave?


A

8 cm

4 cm

2 cm

1 cm

19 The diagram shows a wavefront striking a plane reflecting surface PQ.


P

wavefront

Which of the following is changed by reflection?


A

direction

frequency

speed

wavelength

20 A child is 1 m tall. She stands 2 m in front of a plane mirror.


mirror
2m

1m

How far away from the child is her image?


A

1m

2m

3m

D
0625/1 W99

4m

9
21 Which diagram shows a possible path for a ray of light passing through water in a beaker with a
mirror at the bottom?
A

water
mirror

22 An electric bell is suspended in a bell-jar as shown. Switch S is closed and air is then pumped
from the jar. The sound of the bell becomes quieter.
S

electric
bell

bell-jar

to vacuum pump

Why does the sound become quieter?


A

Air is needed for an electric current in the bell.

Air is needed for the bells electromagnet to operate.

Air is needed for the bell to vibrate.

Air is needed to transmit sound waves.

0625/1 W99

[Turn over

10
23 A student shouts when standing by a cliff. A short time later the student hears an echo.

cliff

student

Which property of sound causes the echo?


A

diffraction

dispersion

reflection

refraction

24 The diagram shows the circuit for an electromagnet. The core of the electromagnet can be made
from different materials.
material under test

iron nails attracted


to material

When switch S is closed, which material attracts the largest number of iron nails?
A

aluminium

copper

glass

iron

0625/1 W99

11
25 A plotting compass is placed at each end of a magnet.
Which diagram shows the positions of the pointers of the plotting compasses?

26 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a
negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted.

negatively
charged
plastic sheet

What are the original charges on P and on Q?


charge on P

charge on Q

negative

negative

negative

positive

positive

negative

positive

positive

0625/1 W99

[Turn over

12
27 The meter in the circuit measures the potential difference across the resistor.

meter
Which unit is marked on the scale of the meter?
A

amp

ohm

volt

watt

28 Two resistors are connected in a circuit as shown.

2X

3X

What is the total resistance of the resistors?


A

less than 2

between 2 and 3

between 3 and 5

more than 5

0625/1 W99

13
29 The diagram shows a circuit with three lamps and a cell.
+

What is the circuit diagram for the above arrangement?


A

30 Which device can be used to switch off the current in a circuit when the current becomes too
large?
A

capacitor

circuit-breaker

light-dependent resistor

transformer

31 A hair dryer should


(i)

allow the fan to work with or without the heater,

(ii) not allow the heater to work without the fan.


Which circuit should be used?
A

fan
M

heater
C

fan
M

heater
D

fan

fan

heater

heater
0625/1 W99

[Turn over

14
32 A straight wire carries an electric current at right angles to the page. The black dot in each
diagram shows where the wire passes through the page.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern around the wire?
A

33 When electrical energy is transmitted over large distances, a high voltage is used.
Why is this better than using a low voltage?
A

There is a greater current in the cables.

There is less chance of an electric shock.

There is less heating in the cables.

Thicker cables can be used.

34 Which graph shows the output voltage V of an a.c. generator?


B

A
V

V
0

0
0

time

time

V
0

0
0

time

time

35 What is the symbol for a capacitor?


A

0625/1 W99

15
36 A waveform is displayed on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).

1 cm
The time base now changes from 1 ms/cm to 2 ms/cm.
Which diagram shows the new appearance of the waveform on the screen?
A

37 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 10 days.


Which of the following statements is correct?
A

After 5 days, half of the original radioactive nuclei remain.

After 5 days, a quarter of the original radioactive nuclei remain.

After 10 days, half of the original radioactive nuclei remain.

After 20 days, none of the original radioactive nuclei remain.

0625/1 W99

[Turn over

16
38 What can most -particles pass through?
A

2 mm of aluminium

2 mm of lead

2 cm of air

2 cm of concrete

39 The diagram represents an atom.

Which of the following describes the atom?


nucleus

electron

charge on electron

in middle
of atom

orbits round
nucleus

in middle
of atom

orbits round
nucleus

orbits round
electron

in middle
of atom

orbits round
electron

in middle
of atom

40 Which statement about the numbers of particles in a neutral atom must be correct?
A

number of protons = number of electrons

number of protons = number of neutrons

number of protons + number of electrons = number of neutrons

number of protons + number of neutrons = number of electrons

Go to answers
0625/1 W99

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

PHYSICS

0625/1

PAPER 1 Multiple Choice


MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000

45 minutes

Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

TIME

45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This question paper consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


SB (SLC/DJ) QF05707/3
UCLES 2000

[Turn over

2
1

A stopwatch is used to time a student running a 1500 m race.

What is the reading on the stopwatch?

658.31 seconds

6 minutes 58.31 seconds

6.58 minutes 31 seconds

6 hours 58 minutes 31 seconds

A student lets 100 drops of water fall into a measuring cylinder which already contains some
water.
cm3

cm3

50

50

40

40

30

30
new level
of water

original level 20
of water
10

20
10

What is the volume of one drop?


0.05 cm3

0.25 cm3

5.0 cm3

25 cm3

Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a car moving at constant speed?

0
0

time

0
0

time

0
0

0625/1 S00

speed

speed

speed

speed

time

0
0

time

3
4

A student investigates the speed of a trolley and finds that it is 50 cm/s, and one second later that
it is 150 cm/s.
What is the acceleration of the trolley?
A

50 cm/s2

100 cm/s2

150 cm/s2

200 cm/s2

Which property of an object is measured in newtons?


A

density

mass

volume

weight

Which instrument can be used to give a direct measurement of the mass of a rock on the Moon?
A
bathroom scales

B
beam balance

C
force meter

D
top-pan balance

The diagrams show an empty beaker on a balance and some liquid in a measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
80
60

liquid

40
20

When all the liquid is poured into the beaker, the balance reading changes to 140 g.
What is the density of the liquid?
A

(140 60) g/cm3

(60 40) g/cm3


0625/1 S00

(40 60) g/cm3

(60 140) g/cm3


[Turn over

4
8

The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces, F, act on the brick.
Which brick does not move?

F
A

The diagram shows four ways of lifting a heavy box by using a lever.
Which way requires the smallest effort to lift the box?
effort

effort

A
box

box

effort
effort

D
box

box

10 The diagrams show a diver climbing some steps and jumping off a diving board.
Where does the diver have the most gravitational potential energy (energy of position)?
A

0625/1 S00

5
11 The diagrams show four schemes which use a barrier to convert tidal energy into electrical energy.
Which scheme has the greatest output of electrical energy?

turbine

low
water
level

barrier
high
water
level

turbine

barrier
high
water
level

low
water
level

low
water
level

high
water
level

high
water
level

low
water
level

12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.

mercury

What is at X?
A

air at atmospheric pressure

air at high pressure

a vacuum

water vapour
0625/1 S00

[Turn over

6
13 Which diagram shows the best shape for a dam wall?
A

B
dam wall

dam wall

water

C
dam wall

D
dam wall

water

water

water

14 A fixed mass of gas is kept in a sealed cylinder, so that its volume does not change.

GAS

How does a change in the temperature affect the pressure of the gas?
temperature change

pressure change

decreases

increases

decreases

unchanged

increases

decreases

increases

increases

0625/1 S00

7
15 The diagram shows some molecules in a liquid.
Molecules A and D are fast-moving, molecules B and C are slow-moving.
Which of these molecules is the most likely to escape from the liquid by evaporation?
A (fast)

B (slow)

liquid

D (fast)

C (slow)

16 A mercury thermometer without a scale is placed in pure melting ice.

mercury

pure
melting
ice

water
What does the level of mercury in the thermometer show?
A

the boiling point of water

the lower fixed point

the melting point of mercury

the upper fixed point

0625/1 S00

[Turn over

8
17 Some ice is heated at a constant rate in a beaker. The ice melts and later the water boils for a
short while.
Which graph shows how the temperature changes with time?

time

time

temperature/ C

time

C
temperature/ C

B
temperature/ C

temperature/ C

18 A person lifts a hot pan from a stove. Although the pan is hot, the handle is cool.
What is the handle made of?
A

aluminium

copper

iron

wood

19 Warm water enters a tank of cold water from the side.

cold water

warm water

What happens to the warm water and why?


warm water

why?

rises

It is less dense than cold water.

rises

It is more dense than cold water.

sinks

It is less dense than cold water.

sinks

It is more dense than cold water.

0625/1 S00

time

9
20 Plane waves produced in a ripple tank arrive at a barrier that has a small gap.

waves moving in
this direction

What causes the wave pattern that is produced beyond the barrier?
A

diffraction

dispersion

reflection

refraction

21 A floating cork moves up and down as a water wave passes it.


direction of water wave

movement of cork
A candle flame moves backwards and forwards as a sound wave passes it.
direction of sound wave

movement of flame

What does this show about water waves and sound waves?
water waves

sound waves

longitudinal

longitudinal

longitudinal

transverse

transverse

longitudinal

transverse

transverse
0625/1 S00

[Turn over

10
22 Which diagram shows how a real image is formed by the lens?
lens
image

lens
image

lens
image

lens
image

23 A ray of light is reflected from two mirrors as shown.

60

80

30 30
40
50
X

What is the angle of reflection at point X?


A

40

50

60

0625/1 S00

80

11
24 Two windows are double-glazed. Window X is made of two pieces of glass with a vacuum between
them. Window Y is made of two pieces of plastic with air between them.

glass

plastic

vacuum

air

window X

window Y

Which window is better at stopping sound passing through and why?


window

why?

Sound cannot travel through a vacuum.

Sound cannot travel through glass.

Sound cannot travel through air.

Sound cannot travel through plastic.

25 The diagram shows a student standing 165 m in front of a wall. He claps his hands once.

wall

165 m
How long after the handclap does he hear the echo?
[The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.]
A

0.25 s

0.50 s

1.0 s

0625/1 S00

2.0 s

[Turn over

12
26 A magnet is placed in a coil connected to an electrical supply.
magnet

coil

electrical supply
What is the best way to demagnetise the magnet?
A

Use a d.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.

Use a d.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.

Use an a.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.

Use an a.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.

27 A magnet is brought near metal bars X and Y.


S

no effect

repulsion

What are X and Y made of?


X

aluminium

magnetised steel

aluminium

unmagnetised iron

unmagnetised iron

magnetised steel

unmagnetised iron

unmagnetised iron

0625/1 S00

13
28 Which diagram shows how a voltmeter and an ammeter are connected to find the value of the
resistance of resistor R?

A
R
C
V

A
V
D

0625/1 S00

[Turn over

14
29 Two uncharged metal-coated polystyrene spheres, P and Q, are suspended side by side.

Both spheres are then given positive charges.


Which diagram shows the new positions of the spheres?
A

30 Component Y is placed in the circuit shown and is used to reduce the brightness of the lamp
gradually.

Y
What is component Y?
A

a fuse

a relay

a switch

a variable resistor

0625/1 S00

15
31 In the circuit, which ammeter shows the greatest reading?
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A

32 A lamp is connected across the mains supply.


Which diagram shows where the fuse should be connected?
A

live

fuse

live
fuse

neutral

neutral
C

live

live
fuse

neutral

neutral
fuse

33 An electric kettle takes 12 A of current from the mains supply. When the kettles cable needs to be
replaced, a 5 A cable is used that was originally attached to a small lamp. The original plug and
fuse from the kettles cable are used.
Why does this cause a problem?
A

The cable becomes hot and melts the insulation.

The fuse blows as soon as the kettle is switched on.

The kettle becomes too hot.

The water takes too long to reach its boiling point.

0625/1 S00

[Turn over

16
34 Which device makes use of the magnetic effect of an electric current?
A

electric bell

electric fire

fuse

lamp

35 The diagram shows a transformer, with 100 V applied to the primary coil.

100 V

primary coil
(40 turns)

secondary coil
(80 turns)

What is the voltage across the secondary coil?


A

50 V

100 V

200 V

800 V

36 The diagram shows part of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.


particles
from cathode

cathode

Which particles are emitted by the cathode?


A

alpha (-) particles

electrons

neutrons

protons

0625/1 S00

17
37 In the circuit shown, the brightness of the light reaching the light-dependent resistor increases.
light
light-dependant resistor

A ammeter

What happens to the current through the ammeter?


A

It becomes zero.

It decreases.

It does not change.

It increases.

38 Which statement about an alpha (-) particle is correct?


A

It can pass through thick paper.

It has no charge.

It is a helium nucleus.

It is a type of electromagnetic radiation.

0625/1 S00

[Turn over

18
39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source plotted against time.
80
70
60
50
activity
40
counts/min
30
20
10
0
0

time/hours
After what time is the activity one quarter of its original value?
A

1 hour

2 hours

3 hours

4 hours

Co.
40 A nuclide of cobalt is shown by the symbol 60
27
How many protons and neutrons are there in the nucleus of this nuclide?
protons

neutrons

27

33

27

60

60

27

60

87

Go to answers

0625/1 S00

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

0625/1

PHYSICS
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Tuesday

7 NOVEMBER 2000

Morning

45 minutes

Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

TIME

45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SB (KN/TC) QK07573/3
UCLES 2000

[Turn over

2
1

The diagram shows a measuring cylinder.

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10

Which unit would be most suitable for its scale?


A

mm2

mm3

cm2

cm3

The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and at the finish of an experiment.
stopclock
at start

stopclock
at finish

60

60

45

15

45

30

30

How long did the experiment take?


A

10 s

25 s

15

35 s

0625/1 W00

45 s

3
3

A ball is thrown up into the air. The diagram shows the balls path.
Y

Ignoring air resistance, which statement about the acceleration of the ball is correct?
It is least at point X.

It is zero at point Y.

It is greatest at point Z.

It is the same at points X, Y and Z.

Which graph shows the speed of a stone, dropped from the top of a building, until it hits the
ground? (Assume there is no air resistance.)

time

time

0625/1 W00

speed

speed

speed

speed

time

time

[Turn over

4
5

The diagram shows a book resting on a slope.


In which direction does the weight of the book act?
A

B
D C

An astronaut has a mass of 60 kg on the Moon.


What is the mass of this astronaut on Earth?
A

6 kg

60 kg

60 N

600 N

R and S

The table shows information about four objects.


object

mass/g

volume/cm3

30

40

50

10

50

Which two objects have the same density?


A

P and Q

P and R

Q and S

0625/1 W00

5
8

A student tries to balance a 10 kg bag of rice on a pivoted beam, using a 5 kg bag of rice.

5 kg
10 kg
pivot

What should be done to balance the bags?

add some rice to the 10 kg bag

empty some rice out of the 5 kg bag

move the pivot away from the 10 kg bag

move the pivot towards the 10 kg bag

A hot-air balloon moves in the direction shown at constant speed and at constant height.
W, X, Y and Z are the forces acting on the balloon.

direction of
movement

Which statement about the forces is correct?


A

Z is equal to X and W is equal to Y.

Z is equal to X and W is less than Y.

Z is less than X and W is equal to Y.

Z is less than X and W is less than Y.

0625/1 W00

[Turn over

6
10 The diagram shows the main parts of a hydroelectric power station.
water

dam
wall

generator
turbine

Which energy change occurs in the generator?


A

chemical to electrical

electrical to chemical

electrical to kinetic

kinetic to electrical

11 Forces are used to move objects P, Q, R and S through the distances shown.

5N

10 N

5N

10 N

Which statement correctly describes the work done by each force?


A

Most work is done in moving R.

Most work is done in moving S.

The same amount of work is done in moving P and Q.

The same amount of work is done in moving P and R.

0625/1 W00

7
12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.

25 cm

mercury

75 cm

5 cm

Which distance can be used to find atmospheric pressure?


A

25 cm

75 cm

80 cm

100 cm

13 A child has a set of identical building blocks.


Which arrangement produces the least pressure on the floor?

A
C
B
D

14 Liquid evaporates from an open dish.


Which molecules of liquid are most likely to escape?
A

all molecules with a little energy

all molecules with a lot of energy

surface molecules with a little energy

surface molecules with a lot of energy

0625/1 W00

[Turn over

8
15 A lorry driver checks the pressure of the air in the tyres when the temperature is 5 C. After a long
journey, the tyres are hot and the pressure of the air in the tyres has increased.
Why has the pressure increased?
A

Some air has leaked from the tyres during the journey.

The air in the tyres is less dense.

The average speed of the air molecules is greater.

The tyres have expanded and have a larger volume.

16 Long pipes that carry steam often have bends in them, as shown.

Why are these bends needed?


A

to allow for expansion

to allow for pressure changes

to make the pipes stronger

to reduce the flow of steam

17 A solid substance is heated. The graph shows the change in temperature of the substance with
time.
At which stage does melting take place?

stage
A

stage
B

stage
C

temperature

time

0625/1 W00

stage
D

9
18 At the end of a long race, a runner is wrapped in a thin, plastic blanket that has a shiny, metallic
surface.
Which type of heat loss is the shiny surface intended to reduce?
A

conduction

convection

evaporation

radiation

19 A woman stands by a fire to warm her hands and legs.

How does most of the heat reach her hands and legs?
hands

legs

convection

convection

radiation

convection

convection

radiation

radiation

radiation

0625/1 W00

[Turn over

10
20 The diagram shows waves in a ripple tank passing from deep water to shallow water.

shallow water

deep water

wavefront

What happens to the speed and frequency of the waves?


speed

frequency

decreases

decreases

decreases

unchanged

increases

increases

unchanged

increases

21 The diagram represents a wave.

displacement
P

distance
S

R
What is the amplitude and wavelength of the wave?
amplitude

wavelength

0625/1 W00

11
22 A paper-clip is placed in front of a plane mirror.

paper-clip

plane mirror

Which diagram shows the image formed behind the mirror?


A

23 A ray of white light passes into each glass block as shown.


Which block produces dispersion of the light?
A

0625/1 W00

[Turn over

12
24 The diagram shows apparatus used to find what happens to the sound from an electric bell as air
is removed from the container.

electric
bell
container

to vacuum
pump

What happens to the sound of the electric bell heard from outside the container?
A

It becomes louder.

It becomes quieter.

It becomes quieter, then louder.

It remains the same.

0625/1 W00

13
25 Two students stand 600 m apart.
student with
starting-pistol

student with
stopwatch

600 m
not to scale
They find that it takes 2 seconds for the sound from the starting pistol to travel from one student to
the other.
From these results, what is the speed of sound in air?
A

150 m/s

300 m/s

600 m/s

1200 m/s

26 A piece of soft iron is placed in a coil. The switch is then closed.


soft iron
switch open

What is the condition of the soft iron when the switch is open and when the switch is closed?
switch open

switch closed

magnetised

magnetised

magnetised

unmagnetised

unmagnetised

magnetised

unmagnetised unmagnetised

0625/1 W00

[Turn over

14
27 When a magnet is brought near some metals, it induces magnetic poles in the metals.
Which diagram shows the poles induced when a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised
piece of iron and to an unmagnetised piece of aluminium?
iron
A
N

magnet

aluminium
iron

B
N

magnet

S
(no poles)
aluminium
iron

C
N

magnet

aluminium
iron

D
N

magnet

S
(no poles)
aluminium

28 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the
cell?
A

V
V
V
V

0625/1 W00

15
29 Which diagram shows the directions of the electrostatic forces acting on two positively charged
spheres?
A

+
D

30 What is the correct symbol for a fuse?

31 In which circuit is lamp L1 lit, but lamp L2 unlit?


A

L1

L2

L1

L2

0625/1 W00

L1

L2

L1

L2

[Turn over

16
32 The diagram shows the structure of a fuse.
metal end cap

ceramic case

wire X

What is the purpose of wire X?


A

to decrease the resistance of the circuit

to increase the current in the circuit

to keep the end caps on

to melt when the current becomes too large

33 A wiring diagram for car headlamps and parking lamps is shown.

36 W
36 W
5W
5W

Why are the lamps connected in parallel?


A

so that, if one lamp goes out, the others will remain lit

so that the current in each lamp is the same

so that the lamps operate at normal brightness, even when the battery runs down

so that the voltage across each lamp is one quarter of the battery voltage

0625/1 W00

17
34 The diagram shows a step-up transformer.

input
(few turns)

output
(many turns)

What is stepped up by this type of transformer?


A

current

energy

power

voltage

35 Which diagram shows how a coil of wire and a magnet can be used to produce an electric current
through a meter?
magnet

movement

coil

C
coil
glued
on to
magnet

meter

0625/1 W00

[Turn over

18
36 The diagram shows part of an alarm circuit.

capacitor

What does the capacitor do?


A

It detects changes in light intensity.

It detects changes in temperature.

It produces a magnetic field.

It stores electrical energy.

37 The charges on the x-plates and y-plates of a cathode-ray oscilloscope cause the spot on the
screen to move to the position shown.
y-plate
screen
x-plate

x-plate
spot
y-plate

Which diagram shows how the plates are charged?


A
_

spot

spot

0625/1 W00

+
spot

spot
_

D
_

19
38 A piece of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector. What are the possible
radiations that can pass through the paper?
A

alpha () radiation only.

alpha () and gamma () radiation only.

beta () and gamma () radiation only.

alpha (), beta () and gamma () radiation.

39 The graph shows how the activity of a radioactive substance changes with time.
800
700
600
500

activity
counts/min

400
300
200
100
0
0

time/min
What is the half-life of the substance?
A

1 min

2 min

3 min

4 min

40 The diagram represents a helium atom.


key

e = electron
p = proton

p p
n n

n = neutron
= nucleus

e
What is the nucleon number (mass number) of the atom?
A

8
0625/1 W00

Go to answers

International General Certificate of Secondary Education

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

PHYSICS
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001

0625/1
45 minutes

Additional materials:
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

TIME

45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in
soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


ND/CG QF10308/3
UCLES 2001

[Turn over

2
1

A student measures the width of a book using a ruler.


Which diagram shows the best way to do this?
book

10

20

30 cm

10

20

30 cm

10

20

30 cm

10

20

30 cm

The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and finish of an experiment.
stopclock
at start
60

stopclock
at finish
60

45

15

45

30

30

How long did the experiment take?


A

10 s

25 s

15

35 s

0625/1/M/J/01

45 s

3
3

An apple falls from a tree. The diagram shows the apple at P, as it starts to fall, and at Q, just
before it hits the ground. The acceleration due to gravity is g. Air resistance can be ignored.

What is the acceleration of the apple at position P and at position Q?

acceleration at P

acceleration at Q

In a race, a car travels 60 times round a 3.6 km track. It takes 2.4 hours.
What is the average speed of the car?
A

2.5 km / h

90 km / h

144 km / h

216 km / h

0625/1/M/J/01

[Turn over

4
5

A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.

spring

metal
What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?

friction

mass

pressure

weight

A child of mass 40 kg sits on one end of a see-saw. The pivot is at the centre of the see-saw.
There are four sacks of sand, each with a different mass, as shown.
40 kg

see saw
X

30kg 20kg 10kg 5kg


pivot
How many of the sacks must be placed at X to balance the child?
A

An object has a mass of 75 g and a volume of 15 cm3.


What is its density?
A

0.2 g / cm3

5 g / cm3

60 g / cm3

0625/1/M/J/01

90 g / cm3

5
8

The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces F act on the brick.
In which diagram does the brick not move?
A

Four rings are screwed into a door, as shown. The door can be opened by putting a hook into
one of the rings and pulling.

B
A
C
D

pull

Which ring should be used if the pulling force is to be as small as possible?

0625/1/M/J/01

[Turn over

6
10 A stone is thrown into the air. The diagram shows the path of the stone through the air.
At which position is the potential energy of the stone greatest?
C
B

11 Four weightlifters lift weights to different heights.


Which weightlifter does the most work?
A

1000 N lifted
through 1.0 m

1000 N lifted
through 1.2 m

0625/1/M/J/01

1200 N lifted
through 1.0 m

1200 N lifted
through 1.2 m

7
12 The diagram shows a simple barometer.
Which distance should be measured to find the atmospheric pressure?

vacuum

mercury

trough

13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on snow.
X

Which boy is more likely to sink into the snow and why?
boy

pressure on snow

larger than Y

smaller than Y

larger than X

smaller than X

0625/1/M/J/01

[Turn over

8
14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.
trapped air
direction of
motion
handle
What happens to the pressure and the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed
in?
pressure

volume

decreases

decreases

decreases

remains the same

increases

decreases

increases

remains the same

15 To keep a bottle of milk cold without a refrigerator on a hot day, the bottle can be covered with a
damp cloth in a bowl of water.
damp cloth
bottle
milk
bowl
water

How does this method keep the milk cold?


A

Milk condenses on the cloth.

Milk evaporates from the cloth.

Water condenses on the cloth.

Water evaporates from the cloth.

0625/1/M/J/01

9
16 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
0C

liquid

100C

glass bulb

stem

When the thermometer becomes hotter, the liquid moves further along the stem.
Why is this?
A

The glass contracts.

The glass expands.

The liquid contracts.

The liquid expands.

17 Two copper rods, A and C, and two copper tubes, B and D, have the same external diameter.
Which rod has the highest thermal capacity?

A
B
C
D

0625/1/M/J/01

[Turn over

10
18 On a cold night, two children sit next to a camp fire to warm their hands. Their hands are the
same distance from the fire. Child 1 holds his hands over the fire and child 2 holds her hands in
front of the fire.
child 1's hands

child 2's hands

How does the heat from the fire reach each childs hands?
child 1

child 2

convection only

radiation only

convection and radiation

radiation only

radiation only

convection and radiation

radiation only

convection only

19 An electric kettle contains a metal heating element.

water

heating element

What are the main processes by which heat energy is transferred from the element to the water,
and throughout the water?
heat transfer process
element to water

throughout water

conduction

convection

convection

radiation

radiation

conduction

radiation

convection
0625/1/M/J/01

11
20 The diagrams show four sources of waves.
Which source generates longitudinal waves?
A

stick pushed up
and down in water

radio
transmitter

loudspeaker

lamp

21 The diagram shows a wave on the surface of some water.


At which two points are the molecules moving in the same vertical direction at the same time?

Q
T

R
S

P and Q

P and T

Q and T

R and S

0625/1/M/J/01

[Turn over

12
22 The diagrams show a semi-circular glass block.
Which diagram correctly shows the path of the ray of light and the critical angle c?
A

B
c

D
c

23 A student copies a diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum but makes a mistake.


radio
waves

microwaves

infra-red
waves

visible
light

Xrays

ultra-violet
waves

long wavelength

gamma
rays

short wavelength

Which two names should be interchanged so that the order is correct?


A

infra-red waves and radio waves

infra-red waves and ultra-violet waves

radio waves and visible light

ultra-violet waves and X-rays

24 An electric bell is ringing inside a glass dome.


In which situation would the bell sound quietest?
A

vacuum

electric
bell

electric
bell

glass
dome

glass
dome

air

oxygen

0625/1/M/J/01

carbon
dioxide

13
25 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high. What information
does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave produced?
amplitude

frequency

too large

too large

too large

too small

too small

too large

too small

too small

26 The diagrams show a magnetised piece of steel being moved slowly to the left.
Which diagram shows the best method of demagnetising the steel?
A

d.c.

a.c.

steel

steel
C
S

D
magnet

steel

magnet

steel

0625/1/M/J/01

[Turn over

14
27 The diagram shows some nails attracted to a metal rod by magnetic induction.

permanent
magnet

N
metal
rod

nails

From what could the metal rod be made?


A

aluminium

copper

iron

magnesium

28 What is the unit of potential difference?


A

joule

newton

volt

watt

0625/1/M/J/01

15
29 A plastic strip is rubbed on a piece of cloth and then held near water running slowly from a tap.
The water moves towards the plastic strip.
tap

plastic strip
water
Why does this happen?
A

The plastic strip cools the water.

The plastic strip warms the water.

There is a magnetic force on the water.

There is an electrostatic force on the water.

30 The diagrams show part of an electric circuit containing an ammeter and a voltmeter.
Which arrangement should be used to measure the p.d. across the resistor and the current
through it?
A

B
A

D
V

V
A

0625/1/M/J/01

[Turn over

16
31 The circuits contain identical lamps and identical cells.
In which circuit will the lamps be brightest?
A

32 Why are lamps in the lighting circuit of a house connected in parallel and not in series?
A

It allows them to be switched on and off independently.

It uses less electrical energy.

The filaments are less likely to burn out.

The p.d. across each lamp is reduced.

33 A builder plugs an electric drill into a socket inside a house.

house

electric cable

He uses the drill outdoors. It starts to rain heavily.


Why is it dangerous to continue using the electric drill in the rain?
A

The drill could give the builder an electric shock.

The drill could overheat.

The fuse could blow.

The rain could rust the drill.

0625/1/M/J/01

17
34 A wire is placed between the poles of a magnet and is briefly connected to a cell. It experiences
a downwards force.
downwards
force

magnet

The cell is now reversed so that it is connected the other way round.
What happens to the direction of the magnetic field of the magnet and to the direction of the
force on the wire?
direction of magnetic field

direction of force

reversed

reversed

reversed

unchanged

unchanged

reversed

unchanged

unchanged

35 The diagram represents a transformer.

input
voltage

output
voltage

Which arrangement would make the output voltage higher than the input voltage?
number of turns on
primary coil P

number of turns on
secondary coil S

50

100

a.c.

50

100

d.c.

100

50

a.c.

100

50

d.c.

0625/1/M/J/01

type of input
voltage

[Turn over

18
36 Which circuit will act as a variable potential divider?
A

output
input

input
output

input

input

output

output

37 The circuit shown contains a light dependent resistor (LDR) and an ammeter, in series with a
battery.

How does the circuit behave when more light shines on it?
resistance of LDR

current through ammeter

decreases

decreases

decreases

increases

increases

decreases

increases

increases

0625/1/M/J/01

19
38 A thick sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector.

radioactive
source

detector

sheet of paper

Which types of radiation can pass through the paper?


A

alpha-particles, beta-particles and gamma radiation

alpha-particles and gamma radiation

alpha-particles and beta-particles

beta-particles and gamma radiation

39 The count rate of radiation produced by a radioactive sample is measured every minute. The
results are recorded in the table.
time / minutes

count rate / per second

0
1
2
3
4
5

80
56
40
28
20
14

What is the half-life of the radioactive material?


A

 minute

2 minutes

2  minutes

5 minutes

3 Li
7

40 A nuclide of lithium contains 3 protons and 4 neutrons.


Which symbol represents this nuclide?
A

4 Li
3

3 Li
4

7 Li
3

Go to answers
0625/1/M/J/01

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

PHYSICS
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001

0625/1
45 minutes

Additional materials:
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

TIME

45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in
soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This question paper consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


SPA (ND/CG) S09093/4
UCLES 2001

[Turn over

2
1

The diagram shows a measuring cylinder.

cm3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

What volume of liquid does the cylinder contain?


A

5.5 cm3

5.7 cm3

6.5 cm3

6.7 cm3

The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.

0 cm 1

What is the internal diameter d of the tube?


A

2.8 cm

3.1 cm

3.4 cm

0625/1/O/N/01

7.4 cm

10

11

3
3

An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.
Which graph shows this motion?

speed

speed

0
0

time

speed

speed

time

time

time

A motorist travels 200 km.


After travelling along a fast road for 2 hours, the motorist uses a slow road for the remaining
 hour of the journey.
start
fast road 2 hours
slow road 1/2 hour

finish
What is the average speed of the car?
A

80 km / h

100 km / h

400 km / h

0625/1/O/N/01

500 km / h

[Turn over

4
5

Which of the following has the same unit as weight?


A

energy

force

mass

power

The mass of an astronaut is 70 kg on the Moon.


What is the astronauts mass on Earth?
A

7 kg

70 kg

80 kg

700 kg

Which of the following is a unit of density?


A

cm3 / g

g / cm2

g / cm3

kg / m2

A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension/load graph for a spring. The diagrams
show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added.
start

with load added


x

What is the extension caused by the load?


A

y+x

yx

0625/1/O/N/01

5
9

Diagram X shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on a van when it is moving
forward at constant speed.
diagram X
(constant speed)
CIE
force Q

force R

Diagram Y shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on the same van when it is
accelerating.
diagram Y
(accelerating)
CIE
force S

force T

Which of the following describes the sizes of the forces Q, R, S and T?


diagram X
(constant speed)

diagram Y
(accelerating)

Q less than R

S less than T

Q less than R

S equal to T

Q equal to R

S less than T

Q equal to R

S equal to T

0625/1/O/N/01

[Turn over

6
10 A pole-vaulter runs up to a jump with his pole straight. He puts one end of the pole down on the
ground and the pole bends.
before

after

pole

Which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent?


A

chemical

gravitational

motion

strain

11 A ball is allowed to roll down a slope, as shown in the diagram. There is no friction.
At which point does the ball have the greatest energy of motion (kinetic energy)?
start

A
C
B
D

0625/1/O/N/01

7
12 A pin is squeezed between finger and thumb.

finger
pinhead
pin
thumb

Which statement is correct?


A

The force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.

The force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.

The pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.

The pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.

13 The diagram shows a manometer attached to an inflated balloon.

balloon
mercury

What does the difference between the mercury levels show?


A

The air pressure inside the balloon is greater than atmospheric pressure.

The air pressure outside the balloon is greater than the pressure inside the balloon.

The air pressure in the left and right sides of the tube is equal.

The air pressure in the left side of the tube is greater than the pressure on the right side.

0625/1/O/N/01

[Turn over

8
14 A gas is heated at constant volume.
What happens to its pressure and the speed of its molecules?
gas pressure

speed of molecules

decreases

decreases

decreases

increases

increases

decreases

increases

increases

15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances.
Which substance is a gas at 25 C?
melting point / C

boiling point / C

-219

-183

-7

58

98

890

1083

2582

16 In an experiment, a piece of melting ice and a beaker of boiling water are in a laboratory which is
at 20 C.

boiling water
melting ice

Bunsen burner
heating water

What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and of the boiling water?
temperature of the
melting ice

temperature of the
boiling water

constant

constant

constant

increasing

increasing

constant

increasing

increasing

0625/1/O/N/01

9
17 The glass stopper in the neck of a glass bottle is too tight to come out.
Which diagram shows the best way to loosen the stopper?
A

in a stream of
cold water for a
short time

in a stream of
hot water for a
short time

inside a warm
oven for a
long time

inside a refrigerator
for a long time

18 A camper warms her hands near a gas lamp.

Which waves carry most heat to her hands, and are these waves electromagnetic?
waves

electromagnetic

infra-red

no

infra-red

yes

light

no

light

yes

0625/1/O/N/01

[Turn over

10
19 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Metal balls are
stuck with wax to rods made of different metals, as shown in diagram X.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y.
Which metal is the best conductor of heat?
diagram X

diagram Y

heat

heat

D
C
B
A
after heating

before heating

20 Plane water waves are approaching a narrow gap in a barrier.


Which diagram shows the diffraction pattern?
A

0625/1/O/N/01

11
21 The diagram shows four waves drawn to the same scale.
P

0
0

0
0

distance

distance

0
0

0
0

distance

distance

Which statement is correct?


A

The amplitude of wave P is the same as the amplitude of wave R.

The amplitude of wave S is double the amplitude of wave Q.

The wavelength of wave Q is double the wavelength of wave P.

The wavelength of wave S is the same as the wavelength of wave Q.

22 Which diagram shows how a ray of light passes through a glass prism in a periscope?
A

0625/1/O/N/01

[Turn over

12
23 The diagram shows a section of the electromagnetic spectrum.

gamma-rays

X-rays

ultra-violet rays

visible light
How do the frequency and the speed of gamma rays compare with those of visible light?
frequency

speed in a vacuum

gamma greater

same

visible greater

same

gamma greater

gamma faster

visible greater

visible faster

24 Which change would make a sound louder?


A

decreasing the amplitude of the wave

increasing the amplitude of the wave

decreasing the wavelength

increasing the wavelength

0625/1/O/N/01

13
25 A lighted candle is put in front of a loudspeaker which is making a loud, steady note. The flame
vibrates because of the sound wave.

loudspeaker

candle

Which type of waves are sound waves and in which direction does the flame vibrate?
type of wave
A

longitudinal

transverse

longitudinal

transverse

direction of vibration

26 When a magnet is brought close to an unmagnetised piece of iron, the iron becomes
magnetised.
Which diagram correctly shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron?
A

magnet

iron

S
magnet

iron

iron

0625/1/O/N/01

N
S

S
N
iron

[Turn over

14
27 Two rods X and Y look the same.

magnet

P
N

rod X

rod Y
S
The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these
four actions are shown in the table.
end tested

result

attraction

attraction

attraction

repulsion

Which of the rods is a magnet?


A

neither of the rods

both of the rods

rod X only

rod Y only

0625/1/O/N/01

15
28 Which circuit could be used to find the resistance of resistor R?

R
R
A

R
V

29 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.


What charges must the rod and the balloon carry?
A

The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.

The rod and the balloon carry like charges.

The rod is charged but the balloon is not.

The balloon is charged but the rod is not.

30 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to
be varied from bright to dim.

Z
What should be connected at Z?

0625/1/O/N/01

[Turn over

16
31 A student uses four ammeters to measure the current in different parts of a circuit.
P

10

R
A

20

S
A

Which two ammeters will each read the largest current?


A

P and Q

P and R

R and Q

R and S

32 Four lamps are each labelled 240 V, 60 W.


In which circuit would all four lamps have the correct brightness?

240 V

240 V

240 V

240 V

0625/1/O/N/01

17
33 A student makes the circuit shown.
5 A fuse

The fuse has blown and stopped the current.


What could have caused this?
A

A 3 A fuse should have been used.

The lamp was loose.

The current was too large.

The voltage was too small.

34 A coil is connected to a battery and a soft-iron bar is hung near to it.

soft iron
coil
The current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections.
How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?
with the battery as shown

with the battery reversed

attracted to the coil

attracted to the coil

attracted to the coil

repelled from the coil

repelled from the coil

attracted to the coil

repelled from the coil

repelled from the coil

0625/1/O/N/01

[Turn over

18
35 A wire carries an electric current between the poles of a magnet. This causes a force that
pushes the wire upwards.
force on wire

current into
page
The poles of the magnet and the direction of the current are both reversed.
Which arrow now shows the direction of the force on the wire?
A

force on wire

N D

B S

current out
of page

0625/1/O/N/01

19
36 Which graph shows how a thermistor could behave?
A

resistance

resistance

brightness of light

resistance

brightness of light

resistance

temperature

temperature

37 The diagram shows a circuit which includes a switch and a capacitor.


Y
switch
X

capacitor

What happens to the capacitor when the switch is at X and when it is at Y?


switch at X

switch at Y

charging

charging

charging

discharging

discharging

charging

discharging

discharging

0625/1/O/N/01

[Turn over

20
38 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.

activity/
counts per
second

120
90
60
30
0
0

2
3
4
time/minutes

What is the half-life of the source?


A

1 minute

2 minutes

2  minutes

4 minutes

39 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms give out alpha-particles.
1st particle
atom
1
atom
2

atom
5

atom
3

atom
4

2nd particle
Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle.
Which atom will give out the next particle?
A

atom 2

atom 4

atom 5

it is impossible to tell

0625/1/O/N/01

21
40 The diagram shows the particles in an atom. Charged particles are marked + or .

What is the nucleon number (mass number) of the atom?


A

13

Go to answers
0625/1/O/N/01

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

0625/1

PHYSICS
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice

OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002


45 minutes
Additional materials:
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

TIME

45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in
soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This question paper consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


SP (AT/KN) S24280/2
CIE 2002

[Turn over

2
1

The diagram shows a stopwatch, originally set at 00:00.


When a car was first seen, the stop-start button was pressed. When the car passed the observer,
the stopwatch showed 01:06.
stop-start button
min

01 : 06

How long did the car take to reach the observer?

1.06 seconds

6 seconds

66 seconds

106 seconds

A girl uses a rule to measure the length of a metal rod. Because the end of the rule is damaged,
she places one end of the rod at the 1 cm mark as shown.
metal rod
damaged
end

How long is the metal rod?


A

43 mm

46 mm

53 mm

0625/1/O/N/02

56 mm

cm

3
3

A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff into the sea. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A

acceleration

acceleration

0
0

time
C

acceleration

acceleration

0
0

time

time

time

A child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains.

A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3 s to pass the child.


What is the length of the train?
A

10 m

30 m

90 m

270 m

Which of the following statements is correct?


A

Mass and weight are different names for the same thing.

The mass of an object is different if the object is taken to the Moon.

The weight of a car is one of the forces acting on the car.

The weight of a chocolate bar is measured in kilograms.

0625/1/O/N/02

[Turn over

4
6

In an experiment, six identical bags of flour are balanced by a 9 kg mass.

six bags
of flour

9 kg mass

pivot
Two bags of flour are removed. What mass will balance the remaining bags?
A

3 kg

6 kg

7 kg

9 kg

The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid are shown in the
diagram.
cm3

cm3

100

100

liquid
50

50

mass = 140 g

mass = 217 g

What is the density of the liquid?


A

217 g / cm3
52

217 g / cm3
70

77 g / cm3
52

In which of these situations is no resultant force needed?


A

a car changing direction

a car moving in a straight line at a steady speed

a car slowing down

a car speeding up

0625/1/O/N/02

77 g / cm3
70

5
9

The diagram shows sections of four objects, all of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass
of each object has been marked with a cross.
Which object is the most stable?
A

10 A car accelerates along a road as it rises uphill.

Which energy changes are taking place?

energy of motion
(kinetic energy)

energy of position
(gravitational potential energy)

decreasing

decreasing

decreasing

increasing

increasing

decreasing

increasing

increasing

11 In a car engine, energy stored in the fuel is converted into thermal energy (heat energy) and
energy of motion (kinetic energy).
In which form is the energy stored in the fuel?
A

chemical

geothermal

hydroelectric

nuclear

0625/1/O/N/02

[Turn over

6
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
vacuum
level X

level Y
mercury
If atmospheric pressure increases, what happens to level X and to level Y?

level X

level Y

goes down

goes down

goes down

goes up

goes up

goes down

goes up

goes up

13 Four flower vases have circular bases. They are filled with water so that they all have the same
weight.
Which vase exerts the greatest pressure on its base?
A

14 Some gas in a sealed plastic bag is placed in a refrigerator to cool down.


How do the gas molecules behave when this happens?
A

They move more quickly and are closer together.

They move more quickly and are further apart.

They move more slowly and are closer together.

They move more slowly and are further apart.

0625/1/O/N/02

7
15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly
compressed.
piston
gas
piston pushed in

If the temperature of the gas does not change, what happens to the pressure of the gas?
A

It drops to zero.

It decreases, but not to zero.

It stays the same.

It increases.

16 A mercury-in-glass thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures from 0 C to 100 C.


Why is mercury suitable?
A

Mercury expands when heated.

Mercury has a boiling point below 100 C.

Mercury has a melting point above 0 C.

Mercury is a poor conductor.

17 A block of ice is heated at a constant rate. Eventually the melted ice boils.
The graph shows how the temperature changes with time.
100
temperature / C

0
0

10
time / minutes

How many minutes did it take to melt all the ice?


A

11

0625/1/O/N/02

13

[Turn over

8
18 How does thermal energy (heat energy) travel through the vacuum between the Earth and the
Sun?
A

by conduction

by convection

by radiation

by radioactive decay

19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid
is put on top as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench

Which statement is correct?


A

Heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.

No heat passes through the sides of either cup.

The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.

The lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.

0625/1/O/N/02

9
20 Waves are sent along two long springs X and Y as shown.
spring X
direction of
wave travel

side to
side
movement

backward
and

spring Y

direction of
wave travel

forward
movement
How should the wave motions in X and Y be described?

spring X

spring Y

longitudinal

longitudinal

longitudinal

transverse

transverse

longitudinal

transverse

transverse

21 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.

hill

The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A

diffracted.

radiated.

reflected.

refracted.

0625/1/O/N/02

[Turn over

10
22 One of the effects of passing a ray of white light through a prism is to split the light into colours.

prism

white light
coloured light
What is the name given to this effect?
A

deviation

dispersion

reflection

refraction

23 A student looks at the letter P on a piece of paper, and at its reflection in a mirror.
What does he see?
A

D
mirror

mirror

paper

paper

24 Which of the following can be heard by the human ear?


A

A whistle emitting a wave of frequency 50 kHz.

A bat emitting a wave of frequency of 30 kHz.

An insect emitting a wave of 300 Hz.

A vibrating spring emitting a wave of frequency of 5 Hz.

0625/1/O/N/02

11
25 Two sound waves P and Q are displayed on an oscilloscope with the same time-base and
Y-plate settings for each.

Which statement correctly describes the pitch and the loudness of the two sounds?
A

P has a higher pitch and is louder than Q.

P has a higher pitch and is quieter than Q.

P has a lower pitch and is louder than Q.

P has a lower pitch and is quieter than Q.

26 A piece of magnetised steel is placed inside a coil of wire that has a large alternating current
passing through it. The magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position P.

steel magnet moved


out of coil

12 V a.c.
How has the steel changed when it reaches P?
A

It has become demagnetised.

There has been no change.

It has become a stronger magnet.

The poles have changed ends.

0625/1/O/N/02

[Turn over

12
27 A permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron PQ.
permanent
magnet

soft-iron bar

What happens?
A

P becomes a north pole.

P becomes a south pole.

PQ does not become magnetised.

The poles of the magnet are reversed.

28 In which circuit does the ammeter read the total current through both resistors?
B

A
A

0625/1/O/N/02

13
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four light bulbs.
Which bulb has the greatest resistance when used normally?

voltage / V

current / A

0.5

0.2

12

12
1.0

30 In the following circuits, the resistors have the same value and the cells are identical.
Which circuit has the smallest resistance?
A

31 The diagram shows a circuit, with four possible positions to place a switch.

lamp 1
C

lamp 2

At which labelled point should a switch be placed so that lamp 1 remains on all the time and
lamp 2 can be switched on and off?

0625/1/O/N/02

[Turn over

14
32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much
current flows.

What is device X?
A

a fuse

a relay

a resistor

an ammeter

33 A classroom has four lights, each fitted with a lamp marked 240 V, 100 W.
Which circuit is most suitable for the classroom?
A

240 V

240 V

240 V

240 V

0625/1/O/N/02

15
34 Which graph shows the output of a simple a.c. generator?
A

e.m.f.

e.m.f.
0

0
time

time

e.m.f.

e.m.f.
0

0
time

0625/1/O/N/02

time

[Turn over

16
35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the
wire.
X
current
force
magnet

magnet
N

Y
If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on
the wire act?
A

downwards

upwards

to the left

to the right

36 Charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope.


What is the name and charge of these particles?
name of particles

charge of particles

electrons

negative

electrons

positive

protons

negative

protons

positive

0625/1/O/N/02

17
37 Diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100 resistors.

100
100

Diagram 1
One of the resistors is changed to 90 , as shown in diagram 2.

90
100

Diagram 2
How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done?
A

It becomes zero.

It decreases a little.

It increases a little.

It stays the same.

38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick
aluminium.
paper

thick aluminium

radiation
no radiation
passes through

all radiation
passes through
What does this show about the radiation?
A

It is alpha-particles.

It is beta-particles.

It is gamma-rays.

It is a mixture of alpha-particles and gamma-rays.

0625/1/O/N/02

[Turn over

18
39 A sample of a radioactive isotope is decaying.
Which atoms will decay first?
A

impossible to know, because radioactive decay is random

impossible to know, unless the age of the material is known

atoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms

atoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily

40 Which line in the table gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in the nuclide 73 Li?
protons

neutrons

0625/1/O/N/02

19
BLANK PAGE

0625/1/O/N/02

20
BLANK PAGE

0625/1/O/N/02

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2003
45 minutes
Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


SP (SLC/KN) S45991/2
CIE 2003

[Turn over

2
1

A glass tank contains some water.

V
water
T

Q
U

R
The length QR and the width RS of the tank are known.
What other distance needs to be measured in order to be able to calculate the volume of the
water?
A

ST

SV

TU

TV

A stopwatch is used to time a race. The diagrams show the watch at the start and at the end of the
race.
start

55

end

60

55
10

50

40
35

30

45.7 s

46.0 s

15

40

25

46.5 s

0625/01/M/J/03

47.0 s

20

seconds
35

How long did the race take?


A

10

45

20

seconds

50

15

45

60

30

25

3
3

The diagram shows a speed-time graph for a body moving with constant acceleration.

speed

time

0
What is represented by the shaded area under the graph?

acceleration

distance

speed

time

A tunnel has a length of 50 km. A car takes 20 min to travel between the two ends of the tunnel.
What is the average speed of the car?

2.5 km / h

16.6 km / h

150 km / h

1000 km / h

Which statement is correct?


A

Mass is a force, measured in kilograms.

Mass is a force, measured in newtons.

Weight is a force, measured in kilograms.

Weight is a force, measured in newtons.

0625/01/M/J/03

[Turn over

4
6

Three children, X, Y and Z, are using a see-saw to compare their weights.


X

Which line in the table shows the correct order of the childrens weights?
lightest

What apparatus is needed to determine the density of a regularly-shaped block?


A

a balance and a ruler

a balance and a forcemeter (spring balance)

a measuring cylinder and a ruler

a measuring cylinder and a beaker

A spring is suspended from a stand. Loads are added and the extensions are measured.

spring

stand
loads

rule

Which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load?


C

0
0

load

0
0

extension

B
extension

A
extension

extension

heaviest

load

0625/01/M/J/03

load

0
0

load

5
9

A student uses a stand and clamp to hold a flask of liquid.


Which diagram shows the most stable arrangement?
A

10 What is the source of the energy converted by a hydro-electric power station?


A

hot rocks

falling water

oil

waves

11 A labourer on a building site lifts heavy concrete blocks onto a lorry. Lighter blocks are now lifted
the same distance in the same time.
What happens to the work done in lifting each block and the power exerted by the labourer?
work done in
lifting each block

power exerted by
labourer

decreases

decreases

decreases

remains the same

increases

increases

remains the same

increases

0625/01/M/J/03

[Turn over

6
12 The diagram shows an instrument used to measure gas pressure.

liquid

What is the instrument called?


A

ammeter

barometer

manometer

thermometer

13 The diagrams show two divers swimming in the sea and two divers swimming in fresh water. Sea
water is more dense than fresh water.
On which diver is there the greatest pressure?
0m

0m
sea water

A
2m
4m

fresh water

C
2m

6m

4m
6m

14 When water evaporates, some molecules escape.


Which molecules escape?
A

the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with less energy than others

the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with more energy than others

the molecules at the surface with less energy than others

the molecules at the surface with more energy than others

0625/01/M/J/03

7
15 Two metal boxes containing air are standing in a room. Box X is on top of a heater. Box Y is on a
bench. The boxes are left for a long time.
Y

heater

bench

Which line in the table best describes the average speed of the molecules in the containers?
box X

box Y

fast

zero

fast

slow

slow

fast

zero

fast

16 The top of the mercury thread in a mercury-in-glass thermometer reaches point X at 0 C and
point Z at 100 C.
Z
Y

X
W

Where might it be at a temperature below the ice-point?


A

point W

point X

point Y

point Z

0625/01/M/J/03

[Turn over

8
17 The same quantity of heat energy is applied to four different blocks. The temperature rise
produced is shown on each block.
Which block has the highest thermal capacity?
A

temperature
rise is
3 C

temperature
rise is
6 C

temperature
rise is
18 C

temperature
rise is
9 C

18 A person holds a glass beaker in one hand and fills it quickly with hot water. It takes several
seconds before his hand starts to feel the heat.
Why is there this delay?
A

Glass is a poor conductor of heat.

Glass is a good conductor of heat.

Water is a poor conductor of heat.

Water is a good conductor of heat.

0625/01/M/J/03

9
19 The diagram shows a heater used to heat a tank of cold water.

water
lagging
tank
heater

What is the main process by which heat moves through the water?
A

conduction

convection

evaporation

radiation

20 What causes refraction when light travels from air into glass?
A

The amplitude of the light waves changes.

The colour of the light changes.

The frequency of the light waves changes.

The speed of the light changes.

21 A woman tunes her radio to a station broadcasting on 200 m.


What does the 200 m tell her about the radio wave?
A

its amplitude

its frequency

its speed

its wavelength

0625/01/M/J/03

[Turn over

10
22 Which statement is correct about the speed of electromagnetic waves in a vacuum?
A

Ultra-violet waves have the greatest speed.

Visible light waves have the greatest speed.

Infra-red waves have the greatest speed.

All electromagnetic waves have the same speed.

23 Which diagram correctly shows rays passing through a camera lens?


camera

camera

B
film

film

object

object
lens

lens

image

camera

image

camera

D
film

film

object

object
lens

image

0625/01/M/J/03

lens

image

11
24 A sound wave passes through the air, in the direction shown.

direction of travel of sound wave

How does a particle of air move as the sound wave passes?


A

moves to the right and stays there

moves left and right

moves up and stays there

moves up and down

25 A boy is stranded on an island 500 m from the shore.

500 m

cliffs

island

He shouts for help, but all he can hear in reply is the echo of his shout from some cliffs.
Sound travels at 340 m / s through the air.
What is the time interval between the boy shouting and hearing the echo?
A

500
s
340

2 500
s
340

340
s
500

0625/01/M/J/03

2 340
s
500

[Turn over

12
26 A student wishes to use a magnetising coil to make a permanent magnet from a piece of metal.
metal

Which metal should she use?


A

aluminium

copper

iron

steel

27 A metal rod XY is placed near a magnet. End X is attracted when it is placed near to the north pole
of the magnet, and also when it is placed near to the south pole.
X

Y
N

N
attraction

attraction
How does end Y behave when it is placed, in turn, near to the two poles of the magnet?
Y near north pole Y near south pole
A

attraction

attraction

attraction

repulsion

repulsion

attraction

repulsion

repulsion

0625/01/M/J/03

13
28 When the potential difference (p.d.) across a piece of resistance wire is changed, the current
through the wire also changes.
The temperature of the wire is kept the same.
Which graph shows how the p.d. and current are related?
A

current

current

current

0
0

p.d.

current

0
p.d.

0
p.d.

p.d.

29 Two faulty ammeters and two perfect ammeters are connected in series in the circuit shown.

A1

A2

A3

A4

The readings on the ammeters are


A1 2.9 A
A2 3.1 A
A3 3.1 A
A4 3.3 A
Which two ammeters are faulty?
A

A1 and A2

A1 and A4

A2 and A3

A3 and A4

30 Which electrical component would not normally be found in a battery-operated torch (flashlight)?
A

0625/01/M/J/03

[Turn over

14
31 A student connects two lamps in the circuit shown.

2
3

Which switches must he close to light both lamps?


A

1 and 2

1, 2 and 3

1 and 3

2 and 3

32 A student makes four circuits.


In which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse?
A

0625/01/M/J/03

15
33 Four lamps are labelled 60 W 240 V.
In which circuit are the lamps connected so that they all work at normal brightness?
A

240 V

240 V

240 V

D
240 V

34 The diagram shows a solenoid connected to a sensitive voltmeter.


S

magnet

solenoid
V

Which of the following would give a zero reading on the voltmeter?


A

holding the magnet stationary inside the solenoid

moving the magnet away from the solenoid

moving the magnet towards the solenoid

moving the solenoid towards the magnet

0625/01/M/J/03

[Turn over

16
35 The diagram shows a transformer with an alternating voltage of 100 V applied to the primary coil.

secondary coil

primary coil
100 V

(40 turns)

(80 turns)

What is the voltage produced across the secondary coil?


A

50 V

100 V

200 V

8000 V

36 The diagram below shows the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope tube.


spot of light

The tube is placed between a pair of charged plates.


Which diagram shows the new position of the spot?
A

0625/01/M/J/03

17
37 An electrical component X is placed in water, as shown.
A

thermometer

water

When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.
What is component X?
A

a capacitor

a light-dependent resistor

a reed relay

a thermistor

38 Which type of radiation can be stopped by a sheet of paper?


A

-particles

-particles

-rays

X-rays

39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g
of the substance.
How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested?
A

0.03 g

0.12 g

1.92 g

7.68 g

0625/01/M/J/03

[Turn over

18
40 An atom of lithium contains three protons and three electrons.
The nucleon number (mass number) of the atom is 7.
How many neutrons are there in the atom?
A

10

Go to answers

0625/01/M/J/03

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

October/November 2003
45 minutes
Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


MML 4504 11/02 S53619/2
UCLES 2003

UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE
Local Examinations Syndicate

[Turn over

2
1

Which of the following is not necessary when using a measuring cylinder to measure the volume
of a quantity of water?
A

making sure that the measuring cylinder is vertical

making sure that your eye is level with the liquid surface

reading the bottom of the meniscus

using the largest measuring cylinder possible

A pendulum is set in motion and 20 complete swings are timed. The time measured is 30 s.
What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?
A

0.67 s

0.75 s

1.5 s

3.0 s

Five telegraph poles are positioned at equal distances along the side of a road.
pole 1

pole 2

pole 3

pole 4

pole 5

A car accelerates until it is level with pole 4. The car then continues along the road at a steady
speed. The times taken to travel between one pole and the next are measured.
Which time is the greatest?
The time between
A

pole 1 and pole 2.

pole 2 and pole 3.

pole 3 and pole 4.

pole 4 and pole 5.

0625/01/O/N/03

3
4

A train travels along a track from Aytown to Beetown. The map shows the route.

Aytown

Beetown

The distance travelled by the train between the towns is 210 km. It moves at an average speed of
70 km / h.
How long does the journey take?

70
less than hours, because the journey is not in a straight line
210

70
exactly hours
210

210
exactly hours
70

210
more than hours, because the journey is not in a straight line
70

A beam is pivoted at its centre. Two masses are suspended at equal distances from the pivot as
shown in the diagram.

pivot

block X

2 kg mass

Which statement is correct?


A

If X has a mass of exactly 2 kg, it will rise.

If X has a mass of less than 2 kg, it will fall.

If X has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will fall.

If X has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will rise.

0625/01/O/N/03

[Turn over

4
6

The mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg.


When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is
0.90 kg.
What is the mass of the bottle?
A

0.40 kg

0.50 kg

0.65 kg

0.80 kg

A student tries to find the density of a metal block. First he measures the weight with a
forcemeter (spring balance). Next he measures the sides of the block using a rule, in order to
calculate the volume of the block. Finally he divides the weight by the volume to find the density.
The student has made a mistake.
Why does his method not give the density?

Density is volume divided by weight.

He should have measured the surface area, not the volume.

He should have used the mass in his calculation, not the weight.

Weight is not measured with a forcemeter (spring balance).

Two forces act on an object.


In which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium?
A

The two forces act in the same direction.

The two forces act through the same point.

The two forces are of the same type.

The two forces are the same size.

0625/01/O/N/03

5
9

The table below shows the length of a wire as the load on it is increased.

load / N

length / cm

50.0

10

20

30

52.1

54.1

56.3

Which graph correctly shows the extension of the wire plotted against load?
A

60

extension / cm

extension / cm
40

20

0
0

10

20

30

10

20

load / N

30

load / N

56.3

extension / cm

extension / cm
4

54.1

52.1

50.0
0

10

20

30

load / N

10

20

30

load / N

10 A large electric motor is used to lift a container off a ship.


Which of the following values are enough to allow the power of the motor to be calculated?
A

the mass of the container and the distance moved

the force used and the distance moved

the current used and the work done

the work done and the time taken

0625/01/O/N/03

[Turn over

6
11

A tidal power station is made by building a barrage across the mouth of a river. At high tide the
sea water is trapped behind the barrage.
barrage

turbine
trapped sea water

sea at low
tide

At low tide the water is allowed to flow back into the sea through a turbine.
What is the useful energy change in a tidal power station?
A

electrical energy

electrical energy

C
D

energy of position (potential)


energy of motion (kinetic)

energy of position (potential)


energy of position (potential) electrical energy
energy of motion (kinetic)

12 Which diagram shows the child exerting least pressure on the ground?
A

0625/01/O/N/03

7
13 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D
show the manometer at different times.
At which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest?

gas

14 Which line in the table correctly describes whether the molecules of a solid, liquid and gas are
moving or stationary?

solid

liquid

gas

stationary

stationary

stationary

stationary

stationary

moving

stationary

moving

moving

moving

moving

moving

15 Driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres.


This causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase.
Why is this?
A

Air molecules break up to form separate atoms.

Air molecules expand with the rise in temperature.

The force between the air molecules increases.

The speed of the air molecules increases.

0625/01/O/N/03

[Turn over

8
16 The diagram shows how the atoms in a substance rearrange themselves during a change of
state.

Which change of state is shown?


A

gas to liquid

liquid to gas

liquid to solid

solid to liquid

17 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers. They are heated from 20 C
to 30 C by heaters of the same power. Liquid 2 takes twice as long to heat as liquid 1.

same mass of
different liquids
liquid 1

liquid 2
heaters of
same power
heating time = t

heating time = 2t

Which statement is correct?


A

Both liquids receive the same amount of energy.

Liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.

The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is equal to the thermal capacity of liquid 2.

The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.
0625/01/O/N/03

9
18 There is a vacuum between the double walls of a vacuum flask.
Which types of heat transfer are reduced by the vacuum?
A

conduction and convection

conduction and radiation

convection and radiation

conduction, convection and radiation

19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.
In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?
A

B
water

ice
ice wrapped
in lead wire

water

D
water

water

ice

ice wrapped
in lead wire

0625/01/O/N/03

[Turn over

10
20 The diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright.
cork
X

water surface
Y

weight

Transverse waves travel across the water from X to Y.


Which way do the waves make the cork move?
A

right and left

up and down

only to the right

only to the left

21 Waves travel more slowly on the surface of water when the water is shallow.
A person drops a stone into a pool at X. The diagram shows the first wavefront on the surface of
the pool.
Which region of the pool is likely to be most shallow?

C
D
wavefront
0625/01/O/N/03

11
22 Which diagram correctly shows the paths taken by red and blue light when a beam of white light
enters a glass prism?
A

B
red
blue

white
light

blue
red

white
light

D
blue
red

white
light

red
blue

white
light

23 Which diagram shows the correct order of the waves in the electromagnetic spectrum?
visible
infra
radio red

ultra
violet

X-ray

A
increasing wavelength
visible
ultra
radio violet

infra
red

X-ray

B
increasing wavelength
visible
ultra
X-ray violet

infra
red

radio

C
increasing wavelength
visible
infra
X-ray red

ultra
violet

radio

D
increasing wavelength

0625/01/O/N/03

[Turn over

12
24 Which change will lower the pitch of a sound?
A

decreasing its amplitude

decreasing its frequency

increasing its amplitude

increasing its frequency

25 Astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. Astronaut 2 is nearby. There is no


atmosphere in space.

hammer
astronaut 1

astronaut 2

Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?
A

no sound at all

a quieter sound

a sound of the same loudness

a louder sound

0625/01/O/N/03

13
26 A steel bar is magnetised by stroking it several times with the south pole of a magnet, as shown.

N
S
X

Y
steel bar

Which poles are formed at X and Y?

north

north

north

south

south

north

south

south

27 A steel ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet that is lying on
the table.
Which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table?
A

B
S

magnet

ball

ball
C

magnet

magnet

D
magnet

ball

ball

0625/01/O/N/03

stops
here

[Turn over

14
28 A student wants to find the resistance of resistor R using a voltmeter and an ammeter.
Which circuit should the student use?
A

29 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a
negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted.

negatively
charged
plastic sheet

What are the original charges on P and on Q?

charge on P

charge on Q

negative

negative

negative

positive

positive

negative

positive

positive

0625/01/O/N/03

15
30 Four students are asked to draw a circuit showing three lamps working in parallel, a cell, and a
switch that controls all three lamps.
Which student is correct?
A

31 A 3.0  lamp and a 6.0  lamp are connected in series.


What is the total resistance of the combination?
A

0.5 

2.0 

9.0 

18.0 

32 Why is a circuit breaker or a fuse used in a mains electric circuit?


A

It allows spare current to be returned to the mains.

It improves the insulation of the wiring.

It protects the mains wiring from current overload.

It saves energy by reducing the current.


0625/01/O/N/03

[Turn over

16
33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.

X
X

circuit 1

circuit 2

Which statement is correct?


A

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, both the other lamps will go out.

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, both the other lamps will go out.

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.

34 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?

how

why

at high voltage

for safety

at high voltage

to reduce energy loss

at low voltage

for safety

at low voltage

to reduce energy loss

35 In a cathode-ray tube, particles are given off from a hot cathode by thermionic emission.
Which particles are given off?
A

atoms

electrons

ions

protons

0625/01/O/N/03

17
36 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.

Why does this happen?


A

The resistance of the lamp decreases.

The resistance of the lamp increases.

The resistance of the thermistor decreases.

The resistance of the thermistor increases.

37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an -particle and a -ray?

-particle

-ray

helium nucleus

electromagnetic radiation

helium nucleus

electron

proton

electromagnetic radiation

proton

electron

38 A radioactive nucleus R decays with the emission of a -particle as shown.


x
yR

qpS

+ 

Which equation is correct?


A

x=p

y=q

p=x1

q=y1

0625/01/O/N/03

[Turn over

18
39 Which line in the table shows the structure of the nucleus of a helium atom 24 He?
electrons

neutrons

protons

26 X.
40 A nucleus of substance X has the symbol 12

How many electrons orbit around the nucleus of a neutral atom of substance X?
A

12

14

26

38

Go to answers

0625/01/O/N/03

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2004
45 minutes
Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB04 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2004

[Turn over

2
1

The diagram shows a measuring cylinder.

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10

Which unit would be most suitable for its scale?


A
2

mm2

mm3

cm2

cm3

A piece of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.


cotton

cm

10

11

12

13

14

15

When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.
six turns of cotton

pen

What is the distance once round the pen?


A

2.2 cm

UCLES 2004

2.6 cm

13.2 cm

0625/01/M/J/04

15.6 cm

16

3
3

The diagram shows the speed-time graph for an object moving at constant speed.
2
speed
m/s
1

0
0

3
time / s

What is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3 s?


A
4

1.5 m

2.0 m

3.0 m

6.0 m

A small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony.


Ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?

It falls with constant acceleration.

It falls with constant speed.

It falls with decreasing acceleration.

It falls with decreasing speed.

Which statement about the mass of a falling object is correct?


A

It decreases as the object falls.

It is equal to the weight of the object.

It is measured in newtons.

It stays the same as the object falls.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

4
6

The weights of four objects, 1 to 4, are compared using a balance.

4
2

Which object is the lightest?


A
7

object 1

object 2

object 3

object 4

Which of the following is a unit of density?


A

cm3 / g

g / cm2

g / cm3

kg / m2

A piece of card has its centre of mass at M.


Which diagram shows how it hangs when suspended by a thread?
A

M
M
M

An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
The results are shown below.
load / N
length / cm

15.2

16.2

1.0

extension / cm

3
18.6

2.1

3.4

Which figure is missing from the table?


A

16.5

UCLES 2004

17.3

17.4

0625/01/M/J/04

18.3

5
10 The diagram shows a man diving into water.

Which form of energy is increasing as he falls?


A

chemical

gravitational

kinetic

strain

11 A boy and a girl run up a hill in the same time.

boy weighs 600 N

girl weighs 500 N

The boy weighs more than the girl.


Which statement is true about the power produced?
A

The boy produces more power.

The girl produces more power.

They both produce the same power.

It is impossible to tell who produces more power.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

6
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer. The barometer reading is h cm of mercury.

mercury
What is the pressure at S?
A

approximately zero

atmospheric pressure

atmospheric pressure + h cm of mercury

h cm of mercury

13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on soft ground.

Which boy is more likely to sink into the soft ground and why?
boy more
likely to sink

pressure on soft
ground

larger than Y

smaller than Y

larger than X

smaller than X

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

7
14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.

trapped air
direction of
motion
handle
What happens to the pressure and to the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed
in?
pressure

volume

decreases

decreases

decreases

remains the same

increases

decreases

increases

remains the same

15 A balloon is inflated in a cold room. When the room becomes much warmer, the balloon becomes
larger.
How does the behaviour of the air molecules in the balloon explain this?
A

The molecules become larger.

The molecules evaporate.

The molecules move more quickly.

The molecules repel each other.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

8
16 A substance is heated at a steady rate. It changes from a solid to a liquid, and then to a gas.
The graph shows how its temperature changes with time.

S
temperature
R
Q
P
time
Which parts of the graph show a change of state taking place?
A

P and R

P and S

Q and R

Q and S

17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole
of the washer.
steel
washer

steel rod

How can the engineer fit the washer onto the rod?
A

cool the washer and put it over the rod

cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together

heat the rod and then place it in the hole

heat the washer and place it over the rod

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

9
18 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Balls are stuck with
wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram X.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y.
Which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?
diagram X

diagram Y
A

before heating

after heating

19 Thermometer X is held above an ice cube and thermometer Y is held the same distance below
the ice cube. After several minutes, the reading on one thermometer changes. The ice cube does
not melt.
thermometer X

ice cube

thermometer Y

Which thermometer reading changes and why?


thermometer

reason

cool air rises from the ice cube

warm air rises from the ice cube

cool air falls from the ice cube

warm air falls from the ice cube

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

10
20 Water waves change direction when they move from shallow water to deep water.

new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
deep
water
shallow
water

What is the name of this effect?


A

diffraction

dispersion

reflection

refraction

21 A vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at P. In two seconds, three wave crests are
produced on the surface of the water.

Y
wave
crests

Which statement is true?


A

Distance X is the amplitude of the waves.

Distance Y is the wavelength of the waves.

Each circle represents a wavefront.

The frequency of the waves is 3 Hz.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

11
22 A plane mirror is on a wall.
Which is a correct description of the image formed by the mirror?
A

the right way up and smaller than the object

the right way up and the same size as the object

upside down and smaller than the object

upside down and the same size as the object

23 The diagram shows a ray of light entering a block of glass.


normal
ray of
light
2
air
glass

1
3
4

Which numbered angles are the angles of incidence and of refraction?


angle
of incidence

angle
of refraction

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

12
24 Three rays of light fall on a converging lens as shown.

lens

Which diagram shows the path of the rays after passing through the lens?

25 Which type of wave cannot travel through a vacuum?


A

infra-red radiation

microwaves

sound waves

X-rays

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

13
26 An engineer standing at P hears the sound of an explosion at X.
Z

Y
X

DANGER BLASTING

After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the
other.
The second bang is an echo from
A

XY.

PV.

ZY.

WX.

27 How can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?


A

cool the magnet for a long time

hit the magnet repeatedly with a hammer

leave the magnet in a coil which carries direct current

pass a small current through the magnet

28 An electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.


Why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet?
A

It is a good conductor of electricity.

It forms a permanent magnet.

It has a high density.

It has a high thermal capacity.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

14
29 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the
cell?
A

30 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.


What charges must the rod and the balloon carry?
A

The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.

The rod and the balloon carry like charges.

The rod is charged but the balloon is not.

The balloon is charged but the rod is not.

31 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to
be varied from bright to dim.

What should be connected at Z?


A

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

15
32 The circuit shown contains four lamps and three switches.

switch 1
lamp 1
switch 2

lamp 2

lamp 3
switch 3
lamp 4

Which switches must be closed to light only lamps 1 and 3?


A

switch 1 only

switch 1 and switch 2 only

switch 1 and switch 3 only

switch 2 and switch 3 only

33 The diagram shows a torch containing two 2 V cells, a switch and a lamp.

plastic
case
brass
connecting
strip

switch
lamp

What is the circuit diagram for the torch?


A

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

16
34 Which statement is correct?
A

A fuse is included in a circuit to prevent the current becoming too high.

A fuse should be connected to the neutral wire in a plug.

An electric circuit will only work if it includes a fuse.

An earth wire is needed to prevent the fuse blowing.

35 A straight wire carrying a current produces a magnetic field.


Which diagram shows the correct shape of the field?

current

current

D
current

UCLES 2004

current

0625/01/M/J/04

17
36 A student carries out an experiment to see the effect of a magnetic field on a wire carrying a
current.
The wire moves upwards as shown.
wire moves
upwards

S
direction
of current

What should the student do to make the wire move downwards?


A

change the direction of the current

move the poles of the magnet closer together

send a smaller current through the wire

use a stronger magnet

37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.

+ + + + + +
cathode rays
_ _ _ _ _ _

In which direction is the beam deflected?


A

into the page

out of the page

towards the bottom of the page

towards the top of the page

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

[Turn over

18
38 Which line correctly describes -particles?
electric charge

penetrates 1 cm
of aluminium?

negative

yes

negative

no

positive

yes

positive

no

39 A small amount of a radioactive isotope contains 72 billion unstable nuclei. The half-life of the
isotope is 4 hours.
How many unstable nuclei would remain after 12 hours?
A

6 billion

9 billion

18 billion

24 billion

40 How many nucleons are in a nucleus of


A

19

20

39
19 K

?
39

58

Go to answers

UCLES 2004

0625/01/M/J/04

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

October/November 2004
45 minutes
Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB04 11_0625_01/2RP
UCLES 2004

[Turn over

2
1

A floor is covered with square tiles. The diagram shows a ruler on the tiles.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cm

How long is one tile?


A
2

3 cm

6 cm

9 cm

12 cm

The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the beginning and at the end of an experiment.
stopclock
at beginning
0

stopclock
at end
0

45

15

45

15

30

30

How long did the experiment take?


A
3

10 s

25 s

35 s

45 s

Which speed / time graph applies to an object at rest?


A

speed

speed

UCLES 2004

time

speed

time

0625/01/O/N/04

speed

time

time

3
4

A racing car is fitted with an on-board computer. Every time the car passes the starting line, the
computer records the distance travelled in the next 2 seconds.
Which set of data shows that the car is increasing in speed during the 2 seconds?
A

B
distance
travelled / m

time / s
0

100

90

200

180

C
time / s

distance
travelled / m

time / s

D
distance
travelled / m

time / s

distance
travelled / m

80

100

190

180

A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.

spring

metal

What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?
A

friction

mass

pressure

weight

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

[Turn over

4
6

The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g.

25
cm3
20
15
10
5

What is the density of the liquid?


A
7

320 g / cm 3

36 g / cm 3

1.25 g / cm 3

0.8 g / cm 3

A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension / load graph for a spring. The diagrams
show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added.
start

with load added


x

What is the extension caused by the load?


A
8

y+x

yx

Three horizontal forces act on a car that is moving along a straight, level road.
air resistance
friction

driving force

Which combination of forces would result in the car moving at constant speed?
air resistance

friction

driving force

200 N

1000 N

800 N

800 N

1000 N

200 N

800 N

200 N

1000 N

1000 N

200 N

800 N

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

5
9

A child pushes a toy car along a level floor and then lets it go.
As the car slows down, what is the main energy change?
A

from chemical to heat

from chemical to kinetic

from kinetic to gravitational (potential)

from kinetic to heat

10 The diagram shows a cyclist riding along a hilly road.


At which position does the cyclist have the least gravitational (potential) energy?
B
C
D

11 A pin is squeezed between finger and thumb.


finger
pinhead

pin
thumb

Which statement is correct?


A

The force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.

The force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.

The pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.

The pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

[Turn over

6
12 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3.
The liquids are poured into tubes as shown.
Which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?
B

liquid X

liquid Y

liquid X

liquid Y

13 Some water molecules escape from the surface of a lake.


Which name is given to this process?
A

boiling

convection

evaporation

radiation

14 The diagram represents gas molecules contained in a cylinder. The piston is moved slowly
downwards and the temperature of the gas stays the same.

piston

cylinder

gas molecule

Why does the pressure of the gas increase?


A

The molecules collide harder with the walls.

The molecules collide more often with the walls.

The molecules move more quickly.

The number of molecules increases.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

7
15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be
placed in
A

pure alcohol.

pure distilled water.

pure melting ice.

pure mercury.

16 A glass flask full of cool water is placed in a container of hot water.


X

glass flask full


of cool water

container of
hot water

What will happen to the level of water at X as the cool water becomes warmer?
A

It will fall.

It will rise.

It will rise then fall.

It will stay the same.

17 A beaker of water is heated at its base.


Why does the water at the base rise?
A

It contracts and becomes less dense.

It contracts and becomes more dense.

It expands and becomes less dense.

It expands and becomes more dense.

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

[Turn over

8
18 Which of these waves is longitudinal?
A

light waves

sound waves

water waves

X-ray waves

19 Waves move from deep water to shallow water where they are slower.
Which diagram shows what happens to the waves?
A

deep
water

deep
water

deep
water

shallow
water

deep
water

shallow
water

shallow
water

shallow
water

20 Which type of radiation lies between visible light and microwaves in the electromagnetic
spectrum?
A

infra-red

radio waves

ultra-violet

X-rays

21 The critical angle for a glass / air boundary is C.


Which diagram shows the correct path of the light ray?
A

air
glass

air
glass
C

UCLES 2004

air
glass

air
glass
C

0625/01/O/N/04

9
22 The diagram shows the image of a clockface in a plane mirror.

Which of these times is shown?


A

02.25

02.35

09.25

09.35

23 What is the approximate range of audible frequencies for most humans?


A

10 Hz to 10 000 Hz

20 Hz to 20 000 Hz

10 kHz to 10 000 kHz

20 kHz to 20 000 kHz

24 A 100 metre race is started by firing a gun. The gun makes a bang and a puff of smoke comes
out of the gun as shown.

starter

finishing
judge

100 m

When does the finishing judge see the smoke and hear the bang?
sees the smoke

hears the bang

immediately

immediately

immediately

after about 0.3 s

after about 0.3 s

immediately

after about 0.3 s

after about 0.3 s

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

[Turn over

10
25 Six small compasses are placed around a bar magnet.
Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?
B

26 A student carries out four tests with a magnet.


Which result shown is not correct?
arrangement
A

magnet

magnet

magnet

magnet

result
iron bar

attracts

magnet

copper bar

magnet

attracts

no effect

repels

27 A circuit is set up with a gap between two terminals X and Y. The four strips of material shown in
the diagram are connected in turn across the gap.
Which strip completes the circuit so that the lamp lights?

A
wood

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

B
glass

C
steel

D
rubber

11
28 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.
Which calculation gives the resistance of the device?
A

current + potential difference

current potential difference

potential difference current

potential difference x current

29 Which circuit could be used to find the resistance of resistor R?

R
R
A

A
V

30 In the circuit shown, the reading on ammeter 1 is 2 A.


2

2
ammeter 1
reading = 2 A

ammeter 2
reading = ?

What is the reading on ammeter 2?


A

0A

UCLES 2004

1A

2A

0625/01/O/N/04

4A

[Turn over

12
31 In which position in the circuit shown should a switch be placed so that both lamps can be
switched on or off at the same time?

32 In the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical.


Which circuit has the least resistance?

33 Why are electric circuits often fitted with fuses?


A

Fuses break the circuit if the current is too high.

Fuses only allow the current through in the correct direction.

Fuses return any excess current to earth.

Fuses use up any spare current.

34 A mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40 A.


A hair-drier takes 2 A. It is connected to the circuit by a lead which can carry up to 5 A.
Which of these fuses would be best to use in the plug fitted to the hair-drier lead?
A

1 A fuse

UCLES 2004

3 A fuse

10 A fuse

0625/01/O/N/04

50 A fuse

13
35 The diagram represents a transformer.

input
voltage

output
voltage

Which arrangement could be used to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage?
number of turns on
primary coil P

number of turns on
secondary coil S

type of input

100

50

a.c.

100

50

d.c.

50

100

a.c.

50

100

d.c.

36 A student sets up the apparatus shown in order to make a relay.

contact

core

spring

Which metal should be used to make the core?


A

aluminium

copper

iron

steel

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

[Turn over

14
37 Which particles are emitted during thermionic emission?
A

electrons

ions

neutrons

protons

38 The equation shows the decay of the nuclide X.


226
88

X QP Y +

4
2

What are the values of P and Q?


P

230

90

230

86

222

90

222

86

39 During a fire in a laboratory storeroom, some radioactive material was spilled. A firefighter
detected radiation through the lead-lined walls of the storeroom. The radiation was emitted by the
radioactive material.

lead-lined
storeroom

firefighter
detector

radioactive
material

Which type of radiation was being detected?


A

-particles

-particles

-rays

X-rays

40 How many neutrons are in a nucleus of 146C ?


A

UCLES 2004

0625/01/O/N/04

14

Go to answers

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2005
45 minutes
Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and
record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


IB05 06_0625_01/RP
UCLES 2005

[Turn over

2
1

A decorator wishes to calculate the area of a bathroom tile so that he can estimate the amount of
adhesive that he needs to buy.
What must he use?

a measuring cylinder only

a ruler only

a measuring cylinder and a clock only

a measuring cylinder and a ruler only

The three balls shown are dropped from a bench.

aluminium

lead

wood

Which balls have the same acceleration?

aluminium and lead only

aluminium and wood only

lead and wood only

aluminium, lead and wood

A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows how the cars speed changes with time.
speed
m/s
20

0
0

10

time / s

How far does the car travel before it reaches a steady speed?
A

10 m

UCLES 2005

20 m

100 m

0625/01/M/J/05

200 m

3
4

Which statement is correct?


A

The mass of a bottle of water at the North Pole is different from its mass at the Equator.

The mass of a bottle of water is measured in newtons.

The weight of a bottle of water and its mass are the same thing.

The weight of a bottle of water is one of the forces acting on it.

Two blocks X and Y are placed on a beam as shown. The beam balances on a pivot at its centre.
Y
X

pivot

What does this show about X and Y?

They have the same mass and the same density.

They have the same mass and the same weight.

They have the same volume and the same density.

They have the same volume and the same weight.

The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the
diagram.
cm3

cm3

200

200

100

100

liquid

mass = 80 g

mass = 180 g

What is the density of the liquid?


A

100 g / cm3
120

UCLES 2005

100 g / cm3
140

180 g / cm3
120

0625/01/M/J/05

180 g / cm3
140

[Turn over

4
7

A girl and a boy are pulling in opposite directions on a rope. The forces acting on the rope are
shown in the diagram.
girl

boy
200 N

150 N
rope

Which single force has the same effect as the two forces shown?

50 N acting towards the girl

350 N acting towards the girl

50 N acting towards the boy

350 N acting towards the boy

Objects with different masses are hung on a 10 cm spring. The diagram shows how much the
spring stretches.

10 cm
20 cm
30 cm

100 g

The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.
What is the mass of object M?
A

110 g

UCLES 2005

150 g

200 g

0625/01/M/J/05

300 g

5
9

What is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?


A

capacitor

generator

motor

transformer

10 A power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.


In this process, nuclear energy is first changed into
A

chemical energy.

electrical energy.

gravitational energy.

internal energy.

11 A ball is released from rest and rolls down a track from the position shown.
What is the furthest position the ball could reach?

ball
starts
here

B
D
A

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

[Turn over

6
12 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a
reading of h cm of water.
gas
supply
h cm

Why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer?


A

h would be too large if mercury were used.

h would be too small if mercury were used.

The tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.

The tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.

13 A farmer has two carts. The carts have the same weight, but one has four narrow wheels and the
other has four wide wheels.

narrow wheel

wide wheel

In rainy weather, which cart sinks less into soft ground, and why?
cart wheels

why

narrow

greater pressure on the ground

narrow

less pressure on the ground

wide

greater pressure on the ground

wide

less pressure on the ground

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

7
14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion.
Which line in the table is correct?
type of motion
of particles

particles are
suspended in

vibration

a liquid or a gas

vibration

a solid, a liquid or a gas

random

a liquid or a gas

random

a solid, a liquid or a gas

15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly
compressed.
piston
gas
piston pushed in

The temperature of the gas does not change.


What happens to the pressure of the gas?
A

It drops to zero.

It decreases, but not to zero.

It stays the same.

It increases.

16 The graph shows the change in temperature of a material as it is heated.


Which part on the graph shows when the material is boiling?

temperature
C
B
A

time

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

[Turn over

8
17 An experiment is set up as shown.

pressure gauge

air
flask
water

heat
What does the pressure gauge show as the air in the flask becomes hotter?
A

a steady pressure

a decrease in pressure

an increase in pressure

an increase and then a decrease in pressure

18 An iron bar is held with one end in a fire. The other end soon becomes too hot to hold.

hand

fire
iron bar

How has the heat travelled along the iron bar?


A

by conduction

by convection

by expansion

by radiation

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

9
19 The diagram shows a block of ice placed in a warm room.
At which point is the temperature the lowest?
A
B
clamp

ice

table

20 The drawing shows a wave.


Which labelled distance is the wavelength?

A
B

D
C

21 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.

hill

The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A

diffracted.

radiated.

reflected.

refracted.

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

[Turn over

10
22 Which diagram correctly shows a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass block?

23 The ray diagram shows how an image is formed by a converging lens.

24 cm

10 cm

8 cm

What is the focal length of this lens?


A

8 cm

UCLES 2005

10 cm

18 cm

0625/01/M/J/05

24 cm

11
24 A fire alarm is not loud enough. An engineer adjusts it so that it produces a note of the same pitch
which is louder.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude

frequency

larger

larger

larger

same

same

larger

same

same

25 To estimate the width of a valley, a climber starts a stopwatch as he shouts. He hears an echo
from the opposite side of the valley after 1.0 s.
sound

climber

valley
The sound travels at 340 m / s.
What is the width of the valley?
A

85 m

170 m

340 m

680 m

26 Which material is used for the core of an electromagnet?


A

aluminium

copper

iron

steel

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

[Turn over

12
27 A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction and a plotting compass is placed at each end.
brass rod
N

plotting
compass

Which diagram shows the positions of the needles of the plotting compasses?
A

28 How many of the following materials conduct electricity?


aluminium
silver
iron
plastic
A

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

13
29 In which circuit does the voltmeter read the potential difference across the lamp?
A

30 In the circuit below, X and Y are identical 6 V lamps.


6V

switch

What happens when the switch is closed?


A

X lights more brightly than Y.

Y lights more brightly than X.

X and Y light with equal brightness.

Neither X nor Y light.

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

[Turn over

14
31 The diagram shows a circuit with three ammeters, X, Y and Z.

A X
A
A

Y
Z

Which set of readings is possible?


X

2A

3A

5A

3A

2A

5A

3A

3A

3A

5A

2A

3A

32 A lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the p.d. across it can be varied from 0 to 6 V.
Which circuit would be most suitable?

6V

6V

6V

UCLES 2005

6V

0625/01/M/J/05

15
33 A student makes the circuit shown.
5 A fuse

The fuse has blown and stopped the current.


What could have caused this?
A

The current rating of the fuse was too high.

The current was too large.

The lamp was loose.

The voltage was too small.

34 Which graph shows the output voltage from a simple a.c. generator?

voltage
A

time

voltage
B

time

voltage
C

time

voltage
D

UCLES 2005

time

0625/01/M/J/05

[Turn over

16
35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An a.c. voltage
of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil.

25.0 V
primary coil
50 turns

secondary coil
100 turns

What is the voltage across the secondary coil?


A

12.5 V

50.0 V

175 V

200 V

36 Two circuits are set up as shown. The iron rods are placed close together, and are free to move.

S
iron rod

iron rod

What happens to the size of the gap at X when switch S is closed?


A

It decreases.

It decreases then increases.

It increases.

It does not change.

37 The diagram shows a simple cathode-ray tube.


Which part emits the electrons?

D
A

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

17
38 Which type of radiation has the greatest ionising effect?
A

-particles

-particles

-rays

all have the same ionising effect

39 A powder contains 400 mg of a radioactive material that emits -particles.


The half-life of the material is 5 days.
What mass of that material remains after 10 days?
A

0 mg

40 mg

100 mg

200 mg

40 In the symbol below, A is the nucleon number and Z is the proton number.
A
Z

What is represented by the symbol?


A

an electron

a neutron

a nuclide

an X-ray

UCLES 2005

0625/01/M/J/05

18
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/M/J/05

19
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/M/J/05

20
BLANK PAGE

Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been
reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.

0625/01/M/J/05

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)

October/November 2005
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and
record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


IB05 11_0625_01/RP
UCLES 2005

[Turn over

2
1

A measuring cylinder is used to measure the volume of a liquid.


cm3

50

50

40
30

40

20
10

What is the volume of the liquid?


A
2

43 cm3

46 cm3

48 cm3

54 cm3

The graph represents part of the journey of a car.


30
speed
m / s 20
10
0
0

10

20

30
time / s

40

What distance does the car travel during this part of the journey?
A
3

150 m

300 m

600 m

1200 m

16 s

A man crosses a road 8.0 m wide at a speed of 2.0 m / s.


movement
of man
man
8.0 m

How long does the man take to cross the road?


A

4.0 s

UCLES 2005

6.0 s

10 s

0625/01/O/N/05

3
4

What is the gravitational force that the Earth exerts on an object?


A

the density of the object

the mass of the object

the volume of the object

the weight of the object

In an experiment, five identical bags of rice are balanced by a 10 kg mass.

five bags
of rice

10 kg mass
pivot

Two bags of rice are added to the other five.


What mass will now balance the bags?
A
6

3.5 kg

7.0 kg

10 kg

14 kg

The same mass of four different liquids is placed in some measuring cylinders.
Which measuring cylinder contains the liquid with the greatest density?

UCLES 2005

cm3

cm3

cm3

cm3

10

10

0625/01/O/N/05

25

25

20

20

15

15

10

10

[Turn over

4
7

The diagram shows a flat metal plate that may be hung from a nail so that it can rotate about any
of four holes.

holes

holes

flat metal plate

What is the smallest number of holes from which the flat metal plate should be hung in order to
find its centre of gravity?
A
8

Two equal forces F act on each of four planks.


Which plank turns?
A

pivot

pivot

pivot

pivot

Which type of power station does not use steam from boiling water to generate electricity?
A

geothermal

hydroelectric

nuclear

oil-fired

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

5
10 A man standing at the top of a cliff throws a stone.
X

Which forms of energy does the stone have at X and at Y?


energy at X

energy at Y

gravitational only

kinetic only

kinetic only

gravitational only

gravitational only

gravitational and kinetic

gravitational and kinetic

gravitational and kinetic

11 Four blocks, each weighing 10 N, rest on a horizontal table.


Which block applies the greatest pressure on the table?

D
table

10 N

UCLES 2005

10 N

10 N

0625/01/O/N/05

10 N

[Turn over

6
12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.
25 cm
mercury
75 cm

5 cm

Which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?


A

25 cm

75 cm

80 cm

100 cm

13 A drop of liquid falls on a students skin and quickly evaporates.


What is the effect on the skin and the reason?
A

The skin cools because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.

The skin cools because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.

The skin warms because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.

The skin warms because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.

14 A suspension of pollen grains in water is observed under a microscope. The pollen grains are
seen to be moving all the time.
Which diagram illustrates this motion?

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

7
15 A knife is being sharpened on a rotating sharpening-stone. A spark flies off and lands on the
operators hand. The spark is a very hot, very small piece of metal. The operator feels nothing.
What does this show about the piece of metal?
A

It has a high thermal capacity.

It has a low thermal capacity.

It is a good conductor of heat.

It is a poor conductor of heat.

16 Which substance is a liquid at a room temperature of 25 oC?


substance

melting point / oC

boiling point / oC

218

183

39

357

44

280

119

444

17 The diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.

cooling
unit

Why is the cooling unit placed at the top?


A

Cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.

Cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.

Cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.

Cold air stops at the top and so prevents convection.

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

[Turn over

8
18 How does heat from the Sun reach the Earth?
A

conduction only

convection only

radiation only

conduction, convection and radiation

19 The diagrams show four sources of waves.


Which source generates longitudinal waves?
A

stick pushed up
and down in water

UCLES 2005

radio
transmitter

0625/01/O/N/05

loudspeaker

lamp

9
20 In a ripple tank, water waves move towards a barrier with a narrow gap.
barrier

water
waves

Which diagram best shows the waves beyond the barrier?

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

[Turn over

10
21 A ray of light passes from glass into air at an angle of incidence of 40o. The glass has a critical
angle of 42 o.
Which diagram shows what happens to the ray?

air

air

glass

glass
40o

40o

air

air

glass

glass
40o

40o

22 Rays of light enter and leave a box.


ray 1

ray 1

ray 2

ray 2

What could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown?
A

a converging lens

a parallel-sided glass block

a plane mirror

a triangular prism

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

11
23 A thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.
screen
image
lens

candle

The screen and the lens are moved back and forth and various focused images are produced on
the screen.
Which statement is always true?
A

The image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.

The image is bigger than the object.

The image is closer to the lens than the object is.

The image is inverted.

24 Two astronauts without radios can only communicate in space if their helmets are touching.
There is no air in space.

What does this show about sound?


through a solid

through a vacuum

can travel

can travel

can travel

cannot travel

cannot travel

can travel

cannot travel

cannot travel

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

[Turn over

12
25 When the horn on a ship is sounded, the passengers hear an echo from a cliff after 4.0 s.
If the speed of sound is 340 m / s, how far away is the cliff?
A

170 m

340 m

680 m

1360 m

26 How many of the following methods could be used to demagnetise a piece of steel?
heating it until it is red hot
pulling it from a coil that is carrying an alternating current
placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it
putting it in a coil which is carrying a direct current
A

27 Two rods X and Y look the same.


magnet

P
N

rod X

rod Y
S

The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these
four actions are shown in the table.
end tested

result

attraction

attraction

attraction

repulsion

Which of the rods is a permanent magnet?


A

neither of the rods

both of the rods

rod X only

rod Y only

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

13
28 Which circuit should be used to find the resistance of a lamp?

A
A

V
V

V
V
A

29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.
Which heater has the least resistance?
voltage / V

current / A

110

5.0

110

10

230

5.0

230

10

30 Which component can store energy for use in time delay circuits?
A

capacitor

potentiometer

resistor

thermistor

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

[Turn over

14
31 When the circuit shown is connected with switch S open, the 6 V lamp glows.
6V

R
6 V lamp

What happens to the brightness of the lamp when switch S is closed?


A

It becomes brighter.

It remains the same.

It becomes dimmer.

It goes off.

32 Why are the electric lamps in a house lighting circuit normally connected in parallel?
A

The current in every circuit must be the same.

The lamps are always switched on and off at the same time.

The voltage across each lamp must be the mains voltage.

When one of the lamps blows, all the others go out.

33 In the circuit shown, one of the fuses blows and all the lamps go out.
Which fuse blows?

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

15
34 Which arrangement may be used to step up a voltage?

a.c.
input

output

iron core

d.c.
input

output

iron core

a.c.
input

output

iron core

iron core

d.c.
input

output

35 The diagrams show a straight wire carrying a current into the paper.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern due to this current?
A

wire

UCLES 2005

wire

wire

0625/01/O/N/05

wire

[Turn over

16
36 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil which is connected
to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.

spring
N
centre-zero
ammeter
S
What does the ammeter show when the magnet vibrates slowly up and down?
A

a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left

a steady reading to the left

a steady reading to the right

a steady zero reading

37 Charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope.


What is the name and the charge of these particles?
name of particles

charge of particles

electrons

negative

electrons

positive

protons

negative

protons

positive

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

17
38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick
aluminium.
paper
(all the radiation
passes through)

thick aluminium
(none of the radiation
passes through)

radiation

What does this show about the radiation?


A

It is -particles.

It is -particles.

It is -rays.

It is a mixture of -particles and -rays.

39 An unstable nucleus has 145 neutrons and 92 protons. It emits a -particle.


How many neutrons and protons does the nucleus have after emitting the -particle?
neutrons

protons

144

92

144

93

145

91

145

93

40 Which particles are found in the nucleus of an atom?


A

neutrons and protons only

neutrons only

protons and electrons only

protons, electrons and neutrons

UCLES 2005

0625/01/O/N/05

18
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/O/N/05

19
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/O/N/05

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.

0625/01/O/N/05

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2006
45 minutes
Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.


IB06 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2006

[Turn over

2
1

A measuring cylinder contains some water. When a stone is put in the water, the level rises.
cm3
200

cm3
200

150

150

100

100

50

50

stone

What is the volume of the stone?


A
2

50 cm3

70 cm3

75 cm3

125 cm3

The graph represents the movement of a body accelerating from rest.


10
speed
m/s

8
6
4
2
0

time / s
After 5 seconds how far has the body moved?
A
3

2m

10 m

25 m

50 m

A child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains.

A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3 s to pass the child.


What is the length of the train?
A

10 m

UCLES 2006

30 m

90 m

0625/01/M/J/06

135 m

3
4

Below are four statements about the effects of forces on objects.


Three of the statements are correct.
Which statement is incorrect?

A force can change the length of an object.

A force can change the mass of an object.

A force can change the shape of an object.

A force can change the speed of an object.

A simple balance has two pans suspended from the ends of arms of equal length. When it is
balanced, the pointer is at 0.
arm

pivot

pointer
0

pan X

pan Y

Four masses (in total) are placed on the pans, with one or more on pan X and the rest on pan Y.
Which combination of masses can be used to balance the pans?

1 g, 1 g, 5 g, 10 g

1 g, 2 g, 2 g, 5 g

2 g, 5 g, 5 g, 10 g

2 g, 5 g, 10 g, 10 g

A person measures the length, width, height and mass of a rectangular metal block.
Which of these measurements are needed in order to calculate the density of the metal?
A

mass only

height and mass only

length, width and height only

length, width, height and mass

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

[Turn over

4
7

Two forces act on an object.


In which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium?

The two forces act in the same direction.

The two forces act through the same point.

The two forces are of the same type.

The two forces are the same size.

The diagram shows four models of buses placed on different ramps.


centre
of mass

centre
of mass

centre
of mass

centre
of mass

How many of these models will fall over?


A
9

Which form of energy do we receive directly from the Sun?


A

chemical

light

nuclear

sound

10 A labourer on a building site lifts a heavy concrete block onto a lorry. He then lifts a light block the
same distance in the same time.
Which of the following is true?
work done in lifting the
blocks

power exerted by labourer

less for the light block

less for the light block

less for the light block

the same for both blocks

more for the light block

more for the light block

the same for both blocks

more for the light block

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

5
11 The diagram shows a thick sheet of glass.
Which edge must it stand on to cause the greatest pressure?

A
B

D
C

12 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D
show the manometer at different times.
At which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest?

gas

13 Brownian motion is seen by looking at smoke particles through a microscope.


How do the smoke particles move in Brownian motion?
A

all in the same direction

at random

in circles

vibrating about fixed points

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

[Turn over

6
14 Driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres.
This causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase.
Why is this?
A

Air molecules break up to form separate atoms.

Air molecules expand with the rise in temperature.

The force between the air molecules increases.

The speed of the air molecules increases.

15 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, fixed points are needed.


Which is a fixed point?
A

the bottom end of the thermometer tube

the top end of the thermometer tube

the temperature of pure melting ice

the temperature of pure warm water

16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal (heat)
energy.
Which block has the greatest thermal capacity?

UCLES 2006

temperature
rise = 2 oC

temperature
rise = 4 oC

temperature
rise = 6 oC

temperature
rise = 8 oC

0625/01/M/J/06

7
17 A long thin bar of copper is heated evenly along its length.

copper bar

heat
What happens to the bar?
A

It becomes lighter.

It becomes longer.

It becomes shorter.

It bends at the ends.

18 A beaker contains water at room temperature.


water

How could a convection current be set up in the water?


A

cool the water at X

cool the water at Y

stir the water at X

stir the water at Y

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

[Turn over

8
19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid
is put on top as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench

Which statement is correct?


A

Heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.

No heat passes through the sides of either cup.

The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.

The lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.

20 Which is the best description of the speed of a water wave?


A

the distance between one wave crest and the next

the distance between the crest of a wave and a trough

the distance that a particle of water moves up and down in one second

the distance that a wavefront moves along the surface in one second

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

9
21 Water waves travel more slowly in shallow water than in deep water.
Which diagram shows what will happen to plane waves in deep water when they enter shallow
water?

A
deep

B
shallow

deep

C
deep

shallow

deep

shallow

shallow

22 A ray of light passes through a window.


Which path does it take?
air

glass

air

A
B
C
D

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

[Turn over

10
23 The diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.

What time is shown?


A

02:25

02:35

09:25

09:35

24 The diagram shows a man standing at X who shouts to a man standing at Y.

X
N

Y
The mans voice will be heard sooner and more clearly if the wind is blowing towards the
A

north.

south.

east.

west.

25 Sounds are made by vibrating objects. A certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot hear
any sound.
Which statement might explain why nothing is heard?
A

The amplitude of the sound waves is too large.

The frequency of the vibration is too high.

The sound waves are transverse.

The speed of the sound waves is too high.

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

11
26 A student investigates which end of a magnetic compass needle is attracted to a bar magnet.
What does the investigation show?
A

Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the north pole of the magnet.

Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the south pole of the magnet.

One end of the compass needle is attracted by the north pole and the other end by the south
pole.

The compass needle is not attracted by either end of the magnet.

27 From which materials are the coil and the core of an electromagnet made?
coil

core

copper

copper

copper

iron

iron

copper

iron

iron

28 What are the symbols used for the units of current and resistance?
unit of current

unit of resistance

29 When a plastic comb is placed next to a small piece of aluminium foil hanging from a nylon
thread, the foil is repelled by the comb.
Why is this?
A

The comb is charged and the foil is uncharged.

The comb is uncharged and the foil is charged.

The comb and the foil have charge of opposite signs.

The comb and the foil have charge of the same sign.

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

[Turn over

12
30 Which symbol represents an electrical component used to store energy?

31 Four lamps and four switches are connected to a power supply as shown in the circuit diagram.
When all the switches are closed, all the lamps are lit.
When one of the switches is then opened, only one lamp goes out.
Which switch is opened?

32 Four resistors and an ammeter are connected to a battery as shown.


The ammeter reads 2 A.
Which of the four labelled points in the circuit is the only one where the current is less than 2 A?

A
A
C

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

13
33 Why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit in a house?
A

to increase the circuit resistance

to keep the power used to a minimum value

to prevent a short-circuit from occurring

to stop the cables from carrying too much current

34 An electric power tool is being used outdoors in a shower of rain.


What is the greatest hazard to the user?
A

The cable gets hot and causes burns.

The circuit-breaker cuts off the current.

The current passes through water and causes a shock.

The tool rusts.

35 A current-carrying coil in a magnetic field experiences a turning effect.

variable power supply

How can the turning effect be increased?


A

increase the number of turns on the coil

reduce the size of the current

reverse the direction of the magnetic field

use thinner wire for the coil

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

[Turn over

14
36 A transformer is to be used to produce a 6 V output from a 24 V input.
coil X

coil Y

24 V

6V

What are suitable numbers of turns for coil X and for coil Y?
number of turns
on coil X

number of turns
on coil Y

240

60

240

240

240

960

960

60

37 A cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.


Which line in the table shows the charge and the temperature of the anode?
anode charge

anode temperature

negative

cool

negative

hot

positive

cool

positive

hot

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

15
38 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms each give out an -particle.
1st particle
atom
1
atom
2

atom
5

atom
4

atom
3
2nd particle

Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle.
Which atom will give out the next particle?
A

atom 2

atom 4

atom 5

impossible to tell

39 A Geiger counter detects radiation from radioactive sources.


A radioactive source is inside a thick aluminium container as shown.

radioactive source

2m
Geiger counter

thick aluminium container


Which type of radiation from this source is being detected?
A

-particles

-particles

-rays

radio waves

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

[Turn over

16
40 The nucleus of a neutral atom of lithium is represented by 73 Li.
How many protons, electrons and neutrons does the atom contain?
protons

electrons

neutrons

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2006

0625/01/M/J/06

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

October/November 2006
45 minutes
Additional Materials:

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB06 11_0625_01/RP
UCLES 2006

[Turn over

2
1

A ruler is used to measure the length of a nail.

5.0

6.0

7.0

8.0
cm

What is the length of the nail?


A
2

1.3 cm

2.9 cm

5.2 cm

8.1 cm

A cyclist is riding along a road when an animal runs in front of him. The graph shows the cyclists
motion. He sees the animal at P, starts to brake at Q and stops at R.
speed
P

R
0

time

What is used to find the distance travelled after he applies the brakes?
A

the area under line PQ

the area under line QR

the gradient of line PQ

the gradient of line QR

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

3
3

A car travels along the route PQRST in 30 minutes.

5 km
10 km

Q
5 km

10 km

What is the average speed of the car?

10 km / hour

20 km / hour

30 km / hour

60 km / hour

A newton is a unit of force.


Which quantity is measured in newtons?
A

acceleration

density

mass

weight

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

[Turn over

4
5

A student pours liquid into a measuring cylinder.


100
90
80

measuring
cylinder

70
60
50
40

liquid

digital
balance

30
20
10

The student records the volume of the liquid from the scale on the measuring cylinder. He then
puts the measuring cylinder containing the liquid on a balance and records the mass.
What else needs to be measured before the density of the liquid can be calculated?
A

the depth of the liquid in the measuring cylinder

the mass of the empty measuring cylinder

the temperature of the liquid in the measuring cylinder

the volume of the empty measuring cylinder

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

5
6

The diagram shows four blocks, each made of glass of density 2.6 g / cm3.
The top of each block has an area of 1 cm2.
Which block has a mass of 13 g?

15 cm

10 cm

5 cm
2 cm
A
7

A heavy beam is resting on two supports, so that there are three forces acting on it.
R1

R2

The beam is in equilibrium.


Which statement is correct?
A

All the forces are equal in value.

The forces are in one direction and their turning effects are in the opposite direction.

The resultant force is zero and the resultant turning effect is zero.

The total upward force is twice the total downward force.

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

[Turn over

6
8

The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
Which object is the most stable?
A

Which source of energy uses the production of steam to generate electricity?


A

hydroelectric

nuclear

tides

waves

10 A cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point X without pedalling.


The cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point Y.
X
hill
Y

Which energy changes have taken place between X and Y?


A

kinetic internal (heat) gravitational potential

kinetic gravitational potential internal (heat)

gravitational potential internal (heat) kinetic

gravitational potential kinetic internal (heat)

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

7
11 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.
cement mixer

board
soft ground

Why does this prevent the mixer sinking?


A

The large area decreases the pressure on the ground.

The large area increases the pressure on the ground.

The large area decreases the weight on the ground.

The large area increases the weight on the ground.

12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.

V
W

mercury

X
Y
Z
The atmospheric pressure increases.
Which distance increases?
A

VW

UCLES 2006

WY

XY

0625/01/O/N/06

XZ

[Turn over

8
13 A gas cylinder is left outside on a sunny day.
The Sun heats the gas inside the cylinder.
What happens to the gas molecules?
A

They collide less often.

They expand.

They move closer together.

They move more rapidly.

14 Water spilled on the ground on a hot day evaporates.


Which diagram represents the change in arrangement of the particles in the water as it
evaporates?

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

9
15 A block of ice is heated until it has all melted. The water that is produced is then heated until it
boils.
Which line in the table states what happens to the temperature of the ice while it is melting, and
to the temperature of the water while it is boiling?
temperature of ice
while it is melting

temperature of water
while it is boiling

increases

increases

increases

stays the same

stays the same

increases

stays the same

stays the same

16 A thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown. When placed in steam, the mercury
level rises to 22 cm. When placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2 cm.

cm
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0

mercury

Which temperature is shown by the mercury level in the diagram?


A

6 C

UCLES 2006

8 C

30 C

0625/01/O/N/06

40 C

[Turn over

10
17 Which line in the table is correct about conduction and convection?
conduction

convection

can happen in a solid

can happen in a solid

can happen in a solid

only happens in fluids

only happens in fluids

can happen in a solid

only happens in fluids

only happens in fluids

18 A heating element is positioned in a narrow sealed tube of liquid.


What would be the best place to position the heating element in order to obtain the best
circulation of the liquid through the tube?
A

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

liquid

11
19 In a ripple tank experiment, plane water-waves meet a straight barrier with a wide gap in it.

wave
motion

barrier

Which diagram shows the wave pattern beyond the barrier?

20 The diagram shows a wave.


displacement
0

distance
X

How many wavelengths are there between X and Y?


A

2
3

UCLES 2006

1 21

0625/01/O/N/06

3
[Turn over

12
21 A parallel beam of light falls on a converging lens.
Which diagram shows what happens to the beam of light?
A

22 The image of a clock face as seen in a plane mirror is shown.

21

6
What is the time on the clock?
A

1.25

1.35

10.25

10.35

23 A police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy traffic. A pedestrian notices that,
although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, the pitch varies.
Which line in the table describes the amplitude and the frequency of the sound?
amplitude

frequency

constant

varying

constant

constant

varying

constant

varying

varying

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

13
24 A sports field is next to a large school building. At the far side of the sports field, a student sees a
groundsman hammer a pole into the ground.
school building

student
hammer
pole

about 400 m

The student hears two bangs each time the hammer hits the pole.
Why does the student hear two bangs?
first bang caused by

second bang caused by

sound of hammer hitting pole

sound of pole hitting hammer

sound reaching left ear

sound reaching right ear

sound reaching student directly

sound due to echo from school building

sound reflected back from school building

sound reaching student directly

25 A student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate the magnetic field around a bar
magnet.
Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?
A

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

[Turn over

14
26 The ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end Q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.
R

rod 1

rod 2

rod 3

The results are as follows.


End Q: attracts end R,
attracts end S,
attracts end T,
repels end U.
Which of the metal rods is a magnet?
A

rod 1 only

rod 1 and rod 2 only

rod 1 and rod 3 only

rod 3 only

27 A student wishes to measure the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery and the potential
difference (p.d.) across a resistor.
She has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires.
What else does she need?
A

a voltmeter only

an ammeter only

an ammeter and a voltmeter

a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter

28 Which particle does not experience a force due to an electric field?


A

-particle

electron

neutron

proton

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

15
29 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too
small.
To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is
A

longer and thicker.

longer and thinner.

shorter and thicker.

shorter and thinner.

30 Which graph shows how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature?

resistance /

resistance /

temperature / C

resistance /

temperature / C

resistance /

temperature / C

temperature / C

31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.
Which lamp breaks?

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

[Turn over

16
32 Circuit-breakers are used with electrical appliances as safety devices.
Which description is correct for a circuit-breaker?
position

action when overloaded

connected in the live wire

melts

connected in the live wire

operates an electromagnet

connected to the casing of the appliance

melts

connected to the casing of the appliance

operates an electromagnet

33 An electric heater is connected to the mains using insulated copper wires. The wires become
very warm.
What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?
A

Use thicker copper wires.

Use thinner copper wires.

Use thicker insulation.

Use thinner insulation.

34 The diagram shows an electrical device.

rotation

magnet
S
commutator
carbon brush

battery
What is this electrical device?
A

a d.c. motor

an a.c. generator

a magnetising coil

a transformer

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

17
35 The graph shows the voltage input to a step-down transformer.
12 V
voltage
input
0

time

Which diagram shows the voltage output from the transformer?


A

12 V
voltage
output
0

12 V
voltage
output
0
time

time

12 V
voltage
output
0

12 V
voltage
output
0
time

time

36 Particles are emitted by a heated cathode in a cathode-ray tube.


heater

particles

cathode

anode

What are these particles?


A

atoms

electrons

neutrons

protons

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

[Turn over

18
37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an -particle and of a -ray?
-particle

-ray

helium nucleus

electromagnetic radiation

helium nucleus

electron

proton

electromagnetic radiation

proton

electron

38 The count rates of four radioactive sources were measured at the same time on three
consecutive days.
Which source has a half-life of two days?
Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

100

50

25

200

140

100

300

300

300

400

200

100

39 Which statement is true of all neutral atoms?


A

The number of electrons equals the number of nucleons.

The number of neutrons equals the number of protons.

The number of nucleons equals the number of neutrons.

The number of protons equals the number of electrons.

40 There are three nuclides of hydrogen.


nuclide 1
1
1

nuclide 2
2
1

nuclide 3
3
1

Which of these nuclides have the same number of protons in their nuclei?
A

1 and 2 only

2 and 3 only

all of them

none of them

UCLES 2006

0625/01/O/N/06

19
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/O/N/06

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.

0625/01/O/N/06

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2007
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*4300881997*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB07 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2007

[Turn over

2
1

The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.

0 cm 1

10

11

What is the internal diameter d of the tube?


A
2

2.8 cm

3.1 cm

3.4 cm

7.4 cm

The graph shows the progress of an athlete in a 100 m race.

100
distance
travelled / m
80

60

40

20

0
0

10

11

12

time / s
What time was taken to travel 10 m from the start?
A

2.4 s

UCLES 2007

2.8 s

65 s

0625/01/M/J/07

70 s

13

14

3
3

Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
What will happen and why?

what will happen

why

both stones hit the floor at the same time

the acceleration of free fall is constant

both stones hit the floor at the same time

they fall at constant speed

the heavier stone hits the floor first

acceleration increases with weight

the heavier stone hits the floor first

speed increases with weight

The diagram shows a bird in flight.


In which direction does the weight of the bird act?
B

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

[Turn over

4
5

The mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg.


When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is
0.90 kg.

What is the mass of the empty bottle?


A
6

0.50 kg

0.65 kg

0.80 kg

g / cm3

kg / m2

Which of the following is a unit of density?


A

0.40 kg

cm3 / g

g / cm2

Each of the solids shown in the diagram has the same mass.
Which solid has the greatest density?
A

2 cm
1 cm

2 cm
1 cm

2 cm

UCLES 2007

2 cm

1 cm

1 cm

1 cm

0625/01/M/J/07

1 cm

2 cm

2 cm

5
8

A force acts on a moving rubber ball.


How many of the following changes could happen to the ball because of the force?
a change in direction
a change in shape
a change in mass
a change in speed
A

A light aircraft stands at rest on the ground. It stands on three wheels, one at the front and two
further back.
Which point could be its centre of mass?

10 Which form of energy is used to generate electrical energy in a tidal power station?
A

chemical energy

gravitational energy

internal energy (thermal energy)

nuclear energy

11 Which line in the table gives an example of the stated form of energy?
form of energy

example

gravitational

internal

the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode ray tube

kinetic

the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a


high diving board

strain

the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat

UCLES 2007

the energy due to the movement of a train

0625/01/M/J/07

[Turn over

6
12 A pressure is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.

pressure to
be measured

h
water

The water in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is more dense.
How does the value of h change?
A

It becomes zero.

It decreases, but not to zero.

It stays the same.

It increases.

13 A cylinder is filled with a gas and then sealed, so that the gas has a fixed volume.
The gas molecules are given energy so that their average speed increases.
What happens to the pressure and to the temperature of the gas in the cylinder?
pressure

temperature

decreases

decreases

decreases

increases

increases

decreases

increases

increases

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

7
14 Diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.
Diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.
diagram 1

diagram 2

random
movement

microscope

air molecules
and
smoke particles

light

Why do the smoke particles move randomly?


A

They are hit by air molecules.

They are less dense than air.

They are moved by convection currents.

They gain energy from the light.

15 The graph shows how the temperature of hot liquid wax changes with time as the wax is allowed
to cool.
At which labelled point on the graph are both liquid wax and solid wax present?

temperature
A

D
0
0

UCLES 2007

time

0625/01/M/J/07

[Turn over

8
16 1 kg of water and 1 kg of aluminium are heated to the same temperature and then allowed to cool
in a room.
Why does the aluminium cool more quickly than the water?
A

Aluminium contracts more than water.

Aluminium does not evaporate but water does.

Aluminium has a higher thermal capacity than water.

Aluminium has a lower thermal capacity than water.

17 Bread can be cooked by placing it below, but not touching, a heating element.
heating element

bread

Which process transfers thermal energy from the heating element to the bread?
A

conduction

convection

insulation

radiation

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

9
18 The diagram shows a refrigerator. The cooling unit is placed at the top. The cooling unit cools the
air near it.

cooling unit

What happens to the density of this air as it cools and how does it move?
density of the air

movement of the air

decreases

moves down

decreases

stays where it is

increases

moves down

increases

stays where it is

19 Water waves are reflected at a plane surface.


Which property of the waves is changed by the reflection?
A

direction

frequency

speed

wavelength

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

[Turn over

10
20 Plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. They travel more quickly in
the deeper water.

shallow water
boundary
wave
direction
deep water

Which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

11
21 A man sees a stone at the bottom of a pool of water.
Which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?

man

air
water

stone

22 A ray of light is reflected by two parallel plane mirrors X and Y.


mirror X
30

mirror Y

Which statement is correct?


A

The angle of incidence at mirror X is 30.

The angle of incidence at mirror Y is 60.

The angle of reflection at mirror X is 120.

The angle of reflection at mirror Y is 0.

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

[Turn over

12
23 Music is produced by the loudspeaker of a radio.
Which property of the sound wave increases when the music is made louder?
A

amplitude

frequency

speed

wavelength

24 A starting pistol is fired 640 m away from a spectator.


640 m

spectator

The spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol two seconds after seeing the flash from the
gun.
What is the speed of sound in air?
A

160 m / s

320 m / s

640 m / s

1280 m / s

25 Small particles of metal are scattered near a bar magnet to show the pattern of the magnetic
field.
Which metal is suitable?
A

aluminium

brass

copper

iron

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

13
26 A strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.
core

pins
coil

What happens when the current in the coil is halved?


A

No pins are attracted.

Fewer pins are attracted.

The same number of pins is attracted.

Many more pins are attracted.

27 Four plotting compasses are placed near a bar magnet.


Which plotting compass is shown pointing in the correct direction?
A

N
C

28 Four wires are made from the same material.


Which wire has the greatest resistance?
length of wire / cm

diameter of wire / mm

50

0.1

50

0.2

100

0.1

100

0.2

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

[Turn over

14
29 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth and becomes positively charged.
Why has the rod become positively charged?
A

It has gained electrons.

It has gained neutrons.

It has lost electrons.

It has lost neutrons.

30 Which circuit is a variable potential divider (potentiometer)?

output
output

output
output

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

15
31 The circuit contains a relay.

relay

lamp 2

switch S

lamp 1
When switch S is closed, what is the state of the lamps?
lamp 1

lamp 2

on

on

on

off

off

on

off

off

32 Which diagram shows a circuit that will allow the lamps to be switched on and off independently?

33 What is the symbol for a fuse?


A

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

[Turn over

16
34 A cable in a house is carrying too much current.
What is the greatest danger?
A

appliances not working

electric shock

fire

low power

35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope,
which shows a graph of voltage output against time.

oscilloscope

contact

contact

Which graph shows the voltage output against time?


A

36 The diagram shows a lamp connected to a transformer.


40 turns

200 turns

12 V a.c.

What is the potential difference across the lamp?


A

2.4 V

UCLES 2007

12 V

60 V

0625/01/M/J/07

240 V

17
37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.

+ + + + + +
cathode rays


In which direction is the beam deflected?
A

into the page

out of the page

towards the bottom of the page

towards the top of the page

38 What are the most penetrating and the least penetrating types of radiation?
most penetrating

least penetrating

-particles

-particles

-particles

-particles

-rays

-particles

-rays

-particles

39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g
of the substance.
How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested?
A

0.03 g

UCLES 2007

0.12 g

1.92 g

0625/01/M/J/07

7.68 g

[Turn over

18
40 The data below relates to the nucleus of a particular neutral atom of nitrogen.
proton number

Z=7

nucleon number

A = 17

Which row represents the correct number of neutrons and electrons in this atom?
number of neutrons

number of electrons

10

10

10

17

17

10

UCLES 2007

0625/01/M/J/07

19
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/M/J/07

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

0625/01/M/J/07

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS

October/November 2007

Paper 1 Multiple Choice

45 minutes
Additional Materials:

*9483001639*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB07 11_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2007

[Turn over

2
1

Some water is poured into four tubes of different cross-sectional areas.


Which tube contains the largest volume of water?

area = 10 cm2

area = 20 cm2

area = 30 cm2

area = 40 cm2

6 cm
4 cm

3 cm

Four students try to explain what is meant by acceleration.


Which student makes a correct statement?

It is related to the changing speed of an object.

It is the distance an object travels in one second.

It is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.

It is the force acting on an object when it is near to the Earth.

A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.4 s later hears an echo from a wall.

The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.


How far away is the player from the wall?
A

66 m

UCLES 2007

132 m

264 m

0625/01/O/N/07

825 m

2 cm

3
4

What are the correct units for force and for weight?
force

weight

kg

kg

kg

kg

The table shows the weight of a 10 kg mass on each of five planets.


planet

weight of a 10 kg mass / N

Mercury

40

Venus

90

Earth

100

Mars

40

Jupiter

250

On which planets would an astronaut have a smaller weight than on Earth?

Mercury, Mars and Jupiter

Mercury, Venus and Mars

Mercury, Venus and Jupiter

Venus, Mars and Jupiter

A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly-shaped solid.
Which apparatus is needed to find the density of both?
A

balance, clock, ruler

balance, measuring cylinder, ruler

balance, measuring cylinder, string

clock, ruler, string

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

[Turn over

4
7

A metal drum has a mass of 200 kg when empty and 1000 kg when filled with 1.0 m3 of
methylated spirit.
What is the density of methylated spirit?

0.0050 kg / m3

0.11 kg / m3

800 kg / m3

1000 kg / m3

An empty glass is placed on a join between two tables as shown. The glass remains stable.
Which point is the centre of mass of the glass?

B
C
D

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

5
9

An aeroplane is in equilibrium.
The diagram shows the forces acting on the aeroplane.
lift force from wings

force from
engine

air
resistance

weight

Which statement about the forces is correct?


force from engine

lift force from wings

equal to air resistance

equal to weight

equal to air resistance

greater than weight

greater than air resistance

equal to weight

greater than air resistance

greater than weight

10 A student adds loads to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each load.
He then plots a graph from the results.

load / N

Which length is plotted on the vertical axis?


A

measured length

original length

(measured length original length)

(measured length + original length)

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

[Turn over

6
11 A person uses chemical energy to run up some stairs.

She stops at the top of the stairs.


What has the chemical energy been converted to when she is at the top of the stairs?
A

kinetic energy and gravitational energy

kinetic energy and strain energy

gravitational energy and heat energy

strain energy and heat energy

12 Electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.


In what order is the energy transferred in this process?
A

nuclear fuel generator reactor and boiler turbines

nuclear fuel generator turbines reactor and boiler

nuclear fuel reactor and boiler generator turbines

nuclear fuel reactor and boiler turbines generator

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

7
13 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer, used to measure atmospheric pressure.
P

mercury

Atmospheric pressure increases.


What happens to the level L and to the pressure at P?
level L

pressure at P

falls

increases

falls

stays the same

rises

increases

rises

stays the same

14 The gas in a container is heated but is kept at constant volume.


Why does the gas pressure increase?
A

The molecules expand.

The molecules increase in mass.

The molecules move further apart.

The molecules move more rapidly.

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

[Turn over

8
15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances A, B, C and D.
Which substance is a gas at 25 C?
substance

melting point / C

boiling point / C

219

183

58

98

890

1083

2582

16 The diagram shows four blocks of steel. The same quantity of heat is given to each block.
Which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?

17 A wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.

wooden wheel
iron circle

Which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?
A

cooling the iron circle

heating the iron circle

heating the wooden wheel

heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

9
18 Which statement refers to convection?
A

It does not involve energy transfer.

It is the transfer of heat energy without the movement of particles.

It only occurs in liquids or gases.

It only occurs in solids.

19 Spoons made of different materials were placed in four cups of coffee poured from the same jug.
Which spoon will be hottest to touch at end X?
experiment A
wooden
spoon

experiment B
steel
spoon

experiment C

white plastic
spoon

experiment D
black plastic
spoon

20 Which line gives an example of a longitudinal wave and describes its vibrations?
example of a
longitudinal wave

vibrations

light wave

at right angles to the direction the wave travels

Iight wave

in the same direction as the wave travels

sound wave

at right angles to the direction the wave travels

sound wave

in the same direction as the wave travels

21 The diagram shows a section through a series of waves on water.


Which dotted line shows the position of the still water surface after the waves have passed?
A
B
C
D

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

[Turn over

10
22 A student shines a narrow beam of white light into a prism as shown in the diagram. He sees a
spectrum of colours emerging from the prism.

X
Y
Z

narrow beam
of white light

spectrum
of colours

Which three colours does he see at X, at Y and at Z?


X

blue

yellow

red

red

blue

yellow

red

yellow

blue

yellow

red

blue

23 An object placed in front of a plane mirror at O produces an image at I.


O

If the object moves towards the mirror in the direction shown by the arrow, in which direction does
the image move?
O

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

11
24 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears
an echo.
Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?
A

The sound waves are absorbed.

The sound waves are diffracted.

The sound waves are reflected.

The sound waves are refracted.

25 The graph represents a sound wave. The horizontal (x) axis represents time.
y

The frequency of the sound is increased.


The graphs below are shown to the same scale. Which graph represents the new sound wave?

x
y

x
UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

x
[Turn over

12
26 Which materials are suitable for making a permanent magnet and the core of an electromagnet?
permanent magnet

core of an electromagnet

iron

iron

iron

steel

steel

iron

steel

steel

27 Three charged balls, P, Q and R, are suspended by insulated threads. Ball P is negatively
charged.
insulated thread

What are the charges on Q and on R?


Q

positive

positive

positive

negative

negative

positive

negative

negative

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

13
28 The circuit shows a current I in a resistor of resistance R.

3.0 V

R
Which line gives possible values of I and of R?
I/A

R/

1.5

1.5

1.5

2.0

6.0

2.0

4.0

12.0

29 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box.
The voltage-current graph for X is as shown.
variable voltage supply

voltage

A
X
0
0

current

What is the component X?


A

a capacitor

a closed switch

a metallic resistor

an open switch

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

[Turn over

14
30 Four lamps are connected in a circuit as shown in the diagram.
Each lamp is designed to operate at 12 V.
12 V

The circuit is now switched on.


Which statement is correct?
A

Each lamp can be switched off independently.

If one lamp breaks all the others will stay alight.

The current is the same in all the lamps.

The lamps will all light at normal brightness.

31 The diagram shows a battery connected to three identical resistors. Four ammeters A, B, C and
D are connected in the circuit.
Which ammeter shows the smallest reading?

A A

A D
A
B

A
C

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

15
32 In the circuit shown, the switch is closed for a long time, then opened.
voltmeter 1
V

voltmeter 2

voltmeter 3

Immediately after the switch is opened, which voltmeters will read zero?
A

voltmeter 1 only

voltmeter 2 only

voltmeter 3 only

voltmeter 1, voltmeter 2 and voltmeter 3

33 A householder asks an electrician to install a mains electrical socket in her bathroom so that she
may use a hairdryer there. The electrician refuses to do this because it would be dangerous.
Why would installing the socket be dangerous?
A

The current drawn by the hairdryer would cause overheating in the cables.

The handling of electrical equipment in damp conditions could cause an electric shock.

The hot air produced by the hairdryer would cause the fuse to melt.

The temperature in the bathroom would damage the insulation.

34 A mains electrical circuit uses insulated copper cable and the cable overheats.
To prevent the cable overheating, how should the cable be changed, and why?
A

Use thicker copper cable which has less resistance.

Use thicker insulation which stops the heat escaping.

Use thinner copper cable which has more resistance.

Use thinner insulation which allows less heat to escape.

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

[Turn over

16
35 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?
how

why

at high voltage

for safety

at high voltage

to reduce energy loss

at low voltage

for safety

at low voltage

to reduce energy loss

36 Which parts of an a.c. generator slide past each other when the generator is working?
A

brushes and coil

coil and magnets

magnets and slip rings

slip rings and brushes

37 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.


electron
beam

top
screen
Y2

X2

heater
Y1
cathode anode

Y-plates

X1
X-plates

What must be done to deflect the electron beam upwards?


A

make X1 more positive than X2

make X2 more positive than X1

make Y1 more positive than Y2

make Y2 more positive than Y1

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

bottom

17
38 A sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector.

radioactive
source

detector
sheet of paper

Which types of radiation can pass through the paper?


A

-particles and -particles only

-particles and -rays only

-particles and -rays only

-particles, -particles and -rays

39 A sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.


The nuclei of which atoms will decay first?
A

impossible to know, because radioactive decay is random

impossible to know, unless the age of the material is known

atoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms

atoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

[Turn over

18
40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.
Which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?

n
+

+
+ +
n

key
n = a neutron

+ = a proton

= an electron
C

(not to scale)

n
+n+
n n
+

n
+n+
n n
+

UCLES 2007

0625/01/O/N/07

19
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/O/N/07

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/O/N/07

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2008
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*1101906355*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB08 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2008

[Turn over

2
1

Some liquid is heated in a flask.


The diagrams show the height of the liquid in the tube when the liquid is cold and when it is hot.

cold

hot

scale

tube

cm

cm
liquid
flask

What is the difference in the heights?


A
2

1.7 cm

2.8 cm

3.2 cm

4.5 cm

The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.


Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus the greatest?
C
speed
B

D
time

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

3
3

The circuit of a motor racing track is 3 km in length. In a race, a car goes 25 times round the
circuit in 30 minutes.
What is the average speed of the car?

75 km / hour

90 km / hour

150 km / hour

750 km / hour

The force of gravity acting on an astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft is less than when she is on
the Earths surface.
Compared with being on the Earths surface, how do her mass and weight change when she
goes into orbit?

mass in orbit

weight in orbit

decreases

decreases

decreases

unchanged

unchanged

decreases

unchanged

unchanged

When two blocks X and Y are placed on a uniform beam, the beam balances on a pivot at its
centre as shown.
Y
X

pivot

What does this show about X and Y?


A

They have the same mass and the same density.

They have the same mass and the same weight.

They have the same volume and the same density.

They have the same volume and the same weight.

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

4
6

The diagram shows a rectangular metal block measuring 10 cm 5.0 cm 2.0 cm.
10 cm
5.0 cm
2.0 cm

Its mass is 250 g.


What is the density of the metal?
A
7

0.20 g / cm3

0.40 g / cm3

2.5 g / cm3

5.0 g / cm3

The diagram shows an experiment to find the density of a liquid.

cm3

cm3
50

50
measuring
cylinder

40

40

30

30

20

20

10

balance

200 g

liquid

10

250 g

What is the density of the liquid?


A
8

0.5 g / cm3

2.0 g / cm3

8.0 g / cm3

What are the conditions for equilibrium?


resultant force
acting

resultant turning
effect acting

yes

yes

yes

no

no

yes

no

no

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

10.0 g / cm3

5
9

The diagram shows four objects standing on a flat surface.


The centre of mass of each object is marked M.
Which object will fall over?
A

D
M

10 A stone is thrown from the edge of a cliff. Its path is shown in the diagram.

3
ground
In which position does the stone have its greatest kinetic energy and in which position does it
have its least gravitational energy?
greatest kinetic
energy

least gravitational
energy

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

6
11 A worker is lifting boxes of identical weight from the ground onto a moving belt.
At first, it takes him 2 s to lift each box. Later in the day, it takes him 3 s.
Which statement is correct?
A

Later in the day, less work is done in lifting each box.

Later in the day, more work is done in lifting each box.

Later in the day, less power is developed in lifting each box.

Later in the day, more power is developed in lifting each box.

12 A manometer is used to indicate the pressure in a steel vessel, as shown in the diagram.

liquid
manometer
steel vessel

What value does the liquid manometer give for the pressure in the vessel?
A

It is zero.

It is between zero and atmospheric pressure.

It is equal to atmospheric pressure.

It is greater than atmospheric pressure.

13 Four glass tanks contain water.


In which tank is the pressure of the water on the base greatest?
A

4m

3m
4m

3m
2m

UCLES 2008

2m

6m

2m

1m
2m

0625/01/M/J/08

4m
6m

7
14 Which line in the table describes the properties of solids and of liquids at a fixed temperature?
solids

liquids

definite volume and definite shape

no definite volume but definite shape

no definite volume but definite shape

definite volume and definite shape

definite volume and definite shape

definite volume but no definite shape

no definite volume but definite shape

no definite volume and no definite shape

15 Air is pumped slowly into a car tyre to increase the pressure. The temperature of the air does not
change.
Which line in the table is correct?
number of molecules
hitting 1 cm2 of the
tyre each second

average speed at which


molecules hit the tyre

increases

increases

increases

unchanged

unchanged

increases

unchanged

unchanged

16 The thermometer in the diagram has no scale.

bulb

Where must the bulb be placed so that 0 C can be marked on the stem?
A

in boiling water

in cold water

in a freezer

in melting ice

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

8
17 A sample of a solid is heated for 12 minutes and its temperature noted every minute.
The results are shown in the table.
time / min
temperature / C

10

11

12

11.5

16.1

22.1

31.0

31.1

31.1

31.1

31.3

45.0

65.2

66.2

66.3

66.3

How should the sample be described at the end of the 12 minutes?


A

all solid

in the process of melting

all liquid

in the process of boiling

18 A heater is placed in a room.


Which diagram shows the movement of air as the room is heated?

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

9
19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.
In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?

ice
water

water

ice wrapped
in lead wire

D
ice

water

water

ice wrapped
in lead wire

20 The diagram represents water waves about to move into shallow water from deep water.

wavefront

deep water
shallow water

Which property of the waves remains the same after the waves move into shallow water?
A

frequency

speed

wavefront direction

wavelength

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

10
21 Two sets of water waves overlap as shown in the diagram.

P
U

Q
S

From which two points are the sets of waves coming?


A

P and S

T and R

Q and T

U and Q

22 Which diagram shows total internal reflection of light?


A

C
glass prism

mirror

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

11
23 Light from the Sun passes through a prism and a spectrum is produced on a screen.
screen

narrow slit
P
red

light from
the Sun

violet

A thermometer placed at P shows a large temperature rise.


Which type of radiation causes this?
A

infra-red

microwave

ultra-violet

visible light

24 Two thin converging lenses X and Y are used as shown to give a focused image of an illuminated
slit. The rays shown are parallel between X and Y.
X

slit

image

screen

source
of light

30 cm

20 cm

15 cm

What are the correct values for the focal lengths of X and of Y?
focal length
of X / cm

focal length
of Y / cm

50

35

30

20

30

15

20

20

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

12
25 Which equation can be used to calculate the speed of sound?
A

speed = distance
time

speed = distance time

speed =

speed = time + distance

time
distance

26 A battery-operated bell is surrounded by a box with double walls.


air
bell

box walls

gap

The bell is ringing but no sound at all is heard outside the box.
What is in the gap?
A

a solid

a liquid

a gas

a vacuum

27 Which line in the table shows whether iron and steel are ferrous or non-ferrous materials?
iron

steel

ferrous

ferrous

ferrous

non-ferrous

non-ferrous

ferrous

non-ferrous

non-ferrous

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

13
28 A solenoid carrying a current is used to demagnetise a bar magnet.
solenoid
bar magnet

power
supply

Which conditions achieve demagnetisation?


current through
solenoid

movement of bar magnet

a.c.

around the solenoid quickly

a.c.

through the solenoid slowly

d.c.

around the solenoid quickly

d.c.

through the solenoid slowly

29 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.


What charges must the rod and the balloon carry?
A

The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.

The rod and the balloon carry like charges.

The rod is charged but the balloon is not.

The balloon is charged but the rod is not.

30 Which circuit symbol represents a component used to store energy?


A

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

14
31 In the circuit shown, the switches S1 and S2 may be open (off) or closed (on).

V
+
12 V

S2

S1

switches shown
open (off)

Which line in the table shows the voltmeter reading for the switch positions given?
S1

S2

voltmeter reading / V

open

open

12

closed

closed

12

open

closed

closed

open

12

32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much
current flows.
X

What is device X?
A

a fuse

a switch

a resistor

an ammeter

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

15
33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.

X
Y
X

Z
circuit 1

circuit 2

Which statement is correct?


A

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, both the other lamps will go out.

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, both the other lamps will go out.

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.

If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.

34 The wire XY shown in the diagram is connected to a sensitive voltmeter with a centre zero. XY is
then moved quickly once through the magnetic field.
X

S
V

N
movement

What is observed on the voltmeter?


A

The needle moves briefly in one direction and then returns to the centre.

The needle moves quickly in one direction and stays deflected.

The needle vibrates rapidly from side to side whilst XY is moving.

The needle stays still.

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

16
35 The diagram shows a transformer connected to a 240 V a.c. supply.

soft-iron core
primary coil
60 turns

secondary coil
30 turns

240 V
a.c.

What is the potential difference across the secondary coil of the transformer?
A

30 V

120 V

240 V

480 V

36 In order to produce a beam of cathode rays, a heated filament is placed near to an anode in an
evacuated glass vessel.
evacuated glass vessel

anode

heated filament

What is the type of charge on the anode and why is this charge chosen?
charge

reason

negative

to attract electrons

negative

to repel electrons

positive

to attract electrons

positive

to repel electrons

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

17
37 Diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100 resistors.
One of the resistors is changed to 90 , as shown in diagram 2.
diagram 1

diagram 2

100

90

100

100

How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done?
A

It becomes zero.

It decreases a little.

It increases a little.

It stays the same.

38 What is a -particle and from which part of a radioactive atom is it emitted?


-particle

emitted from

electron

nucleus

electron

outer orbits

helium nucleus

nucleus

helium nucleus

outer orbits

39 A sample of radioactive uranium has mass 1 g. Another sample of the same material has
mass 2 g.
Which property is the same for both samples?
A

the amount of radiation emitted per second

the half-life

the number of uranium atoms

the volume

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

[Turn over

18
40 A particular nuclide has the symbol

37
17

Cl .

What is true for atoms of this nuclide?


A

There are 17 nucleons in the nucleus.

There are 17 protons in the nucleus.

There are 37 electrons in the nucleus.

There are 37 neutrons in the nucleus.

UCLES 2008

0625/01/M/J/08

19
BLANK PAGE

0625/01/M/J/08

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

0625/01/M/J/08

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/01

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

October/November 2008
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*7002360314*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 20 printed pages.


IB08 11_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2008

[Turn over

2
1

Two digital stopwatches X and Y, which record in minutes and seconds, are used to time a race.
The readings of the two stopwatches, at the start and at the end of the race, are shown.

stopwatch X

stopwatch Y

start

end

00:00

00:40

start

end

01:30

02:20

Which statement about the time of the race is correct?

Both stopwatches record the same time interval.

Stopwatch X recorded 10 s longer than stopwatch Y.

Stopwatch Y recorded 10 s longer than stopwatch X.

Stopwatch Y recorded 50 s longer than stopwatch X.

A tennis player hits a ball over the net.


P

Q
R

In which position is the ball accelerating?


A

P and Q only

P and R only

Q and R only

P, Q and R

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

3
3

A car travels at various speeds during a short journey.


The table shows the distances travelled and the time taken during each of four stages
P, Q, R and S.
stage
distance travelled / km
time taken / minutes

1.8

3.6

2.7

2.7

During which two stages is the car travelling at the same speed?
A
4

P and Q

P and S

Q and R

R and S

What is the meaning of the weight of an object?


A

the density of the material from which it is made

the force exerted on it by gravity

the mass of the matter it contains

the pressure it exerts on the floor

The weight of an object is to be found using the beam balance shown in the diagram.

object

The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan,
with the following results.
weights in the right hand pan

effect

0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N

balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side

0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N

balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side

What is the best estimate of the weight of the object?


A

0.27 N

UCLES 2008

0.29 N

0.31 N

0625/01/O/N/08

0.58 N

[Turn over

4
6

A student needs to find the density of a cubic block of wood.


Which two pieces of apparatus should she use?

balance and metre rule

balance and thermometer

measuring cylinder and metre rule

measuring cylinder and thermometer

Two identical measuring cylinders containing different liquids are placed on a simple balance.
They balance as shown.

liquid X
volume = 200 cm3

liquid Y
volume = 100 cm3

How does the density of X compare with the density of Y?


1
2

density of Y

density of X =

density of X = density of Y

density of X = 2 density of Y

density of X = 4 density of Y

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

5
8

The diagrams show a uniform rod with its midpoint on a pivot.


Two equal forces F are applied to the rod, as shown.
Which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?

A
F

pivot

pivot

B
F

pivot

pivot

A train is travelling along a horizontal track at constant speed. Two of the forces acting on the
train are shown in the diagram.
forwards
force from engine
60 000 N

friction
20 000 N

A force of air resistance is also acting on the train to give it a resultant force of zero.
What is this air resistance force?
A

40 000 N backwards

80 000 N backwards

40 000 N forwards

80 000 N forwards

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

[Turn over

6
10 The diagram shows water stored behind a dam.
dam

water
turbine
generator
water

The water flows to a turbine and turns a generator.


Which sequence for the conversion of energy is correct?
A

gravitational energy kinetic energy electrical energy

kinetic energy gravitational energy electrical energy

gravitational energy electrical energy kinetic energy

kinetic energy electrical energy gravitational energy

11 A rubber ball is dropped from a height of 2 m on to a table.


Whilst in contact with the table, some of its energy is converted into internal energy.
What is the highest possible point the ball could reach after bouncing?

4m

height
B

2m

ball released
from this height

C
D

0
table

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

7
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer used to measure atmospheric pressure.

mercury
Q

Which statement is correct?


A

The pressure at P is atmospheric pressure.

The pressure at P is nearly zero.

The pressure at Q is lower than the pressure at P.

The pressure at Q is nearly zero.

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

[Turn over

8
13 A brick with rectangular sides rests on a table.

brick
table

The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.

How has this change affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?
force

pressure

unchanged

unchanged

increased

unchanged

unchanged

increased

increased

increased

14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion.
Which line in the table is correct?
type of motion
of particles

particles are
suspended in

vibration

a liquid or a gas

vibration

a solid, a liquid or a gas

random

a liquid or a gas

random

a solid, a liquid or a gas

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

9
15 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is then slowly decreased.
Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?

pressure

pressure

0
0

time
C

pressure

pressure

0
0

UCLES 2008

time

time

0625/01/O/N/08

time

[Turn over

10
16 Equal masses of two different liquids are heated using the same heater. The graph shows how
the temperature of each liquid changes with time.

temperature

liquid 1
liquid 2

0
0

time

What does the graph tell us about the liquids?


A

Liquid 1 has a higher melting point than liquid 2.

Liquid 1 has a higher boiling point than liquid 2.

Liquid 1 starts to melt sooner than liquid 2.

Liquid 1 starts to boil sooner than liquid 2.

17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole
of the washer.
steel
washer

steel rod

How can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?


A

Cool the washer and put it over the rod.

Cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.

Heat the rod and then place it in the hole.

Heat the washer and then place it over the rod.

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

11
18 A cup with a lid contains a hot drink.
lid

hot drink

When the lid is removed, the rate of heat loss from the drink increases.
What causes this?
A

convection only

evaporation only

both convection and evaporation

neither convection nor evaporation

19 A cupboard is placed in front of a heater. Air can move through a gap under the cupboard.

wall

cupboard

heater

air moves through gap


floor

Which line in the table describes the temperature and the direction of the air that moves through
the gap?
air temperature

air direction

cool

away from the heater

cool

towards the heater

warm

away from the heater

warm

towards the heater

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

[Turn over

12
20 Waves in a tank pass from shallow to deep water.
The wavefront diagram is shown.

wavefront

shallow
water

deep
water

Which quantity increases as the waves enter the deep water?


A

amplitude

frequency

wave energy

wavelength

21 The diagrams represent water waves in a tank.


Which diagram represents waves that change speed?
B

A
barrier

barrier

D
barrier
deeper
water

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

shallower
water

13
22 Which diagram shows the dispersion of white light?

B
glass

glass

white
light

white
light

D
glass

glass

white
light

white
light

23 In the diagram, the distance OP is the focal length of the lens.


Through which point will the ray shown pass, after refraction by the lens?
lens
A

P
focal length

focal length
C

24 Which word correctly completes the sentence below?


An echo is a sound wave which is by a large obstacle.
A

absorbed

dispersed

reflected

refracted

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

[Turn over

14
25 In an experiment to measure the speed of sound, a student uses a stopwatch to find how long a
sound takes to travel from X to Y. She does this six times.
sound travels from X to Y
X

The table shows her results.


time / s
first

0.5

second

0.7

third

0.6

fourth

0.4

fifth

0.9

sixth

0.5

What value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound?
A

0.4 s

0.5 s

0.6 s

0.9 s

26 A student wishes to demagnetise a steel bar. He uses the apparatus shown.


coil
electrical
supply
steel bar
Which type of electrical supply should the student use and what should he do with the steel bar?
supply

what to do with the steel bar

a.c.

keep it inside the coil

a.c.

slowly remove it from the coil

d.c.

keep it inside the coil

d.c.

slowly remove it from the coil

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

15
27 Two metal bars are held together. At least one of the bars is a magnet. The bars repel each
other.
What does this show about the bars and why?
what it shows

why

only one of the bars is a magnet

two magnets always attract each other

only one of the bars is a magnet

induced magnetism in the other bar makes it repel

they are both magnets

there must be like poles facing each other

they are both magnets

there must be opposite poles facing each other

28 When there is an electric current in a metal wire, what flows through the wire?
A

atoms

electrons

neutrons

protons

29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.
Which heater has the least resistance?
voltage / V

current / A

110

5.0

110

10.0

230

5.0

230

10.0

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

[Turn over

16
30 In the circuit below, X and Y are identical 6 V lamps.
6V

switch

What happens when the switch is closed (the current is switched on)?
A

X lights more brightly than Y.

Y lights more brightly than X.

X and Y both light with full brightness.

X and Y both light with half brightness.

31 The diagram shows four different circuits.


P

What is the order of increasing resistance of these circuits?


lowest
resistance

highest
resistance

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

17
32 A student makes four circuits.
In which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse?

33 A mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40 A.


A hairdryer takes 2 A. It is connected to the circuit by a lead which can safely carry up to 5 A.
Which fuse is best to use in the plug fitted to the hairdryer lead?
A

1 A fuse

3 A fuse

10 A fuse

50 A fuse

34 Two different systems are used to transmit equal amounts of electrical power from one building to
another.
One system uses low voltage and the other uses high voltage. Both systems use identical wires.
Which line in the table is correct about which system wastes least energy and why?
least energy wasted

why

high voltage system

the current in the wires is bigger

high voltage system

the current in the wires is smaller

low voltage system

the current in the wires is bigger

low voltage system

the current in the wires is smaller

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

[Turn over

18
35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the
wire.

X
current
force
magnet

magnet
N

Y
If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on
the wire act?
A

downwards

upwards

to the left

to the right

36 A cathode-ray beam passes through an electric field between charged parallel plates.

+
cathode-ray beam

In which direction is the beam deflected?


A

towards the negative plate

towards the positive plate

into the page

out of the page

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

19
37 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.

Why does this happen?


A

The resistance of the lamp decreases.

The resistance of the lamp increases.

The resistance of the thermistor decreases.

The resistance of the thermistor increases.

38 The diagram shows an experiment to monitor the radiation from a radioactive gas. The counter
readings are corrected for background radiation.
counter

000.0

radioactive gas

The table shows how the counter reading varies with time.
time / seconds

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

counter reading /
counts per minute

140

105

82

61

44

36

27

20

15

10

What is the half-life of the gas?


A

between 20 and 40 seconds

between 40 and 60 seconds

between 60 and 140 seconds

between 140 and 180 seconds

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

[Turn over

20
39 Which material is commonly used as a lining for a box for storing radioactive samples?
A

aluminium

copper

lead

uranium

40 A uranium

238
92 U

nucleus emits an -particle.

What are the new nucleon and proton numbers?


nucleon number

proton number

238

88

236

90

234

92

234

90

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2008

0625/01/O/N/08

First Variant Question Paper

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2009
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*7150187285*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


IB09 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2009

[Turn over

2
1

A metre rule is used to measure a length.


Which reading is shown to the nearest millimetre?
A

0.7 m

0.76 m

0.761 m

0.7614 m

The graph represents the movement of a body.


10
speed
m/s

8
6
4
2
0
0

time / s

How far has the body moved after 5 s?


A
3

2m

10 m

25 m

50 m

A car travels 100 km. The highest speed of the car is 90 km/h, and the lowest speed is
30 km/h. The journey takes two hours.
What is the average speed for the journey?
A

30 km / h

50 km / h

60 km / h

90 km / h

Which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the Earth is correct?
A

A balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.

Heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.

Large objects always have more mass than small ones.

Mass is a force but weight is not.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

3
5

The table shows the weight in newtons of a10 kg mass on each of four planets.
planet

weight of a 10 kg mass / N

Earth

100

Jupiter

250

Mercury

40

Venus

90

The diagram shows a force meter (spring balance) being used.

18 N

2.0 kg

On which planet is the force meter (spring balance) being used?

Earth

Jupiter

Mercury

Venus

Which items of apparatus are required to determine the density of a liquid?


A

balance and measuring cylinder

balance and thermometer

metre rule and measuring cylinder

metre rule and thermometer

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

[Turn over

4
7

Which property of an object cannot be changed by a force?


A

its mass

its motion

its shape

its size

A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two boulders on opposite sides of a narrow stream. Three
forces of size P, Q and R act on the plank.
P

R
plank

How are the sizes of the forces related?

P+Q=R

P+R=Q

P=Q=R

P=Q+R

Electricity can be obtained from different energy resources.


Which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water?
A

coal

geothermal

hydroelectric

nuclear

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

5
10 Four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall.
pavement
slipway

sea wall

beach

Which person produces the greatest average power?


person

route

time taken

runs across the beach, then climbs the ladder

8s

walks across the beach, then climbs the ladder

16 s

runs up the slipway

5s

walks up the slipway

10 s

11 The diagrams show two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram
shows a tube of bigger diameter, but the diagram is incomplete. There is a vacuum above the
mercury in both tubes.
Which labelled position on the right-hand tube could show the mercury level in that tube?
vacuum

A
B
C

glass
tubes
D

dish
mercury

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

dish

[Turn over

6
12 A student fills two containers with water (density 1.0 g / cm3) and two with oil (density 0.8 g / cm3),
as shown in the diagrams.
In which container is the pressure on the base the greatest?
A

water

oil
water

oil

13 In an experiment, some of a substance changes from a liquid to a gas. The temperature of the
remaining liquid changes because of this.
What is the name for this change of state and how does the temperature change?
change of state

how temperature changes

condensation

decreases

condensation

increases

evaporation

decreases

evaporation

increases

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

7
14 A piston traps a certain mass of gas inside a cylinder. Initially the piston is halfway along the
length of the cylinder.
The piston is now moved towards the open end of the cylinder. The temperature of the gas
remains constant.

initial position

final position

How are the density and the pressure of the gas affected by moving the piston?
density

pressure

decreases

decreases

decreases

unchanged

increases

decreases

increases

unchanged

15 The graph shows the change in temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.


Which part of the graph shows when the substance is boiling?

temperature
C
B
A

time

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

[Turn over

8
16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal energy
(heat).
Which block has the greatest thermal capacity?
A

temperature
rise = 2 oC

temperature
rise = 4 oC

temperature
rise = 6 oC

temperature
rise = 8 oC

17 A rod is made up of copper and wood joined together.


After the rod is heated at the join in the centre for about a minute, where would the lowest
temperature be?
B

wood

copper

18 The diagram shows a fire.

Why does the smoke rise above the fire?


A

Smoke evaporates more quickly at higher temperatures.

Smoke molecules diffuse more quickly at higher temperatures.

The density of the air is lower at higher temperatures.

The pressure of the air is greater at higher temperatures.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

9
19 The diagrams show water waves that move more slowly after passing into shallow water at the
broken line.
Which diagram shows what happens to the waves?

fast

slow

fast

slow

deep
water

shallow
water

deep
water

shallow
water

fast

slow

fast

slow

deep
water

shallow
water

deep
water

shallow
water

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

[Turn over

10
20 The diagrams show examples of wave motion.

2
ripple tank
drum

waves on water

waves in air

waves on a rope

waves in a spring
(as shown)

Which are longitudinal waves?


A

1 only

1, 2 and 4

2 and 3 only

2 and 4 only

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

11
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?

white
light

spectrum

white
light
spectrum

D
spectrum

white
light

white
light

spectrum

22 The diagram shows the path of a ray of light passing through a principal focus F of a lens.
Which broken line shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the lens?

lens

ray
lig

ht

of

A
F

F
B

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

[Turn over

12
23 A small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.
land

sea
waves

small
boat
harbour

harbour
walls

Some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.
What is the name for this effect?
A

diffraction

dispersion

reflection

refraction

24 An engineer standing at P sees an explosion at X.


Z

Y
X

DANGER BLASTING

After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the
other. The second bang is an echo.
From which surface has the sound reflected to cause this echo?
A

XY

UCLES 2009

PV

ZY

0625/11/M/J/09

WX

13
25 The north pole of a bar magnet is placed next to end P of an iron bar PQ, as shown. As a result,
magnetic poles are induced in the iron bar.
S

magnet

Q
iron bar

What are the magnetic poles induced at P and at Q?


magnetic pole at P

magnetic pole at Q

north

north

north

south

south

north

south

south

26 An electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.


Why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet?
A

It forms a permanent magnet.

It has a high density.

It has a high thermal capacity.

It is a good conductor of electricity.

27 Which particle does not experience a force due to an electric field?


A

-particle

electron

neutron

proton

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

[Turn over

14
28 Using the circuit shown, the current I is found for various voltages V. The temperature of the
resistor does not change.
variable direct
voltage
V
A

I
Which graph shows the results obtained?
A

0
V

D
I

0
0

0
V

29 In the circuit shown, ammeter X reads 0.5 A.


4.0 V

A Y

X A
5.0

3.0

What does ammeter Y read?


A

UCLES 2009

0.5 A

3.5 A

0625/11/M/J/09

4.0 A

15
30 In the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical.
Which circuit has the least resistance?
A

31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.
Which lamp breaks?

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

[Turn over

16
32 Either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that
could cause overheating.
cable

X
live
electrical
supply

appliance

neutral
cable

If a fuse is used, in which position in the circuit should it be connected, and if a circuit-breaker is
used, in which position should it be connected?
position
of fuse

position of
circuit-breaker

33 The current in a lamp at full brightness is 0.25 A. The flexible cable to the lamp is designed for
currents up to 5.0 A, so it can safely carry the 0.25 A taken by the lamp.
Which fuse should be inserted in the plug at the other end of the flexible cable?
A

0.2 A

UCLES 2009

1.0 A

5.0 A

0625/11/M/J/09

10.0 A

17
34 A wire perpendicular to the page carries an electric current in a direction out of the page. There
are four compasses near the wire.
Which compass shows the direction of the magnetic field caused by the current?

wire with
current out
of page
D

35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An alternating
voltage of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil.
25.0 V
primary coil
50 turns

secondary coil
100 turns

What is the voltage across the secondary coil?


A

12.5 V

50.0 V

175 V

200 V

36 In a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission.


What are these particles?
A

-particles

electrons

protons

tungsten atoms

UCLES 2009

0625/11/M/J/09

[Turn over

18
37 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.
cathode

anode

top Y plate

P
screen

bottom Y plate

A student wants the cathode rays to make a spot at P on the screen.


Which parts of the cathode-ray tube should be positive?
A

anode and top Y plate

anode and bottom Y plate

cathode and top Y plate

cathode and bottom Y plate

38 A radioactive nucleus contains 138 neutrons. The nucleus emits an -particle.


How many neutrons are in the nucleus after it has emitted the -particle?
A

134

UCLES 2009

136

138

0625/11/M/J/09

139

19
39 The graph shows the decay curve for one particular radioactive nuclide.

2500
count rate
counts / min
2000

1500

1000

500

0
0

5
time / days

What is the half-life of this nuclide?

40

1.0 day

16
7N

is the symbol for a particular nuclide of nitrogen.

1.5 days

2.0 days

2.5 days

23

How many nucleons does this nuclide contain?


A

UCLES 2009

16

0625/11/M/J/09

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

0625/11/M/J/09

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

October/November 2009
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*7565115686*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.


IB09 11_0625_01/4RP
UCLES 2009

[Turn over

2
1

A stopwatch is used to time an athlete running 100 m. The timekeeper forgets to reset the watch
to zero before using it to time another athlete running 100 m.

60

55

55

50

seconds
35

10

45

15

40

20

15
seconds

40

25

30

50

10

45

60

35

stopwatch at
end of first
athletes run

30

20
25

stopwatch at
end of second
athletes run

How long does the second athlete take to run 100 m?


A
2

11.2 s

11.4 s

12.4 s

23.8 s

A ball is thrown upwards.


What effect does the force of gravity have on the ball?

It produces a constant acceleration downwards.

It produces a constant acceleration upwards.

It produces a decreasing acceleration upwards.

It produces an increasing acceleration downwards.

A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows the cars speed plotted against time.
speed
m/s
20

0
0

10

time / s

How far does the car travel before it reaches a constant speed?
A

10 m

UCLES 2009

20 m

100 m

0625/11/O/N/09

200 m

3
4

Which property of a body can be measured in newtons?


A

density

mass

volume

weight

A cup contains hot liquid.


Some of the liquid evaporates as it cools.
What happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup as it cools?

mass

weight

decreases

decreases

decreases

stays the same

stays the same

decreases

stays the same

stays the same

The diagrams show a rectangular box with inside measurements of 5 cm 6 cm 4 cm.


liquid

4 cm
6 cm
5 cm
mass = 40 g

total mass = 220 g

The box has a mass of 40 g when empty. When filled with a liquid, it has a total mass of 220 g.
What is the density of the liquid?
A

220 g / cm3
(5 6 4)

(220 40)
g / cm3
(5 6 4)

(5 6 4) g / cm3
220

(5 6 4)
g / cm3
(220 40)

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

[Turn over

4
7

Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.
upper deck

lower deck

Why is this?

They would cause the bus to become unstable.

They would cause the bus to slow down.

They would increase the kinetic energy of the bus.

They would lower the centre of mass of the bus.

The object in the diagram is acted upon by the two forces shown.
3N

2N
object

What is the effect of these forces?


A

The object moves to the left with constant speed.

The object moves to the left with constant acceleration.

The object moves to the right with constant speed.

The object moves to the right with constant acceleration.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

5
9

The diagram shows a microphone being used in an interview.

microphone

Which energy change takes place in the microphone?


input energy

output energy

chemical

electrical

electrical

chemical

electrical

sound

sound

electrical

10 The table shows the times taken for four children to run up a set of stairs.
Which childs power is greatest?
mass of child / kg

time / s

40

10

40

20

60

10

60

20

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

[Turn over

6
11 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a
reading of h cm of water.
gas
supply
h cm

Why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer?


A

h would be too large if mercury were used.

h would be too small if mercury were used.

The tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.

The tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.

12 The diagrams show two swimming pools. One contains fresh water and the other contains salt
water. Salt water is more dense than fresh water.
At which labelled point is the pressure the greatest?

water surface

water surface
A

fresh water (less dense)

salt water (more dense)

13 Brownian motion is observed by looking at smoke particles through a microscope.


How do the smoke particles move in Brownian motion?
A

all in the same direction

at random

in circles

vibrating about fixed points

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

7
14 A small amount of air is introduced into the vacuum above the mercury in a mercury barometer
tube.
The mercury level goes down.
Why does the mercury level go down?
A

The air molecules cool the mercury and make it contract.

The air molecules decrease the pressure above the mercury.

The air molecules heat the mercury and make it expand.

The air molecules increase the pressure above the mercury.

15 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are
needed.
Which of these is a fixed point?
A

room temperature

the temperature inside a freezer

the temperature of pure melting ice

the temperature of pure warm water

16 The table gives the melting points and boiling points of glycerine and benzene.
melting point

boiling point

glycerine

18 C

290 C

benzene

5.4 C

80 C

At which temperature will both glycerine and benzene be liquid?


A

0 C

UCLES 2009

50 C

100 C

0625/11/O/N/09

150 C

[Turn over

8
17 A beaker contains water at room temperature.

water

Y
How could a convection current be set up in the water?
A

cool the water at X

cool the water at Y

stir the water at X

stir the water at Y

18 A student warms her hands near a fire.

Which waves carry most heat to her hands and are these waves electromagnetic?
waves

electromagnetic

infra-red

no

infra-red

yes

visible light

no

visible light

yes

19 The drawing shows a wave.


Which labelled distance is the wavelength?

A
B

D
C

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

9
20 Sound waves travel from a point X to another point Y.
X

Which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, caused by the sound waves, in the
region between X and Y.
A

D
X

21 A ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air.


Which path does the ray of light take when the angle of incidence i is less than the critical angle?
A
B
air
glass

C
D

ray of
light

22 An object O is placed in front of a converging lens of focal length f.


At which point will the top of the image be seen?
A
B
O
f

C
D

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

[Turn over

10
23 Which range of frequencies typically can be heard by a 10 year-old child?
A

20 Hz 2000 Hz

20 Hz 20 000 Hz

200 Hz 2000 Hz

200 Hz 20 000 Hz

24 Astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. Astronaut 2 is nearby. There is no air in
space.

astronaut 1

hammer

astronaut 2

Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?
A

a louder sound

a quieter sound

a sound of the same loudness

no sound at all

25 A permanent magnet is brought near to a piece of copper. The copper is not attracted by the
magnet.
Why is there no attraction?
A

Copper is ferrous but is only attracted by an electromagnet.

Copper is ferrous but is not attracted by any type of magnet.

Copper is not ferrous and is only attracted by an electromagnet.

Copper is not ferrous and is not attracted by any type of magnet.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

11
26 Four plotting compasses are placed in the magnetic field of two identical bar magnets as shown
in the diagram.
Which compass is shown pointing in the wrong direction?
B
A

D
S

S
C

27 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.
Which calculation gives the resistance of the device?
A

current + potential difference

current potential difference

potential difference current

potential difference current

28 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too
small.
To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is
A

longer and thicker.

longer and thinner.

shorter and thicker.

shorter and thinner.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

[Turn over

12
29 The diagram shows a battery connected to two identical resistors. Three ammeters M1, M2 and
M3 are connected in the circuit.

M1 A

A M3
A
M2

Meter M1 reads 1.0 A.


What are the readings on M2 and on M3?
reading on M2 / A

reading on M3 / A

0.5

0.0

0.5

0.5

0.5

1.0

1.0

1.0

30 The diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.

plastic
case
brass
connecting
strip

switch
lamp

What is the circuit diagram for the torch?


A

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

13
31 An electrical component X is placed in water, as shown.
A

thermometer

X
water

When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.
What is component X?
A

a capacitor

a light-dependent resistor

a relay

a thermistor

32 A certain electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply. The appliance normally uses a
current of 3 A, but the current briefly rises to 4 A at the instant the appliance is switched on. The
cable to the appliance is designed for currents up to 6 A.
The fuses available to protect the cable are rated at 1 A, 3 A, 5 A and 13 A.
Which fuse should be used?
A

1A

3A

5A

13 A

33 On a building site, metal scaffolding is firmly embedded in the damp ground. A builder holds a
mains-operated electric drill in one hand. With his other hand he holds on to the scaffolding.
The power cable of the drill is damaged where it enters the metal casing of the drill.
What danger does this present to the builder?
A

A current could pass through the builder and electrocute him.

A current in the scaffolding could heat it up and burn him.

The large current could blow the fuse and damage the drill.

The large current could make the motor spin too quickly.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

[Turn over

14
34 Which device is designed to allow a small direct current (d.c.) to control a large direct current
(d.c.)?
A

a generator

a motor

a relay

a transformer

35 A transformer is to be used to provide a 10 V output from a 100 V supply.

100 V

10 V

primary coil

secondary coil

What are suitable numbers of turns for the primary coil and for the secondary coil?
number of turns on
the primary coil

number of turns on
the secondary coil

100

1000

200

110

400

490

800

80

36 The diagram shows a beam of cathode rays entering an electric field.

beam

+
In which direction is the beam deflected by the field?
A

downwards

upwards

into the page

out of the page

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

15
37 To create cathode rays in a vacuum, what might be a suitable potential difference to connect
between the cathode and anode?
A

6 V a.c.

6 V d.c.

600 V a.c.

600 V d.c.

38 Which statement explains the meaning of the half-life of a radioactive substance?


A

half the time taken for half the substance to decay

half the time taken for the substance to decay completely

the time taken for half the substance to decay

the time taken for the substance to decay completely

39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z.
X
Y
Z
2 mm of
plastic

10 mm
of aluminium

lead

Which row in the table correctly identifies X, Y and Z?


X

-particles

-particles

-rays

-particles

-particles

-rays

-particles

-rays

-particles

-rays

-particles

-particles

Question 40 is on the next page.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

[Turn over

16
40 How many neutrons and how many protons are contained in a nucleus of
neutrons

protons

92

146

146

92

146

238

238

92

238
92 U ?

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2009

0625/11/O/N/09

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2010
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*0334676086*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


IB10 06_0625_11/4RP
UCLES 2010

[Turn over

2
1

A scientist needs to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped rock sample. Only a rule
and a measuring cylinder, partially filled with water, are available.
cm3

cm

rule

rock sample
measuring
cylinder
To determine the volume, which apparatus should the scientist use?

both the measuring cylinder and the rule

neither the measuring cylinder nor the rule

the measuring cylinder only

the rule only

A student uses a stopwatch to time a runner running around a circular track. The runner runs two
laps (twice around the track). The diagrams show the reading on the stopwatch when the runner
starts running, at the end of the first lap, and at the end of the second lap.

reading when
runner starts

reading at end
of first lap

reading at end
of second lap

What is the time taken for the runner to run the second lap?
A

0 min 50 s

UCLES 2010

1 min 10 s

1 min 13 s

0625/11/M/J/10

2 min 03 s

3
3

Two distance / time graphs and two speed / time graphs are shown.
Which graph represents an object that is at rest?
A

B
distance

distance

time

time

speed

speed

0
time

time

A snail moves along a ruler. It takes 20 s to move from Q to R.


P

cm

12

What is its average speed from Q to R?


A

12 cm / s
20

12 2 cm / s
20

20 cm / s
12

20 cm / s
12 2

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

[Turn over

4
5

Two blocks of metal X and Y hang from spring balances as shown in the diagram.

N0

N0

X
Y

What does the diagram show about X and Y?


A

They have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.

They have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.

They have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.

They have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

5
6

The graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet P and on planet Q.
400

planet P

weight / N
300

planet Q

200

100

0
0

20

40

60
80
mass / kg

An object weighs 400 N on planet P. The object is taken to planet Q.


Which row is correct?

mass of object
on planet Q / kg

weight of object
on planet Q / N

40

200

40

400

80

200

80

400

The diagram shows a rectangular block of density 2 g / cm3.


3 cm
2 cm

2 cm

What is the mass of the block?


A

2g

UCLES 2010

6g

14 g

0625/11/M/J/10

24 g

[Turn over

6
8

Which statement about a moving object is correct?


A

When an object is accelerating, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.

When an object is moving at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it must equal zero.

When an object is moving at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.

When an object is moving, there must be a resultant force acting on it.

An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
The results are shown below.
load / N
length / cm

15.2

16.2

1.0

extension / cm

3
18.6

2.1

3.4

Which figure is missing from the table?


A

17.2

17.3

17.4

17.6

10 Energy is stored in a battery and in a box of matches.


Which type of energy is stored in each of them?
a battery

a box of matches

chemical

chemical

chemical

internal (thermal)

electrical

chemical

electrical

internal (thermal)

11 A man lifts 20 bricks, each of weight 6 N.


What other information is needed to calculate the useful work done in lifting the bricks?
A

the distance he lifts the bricks

the mass of the bricks

the time taken to lift the bricks

the volume of the bricks

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

7
12 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.
cement mixer

board
soft ground

Why does this prevent the mixer sinking?


A

The large area decreases the pressure on the ground.

The large area increases the pressure on the ground.

The large area decreases the weight on the ground.

The large area increases the weight on the ground.

13 The pressure of a gas is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.


pressure to
be measured

mercury

The mercury in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is less dense.
How does the value of h change?
A

It becomes zero.

It decreases, but not to zero.

It stays the same.

It increases.

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

[Turn over

8
14 The diagram represents the molecules of a gas in a closed container of constant volume.

What happens to the molecules when the gas is heated?


A

They expand.

They hit the walls less often.

They move further apart.

They move more quickly.

15 A liquid is left in an open dish. After several days there is less liquid in the dish.
Which statement explains this?
A

The least energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.

The least energetic molecules leave the surface and return.

The most energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.

The most energetic molecules leave the surface and return.

16 A thermometer has a scale which starts at 10 C and ends at 110 C.


10 0

100 110
C

What is the value of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point of the scale?
lower fixed point
/ C

upper fixed point


/ C

10

100

10

110

100

110

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

9
17 A student carries out an experiment to find the melting point of wax. The graph shows how the
temperature of the wax changes as it cools.
X
temperature
/ C
Y

melting point
of wax

0
0

time

Which statement is correct?


A

At X the temperature drops more slowly than at Z.

At Y all the wax is solid.

At Y thermal energy is being given out by the wax.

At Z the wax molecules are not moving.

18 Hot liquid in a vacuum flask cools extremely slowly. This is because some methods of heat
transfer cannot take place in a vacuum.
Which methods cannot take place in a vacuum?
A

conduction and convection only

conduction and radiation only

convection and radiation only

conduction, convection and radiation

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

[Turn over

10
19 A teacher demonstrates convection currents using a box with two chimneys and a lighted candle.
She holds a smoking taper at point P.
In which direction does the convection current cause the smoke to move?
B
A

chimney

chimney

20 Which waves are longitudinal?


A

sound waves
from a trumpet

water waves
on a pond

88:88

light waves
from a lamp

microwaves
in an oven

21 A navigation buoy floating on the sea oscillates up and down as a wave passes.
navigation
buoy

In exactly two minutes, six complete wavelengths pass the buoy.


What is the frequency of the waves?
A

0.050 Hz

UCLES 2010

0.33 Hz

3.0 Hz

0625/11/M/J/10

20 Hz

11
22 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the edge of a piece of glass. The angle i is bigger
than the critical angle.
Which arrow correctly shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the edge of the glass?

normal
ray of
light

D
i

glass
air

C
A
B

23 Which diagram correctly shows rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?
A

B
camera

object

camera

image

object

image

lens

lens

D
camera

object

camera

image

object

image
lens

lens

24 What is the approximate value of the highest frequency that can be heard by a young person?
A

20 Hz

UCLES 2010

200 Hz

2000 Hz

0625/11/M/J/10

20 000 Hz

[Turn over

12
25 A police car siren emits two different sounds P and Q. These are produced alternately. The
diagram represents the sounds emitted.
P

displacement
Q

time

Which sound is the louder and which has the lower pitch?
louder

lower pitch

26 A magnet attracts two pieces of iron.


iron
N

What is the arrangement of the induced poles in the pieces of iron?


A

S S

S N

N S

N N

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

13
27 A piece of iron and a piece of steel are picked up by an electromagnet as shown.
electromagnet

steel

iron

The current to the electromagnet is switched off.


What happens?
A

Both the iron and the steel remain magnetised.

Neither the iron nor the steel remain magnetised.

Only the iron remains magnetised.

Only the steel remains magnetised.

28 The table shows the lengths and diameters of four copper wires.
Which wire has the least resistance?
length / m

diameter / mm

0.50

1.0

0.50

2.5

0.75

1.0

0.75

2.5

29 A circuit is set up to measure the resistance of a resistor R. The meter readings are 2.0 A and
3.0 V.

A
V
R

What is the resistance of the resistor R?


A

0.67

UCLES 2010

1.5

5.0

0625/11/M/J/10

6.0

[Turn over

14
30 The circuit shown is a potential divider.

X
output

What is component X?
A

a light-dependent resistor

a relay

a thermistor

a variable resistor

31 A lamp is connected in four circuits in turn, each using identical batteries.


The resistors are all identical.
In which circuit will the lamp be brightest?

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

15
32 Which diagram shows the correct positions for both the switch and the fuse?

switch

live wire
A

lamp
neutral wire
fuse

live wire

switch

fuse

lamp
neutral wire

live wire

fuse

lamp
neutral wire
switch

live wire
D

lamp
neutral wire
fuse

switch

33 After some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.
What is the greatest hazard?
A

a fire

a fuse will blow

an electric shock

no current will flow

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

[Turn over

16
34 A coil is connected to a battery and a soft iron bar is hung near to it.

soft iron

coil

The current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections.


How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?
with the battery as shown

with the battery reversed

attracted to the coil

attracted to the coil

attracted to the coil

repelled from the coil

repelled from the coil

attracted to the coil

repelled from the coil

repelled from the coil

35 A transformer has 15 000 turns on its primary coil and 750 turns on its secondary coil.
Connected in this way, for what purpose could this transformer be used?
A

to convert the 8000 V a.c. output of a power station to 160 000 V for long-distance power
transmission

to convert the 160 000 V d.c. supply from a power line to 8000 V for local power transmission

to use a 12 V d.c. supply to operate a 240 V razor

to use a 240 V a.c. mains supply to operate a 12 V motor

36 What are cathode rays?


A

a beam of electrons

a beam of neutrons

a beam of protons

electromagnetic waves

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

17
37 A cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.
Which row shows the charge on the anode and the temperature of the cathode?
anode charge

cathode
temperature

negative

cool

negative

hot

positive

cool

positive

hot

38 Which row describes the properties of -particles?


ionizing
effect

radiation stopped
by aluminium?

large

no

large

yes

small

no

small

yes

39 A radioactive substance has a half-life of 2 weeks. At the beginning of an investigation the


substance emits 3000 -particles per minute.
How many -particles will it emit per minute after 6 weeks?
A

375

500

1500

40 The nuclide notation for radium-226 is 226


88 Ra .
How many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?
A

UCLES 2010

88

138

0625/11/M/J/10

226

18
BLANK PAGE

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

19
BLANK PAGE

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2010

0625/11/M/J/10

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

October/November 2010
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*0588341704*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB10 11_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2010

[Turn over

2
1

The diagrams show an experiment to determine the volume of a stone.


without stone

with stone

10 cm3
9

10 cm3
9

7
6
5

7
6
5

3
2
1

3
2
1

stone

What is the volume of the stone?


A
2

3 cm3

4 cm3

7 cm3

11 cm3

Four athletes run twice around a track. The table shows their times at the end of each lap.
Which athlete runs the second lap the fastest?
athlete

time at end of first lap / s

time at end of second lap / s

22.99

47.04

23.04

47.00

23.16

47.18

23.39

47.24

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

3
3

The diagram shows the speed / time graph for an object moving at constant speed.
2
speed
m/s
1

0
0

3
time / s

What is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3 s?


A
4

1.5 m

2.0 m

3.0 m

6.0 m

A car travels along the route PQRST in 30 minutes.


S

5 km
10 km

5 km
10 km
R

What is the average speed of the car?


A
5

10 km / hour

20 km / hour

30 km / hour

60 km / hour

Which list contains the name of a force?


A

acceleration, charge, temperature

density, resistance, speed

distance, frequency, mass

energy, power, weight

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

4
6

The reading on a spring balance with a holder and eight identical discs is 3.0 N.
Six discs are removed and the reading becomes 1.2 N.

spring
balance

N0
1

N0
1

holder
for discs

two
discs

eight
discs

What is the weight of one disc?


A
7

0.2 N

0.3 N

0.5 N

0.6 N

A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly shaped concrete block.
Which apparatus is needed to find the density of both the water and the concrete block?

balance, clock, measuring cylinder

balance, clock, ruler

balance, measuring cylinder, ruler

clock, measuring cylinder, ruler

A force acts on a moving rubber ball.


Which of these changes could not happen to the ball because of the force?
A

a change in direction

a change in mass

a change in shape

a change in speed

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

5
9

The extension / load graph for a spring is shown. The unloaded length of the spring is 15.0 cm.
3
extension / cm

0
0

5
load / N

When an object of unknown weight is hung on the spring, the length of the spring is 16.4 cm.
What is the weight of the object?
A

0.55 N

0.67 N

3.5 N

4.1 N

10 Which of these is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?


A

a capacitor

a generator

a motor

a transformer

11 A car is driven on a long journey along a flat, horizontal road. The car stops several times on the
journey and its engine becomes hot.
Which type of energy does not change during the journey?
A

the chemical energy in the fuel tank

the gravitational energy of the car

the internal (thermal) energy of the engine

the kinetic energy of the car

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

6
12 What is a simple mercury barometer designed to measure?
A

the pressure beneath a liquid

the pressure of a gas supply

the pressure of car tyres

the pressure of the atmosphere

13 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3.
The liquids are poured into tubes as shown.
Which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?

liquid X

liquid Y

liquid X

14 Some gas in a sealed plastic bag is cooled.


How do the gas molecules behave when this happens?
A

They move more quickly and become closer together.

They move more quickly and become further apart.

They move more slowly and become closer together.

They move more slowly and become further apart.

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

liquid Y

7
15 A block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. The
water evaporates from the newspaper.
Which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water
molecules that remain in the newspaper?
escaping molecules

average speed of the


remaining water molecules

the more energetic ones

decreases

the more energetic ones

increases

the less energetic ones

decreases

the less energetic ones

increases

16 Which change is condensation?


A
solid

B
liquid

UCLES 2010

gas
D

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

8
17 A beaker containing ice and a thermometer is left in a warm room for 15 minutes.
No water is visible in the beaker until 5 minutes has passed. After 15 minutes some ice is still
visible.

ice

ice

water
start of
experiment

after
5 minutes

after
15 minutes

Which graph shows how the thermometer reading changes?

temperature
/ C

temperature
/ C

10
15
time / min

temperature
/ C

temperature
/ C

UCLES 2010

10
15
time / min

10
15
time / min

0625/11/O/N/10

10
15
time / min

9
18 A piece of wood has some iron nails pushed through it. One side of the wood is covered with heat
sensitive paper which turns from pink to blue when heated. The wood is heated as shown for a
few minutes and blue dots appear on the heat sensitive paper where it touches the nails.
wood

heat sensitive paper

iron
nails

heat

blue
dots

This experiment shows that, compared to wood, iron is a good


A

absorber of heat.

conductor of heat.

convector of heat.

emitter of heat.

19 An electric heater is placed inside a metal box which has one side open. The diagram shows four
possible positions for the box.
The heater is switched on for several minutes.
In which position does the box become the hottest?
A

UCLES 2010

heater

heater

box

box

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

10
20 Which group contains only transverse waves?
A

infra-red waves, light waves, sound waves

infra-red waves, light waves, ultra-violet waves

infra-red waves, ultra-violet waves, sound waves

light waves, sound waves, ultra-violet waves

21 Water waves in a tank pass over a thin plastic block as shown.


plastic block

tank

What happens to the waves as they reach the plastic block?


A

They are diffracted because they slow down.

They are diffracted because they speed up.

They are refracted because they slow down.

They are refracted because they speed up.

22 A girl writes the word LEFT on a piece of card.

LEFT
She looks at the image of this card, made by reflection by a plane mirror.
What does she see?
A

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

11
23 A scientist is trying to direct a ray of light through a glass block without any light leaving the top of
the block. However, some light does leave the top.
light leaving top
top of block

glass block

ray of
light

The scientist changes angle X and stops the ray of light leaving the top.
Which row in the table describes the change to angle X and the name of the effect produced?
change to angle X

name of effect produced

decrease

total internal reflection

decrease

total internal refraction

increase

total internal reflection

increase

total internal refraction

24 The diagrams represent two different sound waves.


wave P

wave Q

displacement

displacement

time

time

How do the frequency and pitch of P compare with the frequency and pitch of Q?
frequency of P

pitch of P

greater than Q

higher than Q

greater than Q

same as Q

same as Q

higher than Q

same as Q

same as Q

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

12
25 A ship sends a pulse of sound vertically downwards to the sea bed. An echo is heard
0.4 seconds later.
If the speed of sound in the water is 1200 m / s, how deep is the water below the ship?
A

240 m

480 m

1500 m

3000 m

26 Which statement about a magnet is not correct?


A

It can attract another magnet.

It can attract an unmagnetised piece of iron.

It can repel another magnet.

It can repel an unmagnetised piece of iron.

27 A chain of steel nails and a chain of iron nails hang from a strong magnet. The chains are then
carefully removed from the magnet.
magnet
steel

iron

What happens to the chains?


A

Both chains fall apart.

Both chains stay together.

Only the chain of iron nails falls apart.

Only the chain of steel nails falls apart.

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

13
28 A potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor causes a current in it.
resistor
current

p.d.

The p.d. and the resistance of the resistor can both be changed.
Which row shows two changes that will both increase the current in the resistor?
change

change

decrease p.d.

decrease resistance

decrease p.d.

increase resistance

increase p.d.

decrease resistance

increase p.d.

increase resistance

29 The diagram shows a circuit containing two ammeters and three resistors.

ammeter
X

R1

R2

ammeter
Y

R3

Which of the ammeters will show the current in resistor R2?


A

ammeter X only

ammeter Y only

both ammeter X and ammeter Y

neither ammeter X nor ammeter Y

30 Which component can store energy and can be used in time-delay circuits?
A

a capacitor

a potentiometer

a resistor

a thermistor

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

14
31 A circuit contains two resistors connected in parallel with a battery.

R
P

Which of the following statements about the currents at P, Q and R is true?


A

The current at P is the greatest.

The current at Q is the greatest.

The current at R is the greatest.

The current is the same at points P, Q and R.

32 The potential divider shown is connected across a constant 12 V supply.

20

V1

12 V

V2

When R has a value of 20 , the voltmeter readings are equal.


How do these readings change when the value of R is reduced to 10 ?
reading on V1

reading on V2

decreases

decreases

decreases

increases

increases

decreases

increases

increases

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

15
33 A fuse is a safety device for use in an electrical appliance.
How does a fuse affect a circuit when the current in it becomes higher than the correct value for
the appliance?
A

It completely stops the current.

It reduces the current to the correct value for the appliance.

It sends the current to the outer case of the appliance.

It sends the excess current to the earth wire.

34 Some electrical equipment is connected to a 230 V supply. It is kept inside a metal case which is
not earthed. The case is fixed to a plastic support. A strand of wire has become loose and
touches the metal case as shown.
cable
metal case on plastic support
strand of wire

electrical
equipment

Which statement about this situation is correct?


A

An electric current is passing through the metal case.

A fuse in the live wire will blow.

Someone touching the case would receive an electric shock.

The metal case is at 0 V.

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

16
35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope.

oscilloscope

contact

contact

Which graph shows the output voltage V against time t ?


A

V
t

V
t

36 A village has to be supplied with electricity from a power station that is a long way from the
village.
Which type of current should be used, and at which voltage?
type of current

voltage

alternating current

high voltage

alternating current

low voltage

direct current

high voltage

direct current

low voltage

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

17
37 An electric field is set up between two parallel plates.
Cathode rays are directed into this field, parallel to the plates.
+
cathode
rays

In which direction are the cathode rays deflected by the electric field?
A

downwards

upwards

into the page

out of the page

38 A radioactive element has a half-life of 70 s.


The number of emissions per second, N, of a sample of the element is measured at a certain
time.
What was the number of emissions per second 70 s earlier?
A

N/2

2N

39 S is a radioactive source emitting -particles, -particles and -rays. A detector is placed 5 cm


away from S. A thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.
thin sheet of paper
S

detector

5 cm

Which radiations can be detected?


A

-particles and -particles only

-particles and -rays only

-particles and -rays only

-particles, -particles and -rays

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

[Turn over

18
40 In the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.
central
mass

orbiting
particles

What is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?
central mass

orbiting particles

neutron

-particles

neutron

electrons

nucleus

-particles

nucleus

electrons

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

19
BLANK PAGE

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2010

0625/11/O/N/10

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2011
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*3129497903*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


IB11 06_0625_11/4RP
UCLES 2011

[Turn over

2
1

The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure
the length of a small feather.

mm
cm

10

20

30

What is the length of the feather?


A
2

19 mm

29 mm

19 cm

29 cm

An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.
Which graph shows this motion?

speed

speed

0
0

0
0

time

speed

0
0

UCLES 2011

time

speed

0
time

0625/11/M/J/11

time

3
3

A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40 s later hears the echo from a wall.

The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.


How far away is the player from the wall?
A
4

66 m

132 m

264 m

825 m

Which statement about mass and weight is correct?


A

Mass and weight are both forces.

Neither mass nor weight is a force.

Only mass is a force.

Only weight is a force.

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

[Turn over

4
5

The diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. The weight of the basket
can be ignored.
At equilibrium, the pivot is nearer to the weight W than to the baby.
centre of mass
of beam

pivot
W

baby

basket

What is the weight of the baby?

less than W

more than W

impossible to tell

A cube of side 2.0 cm is placed on a balance.

2.0 cm

balance

7.2 g

What is the density of the cube?


A

0.90 g / cm3

UCLES 2011

1.2 g / cm3

1.8 g / cm3

0625/11/M/J/11

3.6 g / cm3

5
7

Objects with different masses are hung on a spring. The diagram shows how much the spring
stretches.

10 cm
20 cm
30 cm

100 g

The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.
What is the mass of object M?
A
8

110 g

150 g

300 g

Which row gives an example of the stated form of energy?


form of energy

200 g

example

gravitational

internal

the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode-ray tube

kinetic

the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a


high diving board

strain

the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat

the energy due to the movement of a train along a level track

Which energy resource is used to generate electricity by first boiling water?


A

hydroelectric

nuclear fission

tides

waves

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

[Turn over

6
10 Two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. All the bales of hay have the
same mass.

bale of hay

As sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the motor so that more bales are lifted up in a
given time.
How does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor?
work done in
lifting each bale

useful output power


of the motor

increases

decreases

increases

increases

no change

decreases

no change

increases

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

7
11 A brick with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.

brick
table

The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.

How has this affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?
force

pressure

increased

increased

increased

unchanged

unchanged

increased

unchanged

unchanged

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

[Turn over

8
12 The diagram shows two mercury barometers.
Barometer 1 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 1.
Barometer 2 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 2.

mercury

point Y

point X
barometer 1, day 1

barometer 2, day 2

Which statement is true?


A

The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.

The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2.

The pressure at point X is less than the pressure at point Y.

The pressure at point X is the same as the pressure at point Y.

13 A sealed gas cylinder is left outside on a hot, sunny day.


What happens to the average speed of the molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the
cylinder as the temperature rises?
average speed of
the gas molecules

gas pressure

falls

falls

falls

rises

rises

falls

rises

rises

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

9
14 When a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape from it and its temperature changes.
From where do the molecules escape and what is the effect on the temperature of the liquid?
molecules escape from

temperature of liquid

all parts of the liquid

decreases

all parts of the liquid

increases

only the liquid surface

decreases

only the liquid surface

increases

15 The diagram shows a thermometer calibrated in degrees Celsius.


C

110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10

What are the values of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point on the Celsius scale?
lower fixed
point / C

upper fixed
point / C

10

110

20

100

20

100

16 An ice cube at a temperature of 0 C is put into a drink at a temperature of 10 C.


After a short time, some of the ice has melted and the drink has cooled to a temperature of 8 C.
What is the temperature of the remaining ice?
A

0 C

UCLES 2011

2 C

4 C

0625/11/M/J/11

8 C

[Turn over

10
17 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat.
Balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram 1.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram 2.
Which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?
diagram 1

diagram 2
A

heated end

heated end

before heating

after heating

18 Food is kept in a cool-box which uses two ice packs to keep it cool.
Where should the ice packs be placed to keep all the food as cool as possible?
A

both at the bottom of the box

both at the top of the box

one at the front and one at the back of the box

one on the left and one on the right of the box

19 Water waves can be used to show reflection, refraction and diffraction.


For each of these, which row shows whether or not the speed of the water waves changes?
reflection

refraction

diffraction

no

no

yes

no

yes

no

yes

no

no

yes

yes

yes

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

11
20 A vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at P.
In two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.

wave
crests

Which statement is correct?


A

Distance X is the amplitude of the waves.

Distance Y is the wavelength of the waves.

Each circle represents a wavefront.

The frequency of the waves is 3 Hz.

21 The diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism.

white light

red light
glass prism

violet light

Why does dispersion occur when white light enters the glass?
A

The frequency of red light decreases more than that of violet light.

The frequency of violet light decreases more than that of red light.

The speed of red light decreases more than that of violet light.

The speed of violet light decreases more than that of red light.

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

[Turn over

12
22 A thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.

screen
image
lens

candle

Various focused images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen
backwards and forwards.
Which statement is always correct?
A

The image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.

The image is bigger than the object.

The image is closer to the lens than the object is.

The image is inverted.

23 Sound travels by wave motion.


Which property of waves causes echoes?
A

diffraction

dispersion

reflection

refraction

24 A student listens to a machine that makes sounds of different frequencies. He can only hear one
of the sounds.
Which frequency of sound is the student able to hear?
A

2 Hz

UCLES 2011

10 Hz

2 kHz

0625/11/M/J/11

30 kHz

13
25 Which test could be used to find which end of a magnet is the north pole?
A

putting it near a compass needle

putting it near a ferrous metal

putting it near a non-ferrous metal

putting it near a steel spoon

26 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes
the bar to become magnetised.
experiment 1

magnet

experiment 2

magnet

iron bar

iron bar

Which magnetic poles are induced at X and at Y?


pole induced at X

pole induced at Y

27 An ammeter and an 18 resistor are connected in series with a battery. The reading on the
ammeter is 0.50 A. The resistance of the battery and the ammeter can be ignored.

A
18

What is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?


A

9.0 N

UCLES 2011

9.0 V

36 N

0625/11/M/J/11

36 V

[Turn over

14
28 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.
What charges must the rod and the balloon carry?
A

The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.

The rod and the balloon carry like charges.

The rod is charged but the balloon is not.

The balloon is charged but the rod is not.

29 Which circuit includes a capacitor and what does the capacitor do in this circuit?
circuit

what the
capacitor does

potential divider

stores current

potential divider

stores energy

time delay

stores current

time delay

stores energy

30 A student sets up the circuit shown. The switch is open (off).

Which lamps are on and which lamps are off?


lamp X

lamp Y

lamp Z

off

off

off

on

off

off

on

off

on

on

on

on

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

15
31 The diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. A voltmeter is connected across the
thermistor.

The graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.

resistance

temperature

As the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the
reading on the voltmeter?
resistance

voltmeter reading

decreases

decreases

decreases

increases

increases

decreases

increases

increases

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

[Turn over

16
32 In this circuit, a component at X automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a
fault.
X
electrical supply

Which components are suitable to use at X?


A

a circuit-breaker, a fuse or a switch

only a circuit-breaker or a fuse

only a circuit-breaker or a switch

only a fuse

33 Which graph shows how the output voltage varies with time for a simple a.c. generator?

voltage

voltage

0
time

time

voltage

voltage

0
time

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

time

17
34 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil. The coil is
connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.

spring
moving magnet
N
centre-zero ammeter

stationary coil

What does the ammeter show when the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down?
A

a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left

a steady reading to the left

a steady reading to the right

a steady reading of zero

35 The diagram shows a simple step-down transformer used to decrease a voltage.


Which part is the primary coil?

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

[Turn over

18
36 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.
power
supply

vacuum

screen
X

What are the correct labels for X and for Y?


X

negative anode

positive cathode

negative cathode

positive anode

positive anode

negative cathode

positive cathode

negative anode

37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage
d.c. power supply.
Which path does the beam follow?

D
cathode

rays
A

38 Which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of -particles and
-particles?
ionising effect

penetrating ability

greater than

greater than

greater than

less than

less than

greater than

less than

less than

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

19
39 A powder contains 400 mg of a radioactive material that emits -particles.
The half-life of the material is 5 days.
What mass of that material remains after 10 days?
A

0 mg

40 mg

100 mg

200 mg

40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.
Which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?

n
+

+
+ +
n

key
n = a neutron

+ = a proton

= an electron
(not to scale)

n
+n+
n n
+

n
+n+
n n
+

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2011

0625/11/M/J/11

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

October/November 2011
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*1240126518*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 20 printed pages.


IB11 11_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2011

[Turn over

2
1

A ruler is used to measure the length of an object.


object

10

cm

What is the length of the object?


A
2

3.0 cm

4.0 cm

5.0 cm

6.5 cm

The graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.

speed

time

Between which two times is the car stationary?


A
3

U and V

V and W

W and X

X and Y

90 m

A child is standing on the platform of a station.

A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3.0 s to pass the child.


What is the length of the train?
A

10 m

UCLES 2011

27 m

30 m

0625/11/O/N/11

3
4

The weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.

object

The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan.
These are the results.
weights in the right-hand pan

effect

0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N

balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side

0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N

balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side

What is the best estimate of the weight of the object?


A

0.27 N

UCLES 2011

0.29 N

0.31 N

0625/11/O/N/11

0.58 N

[Turn over

4
5

The diagrams show four blocks with the same mass.


Which block is made from the least dense material?

8 cm

3 cm

1 cm

3 cm
2 cm

2 cm

5 cm

2 cm

4 cm
3 cm

2 cm
2 cm

A student is told to measure the density of a liquid and also of a large cube of metal.
Which pieces of equipment are sufficient to be able to take the measurements needed?
A

balance, measuring cylinder and ruler

balance and thermometer

measuring cylinder and ruler

measuring cylinder, ruler and thermometer

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

5
7

A uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. The rod is not attached to the pivot. Forces are then
applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. The weight of the rod can be ignored.
Which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?

100 N

100 N

100 N

100 N
C

D
100 N

100 N
8

100 N

Which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right?
A

B
5N

10 N

5N

2N

100 N

100 N

4N

6N

3N

4N

10 N

5N

7N

3N

A student adds weights to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each weight.
He then plots a graph from the results, as shown.

0
0

weight / N

Which length has he plotted on the vertical axis?


A

measured length

original length

(measured length original length)

(measured length + original length)

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

[Turn over

6
10 A force F moves a load from the bottom of a slope to the top.

r
F

loa

The work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance.
What is this distance?
A

p+q

11 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.

gas
supply

10 cm

initial level
of water

10 cm

water

When it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side.
The difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20 cm.
What is the pressure of the gas supply?
A

the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water

the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water

the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure

the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

7
12 A chair is placed on protective cups to prevent damage to the carpet underneath it.
chair

carpet
protective cups

How do the cups change the area of contact with the carpet and the pressure on it?
area of contact

pressure

decreased

decreased

decreased

increased

increased

decreased

increased

increased

13 Evaporation occurs when molecules escape from a liquid surface into the air above it. During this
process the temperature of the liquid falls.
Why does the temperature of the liquid fall?
A

The molecules in the vapour expand because the pressure is less.

The molecules left in the liquid have more space to move around.

The molecules move more slowly when they escape into the air.

The molecules with the highest energies escape into the air.

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

[Turn over

8
14 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is then slowly decreased. The temperature of the gas does not change.
Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?

pressure

pressure

0
0

time

time

pressure

pressure

0
0

time

time

15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be
placed in
A

pure alcohol.

pure distilled water.

pure melting ice.

pure mercury.

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

9
16 The diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical
beaker of oil for several minutes.

oil

water

electric heater

The temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase constantly. The rise in
temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.
Why is this?
A

The oil has a higher boiling point than water.

The oil has a higher thermal capacity than water.

The oil has a lower boiling point than water.

The oil has a lower thermal capacity than water.

17 The diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.

cooling
unit

Why is the cooling unit placed at the top?


A

Cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.

Cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.

Cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.

Cold air remains at the top and so prevents convection.

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

[Turn over

10
18 Two identical copper cans are filled with boiling water.

thermometer

hot water
copper can
wool
uninsulated can

insulated can

One can is insulated with wool. The temperature of the water in each can is taken every minute
for several minutes. Graphs of the results are plotted.
Which graph shows the results obtained?

temperature

temperature

insulated

insulated
uninsulated

uninsulated

time

time

D
insulated

temperature

temperature
uninsulated
uninsulated
insulated

time

time

19 Which of these waves is longitudinal?


A

infra-red

radio

sound

water

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

11
20 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.

radio
waves
house

hill

The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A

diffracted.

radiated.

reflected.

refracted.

21 The diagram shows a ray of light travelling from X. Angle P is less than the critical angle.
In which direction does the ray continue?
X

P
glass

air
B
D

22 The diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.

What time is shown?


A

02:25

UCLES 2011

02:35

09:25

0625/11/O/N/11

09:35

[Turn over

12
23 A student wishes to measure the speed of sound in air. She plans to measure the time between
making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff.
cliff

student

She will use the equation: speed = distance .


time
Which type of sound should she make and which distance should she use in her calculation?
type of sound

distance to use

continuous sound

distance to cliff
2

continuous sound

distance to cliff 2

short, sharp sound

distance to cliff
2

short, sharp sound

distance to cliff 2

24 The diagrams show the wave shapes of two different sounds. The scales are the same in each
diagram.

time

sound 1

sound 2

How does sound 2 compare with sound 1?


A

Sound 2 is louder than sound 1.

Sound 2 is quieter than sound 1.

Sound 2 has a higher pitch than sound 1.

Sound 2 has a lower pitch than sound 1.

UCLES 2011

time

0625/11/O/N/11

13
25 A horseshoe magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar.

iron bar
Which row in the table shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron bar and the direction of the
forces between the bar and the magnet?
magnetic poles induced
in iron bar

force between iron bar


and magnet

attraction

repulsion

attraction

repulsion

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

[Turn over

14
26 Four nails, A, B, C and D, are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.
nail
N

bar magnet

paper clips

One of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can
support is recorded. The bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining
attached to the nail is recorded. Each nail is tested in turn.
Which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?

nail

number of paper clips attached to the nail


bar magnet present

bar magnet removed

27 Which symbols are used for the units of current and of resistance?
unit of current

unit of resistance

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

15
28 The diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.

Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?
A

adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit

adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit

decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit

moving the lamp to point P in the circuit

29 The diagram shows an electric circuit containing three meters, X, Y and Z, all connected
correctly.

What are meters X, Y and Z?


X

ammeter

ammeter

ammeter

ammeter

voltmeter

ammeter

voltmeter

ammeter

voltmeter

voltmeter

voltmeter

voltmeter

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

[Turn over

16
30 The diagrams show four arrangements of resistors.
Which arrangement has the smallest total resistance?
A

4
4

4
4

31 The diagram shows a potential divider circuit with two identical lamps L1 and L2.

X
K

L1

L2

The contact K is halfway between X and Y and the lamps are equally bright.
What will happen to the brightness of the lamps when contact K is moved a short distance
towards X?
lamp L1

lamp L2

brighter

brighter

brighter

dimmer

dimmer

brighter

dimmer

dimmer

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

17
32 A fuse and a relay each use an effect of an electric current.
Which effect of an electric current is used by a fuse and which effect is used by a relay?
effect used by
a fuse

effect used by
a relay

heating effect

heating effect

heating effect

magnetic effect

magnetic effect

heating effect

magnetic effect

magnetic effect

33 Which diagram represents the direction of the magnetic field around a straight wire carrying a
current out of the page?

B
current out
of page

D
current out
of page

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

[Turn over

18
34 The diagram shows an a.c. generator.
rotation
of coil
coil

output voltage

With the coil in the position shown, the output voltage is +10 V.
When does the output voltage become 10 V?
A

when the coil has turned 90

when the coil has turned 180

when the coil has turned 270

when the coil has turned 360

35 The diagram shows a simple transformer.

core

input

output

From which material should the core be made?


A

aluminium

copper

iron

steel

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

19
36 Cathode rays are emitted in a vacuum tube. They consist of particles that are found in atoms.
What is the name of the particles and how are the cathode rays produced?
name of particles

how the cathode rays


are produced

electrons

electromagnetic induction

electrons

thermionic emission

protons

electromagnetic induction

protons

thermionic emission

37 Two parallel metal plates in a vacuum are connected to the terminals of a high-voltage power
supply. A beam of cathode rays is passed into the space between the two plates, as shown.
In which direction does the beam of cathode rays deflect?
high-voltage
power supply
+
metal plate

B
A
C

cathode rays

metal plate

38 A scientist needs to use a source of -rays as safely as possible.


Which action will not reduce the amount of radiation that reaches the scientist?
A

keeping the distance between the source and the scientist as large as possible

keeping the temperature of the source as low as possible

keeping the time for which the scientist uses the source as small as possible

placing a lead screen between the scientist and the source

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

[Turn over

20
39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.

2000
activity
/ counts per
second
1500

1000

500

0
0

3
time / hour

What is the half-life of the source?


A

1
2

hour

1 hour

40 A nuclide of substance X has the symbol

1 1 hours
2

26
12 X

3 hours

How many electrons are there in a neutral atom of substance X?


A

12

14

26

38

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2011

0625/11/O/N/11

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice

May/June 2012
45 minutes

Additional Materials:

*9772978782*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


IB12 06_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2012

[Turn over

2
1

A cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram.


starting position

final position

can rolled
mark on
can
0 cm

10

15

20

25

30 cm

The can rolls over twice.


What is the circumference (distance all round) of the can?
A
2

13 cm

14 cm

26 cm

28 cm

A car is moving downhill along a road at a constant speed.


Which graph is the speed / time graph for the car?
A

speed

speed

0
0

0
0

time

time

speed

speed

0
0

0
0

time

time

In a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6 km track. This takes 2.4 hours.
What is the average speed of the car?
A

1.5 km / h

UCLES 2012

90 km / h

144 km / h

0625/11/M/J/12

216 km / h

3
4

Which quantity is measured in newtons?


A

density

energy

pressure

weight

A geologist places a small rock on the left-hand pan of a balance. The two pans are level as
shown when masses with a total weight of 23 N are placed on the right-hand pan.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N.

masses

rock
0

What is the mass of the small rock?


A
6

0.023 kg

2.3 kg

23 kg

230 kg

A stone has a volume of 0.50 cm3 and a mass of 2.0 g.


What is the density of the stone?
A

0.25 g / cm3

1.5 g / cm3

2.5 g / cm3

4.0 g / cm3

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

[Turn over

4
7

Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.
upper deck

lower deck

Why is this?

They would cause the bus to become less stable.

They would cause the bus to slow down.

They would increase the kinetic energy of the bus.

They would lower the centre of mass of the bus.

The diagram shows a handle with three forces, each 100 N, applied to it. The handle is free to
move.

100 N

100 N
100 N

handle
pivot
What is the effect of the forces on the handle?

The handle will move downwards.

The handle will not move.

The handle will turn anticlockwise (to the left).

The handle will turn clockwise (to the right).

In which pair of energy sources are both sources renewable?


A

oil and coal

oil and tidal

tidal and geothermal

tidal and nuclear fission

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

5
10 An object on a thread is swinging between X and Z, as shown in the diagram. It is momentarily at
rest at X and at Z.

thread

Z
Y

An incomplete word equation about the energy of the object is shown below.
gravitational potential energy = kinetic energy + energy + energy losses
at X
at Y
at Y
Which form of energy is needed to complete the word equation?
A

chemical

gravitational potential

internal

strain

11 Which statement is explained by reference to pressure?


A

Objects with greater mass have greater weight.

One kilogram of water occupies more volume than one kilogram of lead.

Spikes on running-shoes sink into the ground.

Water cooled to a low enough temperature turns to ice.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

[Turn over

6
12 The diagram shows a mercury manometer used to measure the pressure of gas in a container.
Atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury.

gas
mercury
20 cm
12 cm

What is the pressure of the gas?


A

56 cm of mercury

68 cm of mercury

84 cm of mercury

96 cm of mercury

13 Brownian motion is observed when looking at smoke particles in air using a microscope.
What causes the smoke particles to move at random?
A

Smoke particles are hit by air molecules.

Smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.

Smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.

Smoke particles hit the walls of the container.

14 The molecules of a substance become more closely packed and move more quickly.
What is happening to the substance?
A

A gas is being heated and compressed.

A gas is being heated and is expanding.

A liquid is boiling.

A liquid is evaporating at room temperature.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

7
15 Which pair contains only physical quantities that vary with temperature and so could be used in
making a thermometer?
A

activity of a radioactive source, volume of a gas

mass of a liquid, volume of a liquid

activity of a radioactive source, mass of a solid

volume of a gas, volume of a liquid

16 A heater supplies 80 J of energy to a block of metal. The temperature of the block rises by 20 C.
What happens to the block of metal when its temperature falls by 10 C?
A

Its internal energy decreases by 40 J.

Its internal energy decreases by 160 J.

Its internal energy increases by 40 J.

Its internal energy increases by 160 J.

17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole
of the washer.
steel
washer

steel rod

How can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?


A

Cool the washer and put it over the rod.

Cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.

Heat the rod and then place it in the hole.

Heat the washer and then place it over the rod.

18 Why does convection take place in a liquid when it is heated?


A

Liquids expand when they are heated.

Liquids start to bubble when they get close to boiling point.

Molecules in the liquid expand when they are heated.

Molecules near to the surface of the liquid escape into the air.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

[Turn over

8
19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid
is put on top, as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench

Which statement is correct?


A

Heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.

No heat passes through the sides of either cup.

The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.

The lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.

20 What is the unit of wavelength?


A

hertz

metre

metre per second

second

21 Which row correctly describes light waves and radio waves?


light waves

radio waves

longitudinal

longitudinal

longitudinal

transverse

transverse

longitudinal

transverse

transverse

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

9
22 The diagram shows water waves passing through a gap in a harbour wall. The waves curve
round the wall and reach a small boat in the harbour.
harbour wall
waves
harbour

gap
boat

What is the name of this curving effect, and how can the gap be changed so that the waves are
less likely to reach the boat?
name of effect

change to the gap

diffraction

make the gap slightly bigger

diffraction

make the gap slightly smaller

refraction

make the gap slightly bigger

refraction

make the gap slightly smaller

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

[Turn over

10
23 The image formed by a plane mirror is upright.

position
of image

object

eye

What are the other characteristics of the image?


laterally inverted
(left to right)

magnified
(larger than the object)

virtual

no

yes

yes

yes

no

no

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

no

24 A student draws three rays of light from point P through a converging lens.
Each point labelled F is a principal focus of the lens.

ray X

ray Z

Which of the rays are drawn correctly?


A

ray Y only

ray Z only

ray X and ray Y

ray X and ray Z

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

ray Y

11
25 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears
an echo.
Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?
A

The sound waves are absorbed.

The sound waves are diffracted.

The sound waves are reflected.

The sound waves are refracted.

26 The diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of sound. The scales are the same
for all the diagrams.
Which sound has the highest frequency?

time

time

time

time

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

[Turn over

12
27 Which statement describes a property of a magnet?
A

It attracts ferrous materials.

It could have only one pole (north or south).

It points in a random direction when suspended.

It repels non-ferrous materials.

28 Which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar?


A

cooling it in a freezer

earthing it with a copper wire

placing it in a solenoid carrying a large direct current (d.c.)

striking it repeatedly with a hammer

29 In which unit is potential difference measured?


A

ampere

ohm

volt

watt

30 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box.
The voltage-current graph for X is as shown.
variable voltage supply

voltage

A
X
0
0

What is the component X?


A

a capacitor

a closed switch

an open switch

a resistor of constant resistance

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

current

13
31 Which circuit contains a fuse?
A

32 A thermistor is used in a circuit to control a piece of equipment automatically.


What might this circuit be used for?
A

lighting an electric lamp as it becomes darker

ringing an alarm bell if a locked door is opened

switching on a water heater at a pre-determined time

turning on an air conditioner when the temperature rises

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

[Turn over

14
33 A student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.

R
V
T
12 V

What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A

It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.

It increases from 0 V to 12 V.

It remains at 0 V.

It remains at 12 V.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

15
34 A circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2 A.
The time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.

160
time taken
to break the
circuit / s

140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0

10

12

14

16

18

20

current / A
What happens when the current in the circuit is 2 A and what happens when the current 18 A?
when the current is 2 A

when the current is 18 A

the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds

the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds

the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds

the circuit does not break

the circuit does not break

the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds

the circuit does not break

the circuit does not break

35 The diagram shows a coil connected to a battery and a switch. Two unmagnetised iron bars hang
freely near opposite ends of the coil.

coil

iron bar

iron bar

What happens to the iron bars when the switch is closed?


A

Both X and Y move away from the coil.

Both X and Y move towards the coil.

X moves towards the coil, Y moves away from the coil.

Y moves towards the coil, X moves away from the coil.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

[Turn over

16
36 A wire passes between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. There is a current in the wire in the
direction shown, and this causes a force to act on the wire.
magnet

current

N
S

wire
force

Three other arrangements, P, Q and R, of the wire and magnet are set up as shown.
P

magnet turned around

current direction reversed

current direction reversed


and magnet turned around

Which arrangement or arrangements will cause a force in the same direction as the original
arrangement?
A

P, Q and R

P and Q only

P only

37 The diagram shows a device to produce cathode rays.


evacuated glass container

cathode

Which part of the device is heated and why?


part heated

reason

anode

to emit electrons

anode

to emit protons

cathode

to emit electrons

cathode

to emit protons

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

anode

R only

17
38 A radioactive nucleus emits a -particle.

-particle

nucleus

What happens to the proton number (atomic number) of the nucleus?


A

It stays the same.

It increases by 1.

It decreases by 2.

It decreases by 4.

39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z.
X
Y
Z
2 mm of
plastic

10 mm of
aluminium

50 mm
of lead

Which row in the table correctly identifies X, Y and Z?


X

-particles

-particles

-rays

-particles

-particles

-rays

-particles

-rays

-particles

-rays

-particles

-particles

40 Which diagram could represent the structure of a neutral atom?


A

key
neutron

++

++

++
+

+ proton
electron

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

18
BLANK PAGE

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

19
BLANK PAGE

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/M/J/12

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/11

PHYSICS

October/November 2012

Paper 1 Multiple Choice

45 minutes
Additional Materials:

*8913251826*

Multiple Choice Answer Sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


IB12 11_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2012

[Turn over

2
1

A pendulum is set in motion and timed. The time measured for 20 complete swings is 30 s.
What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?
A

0.67 s

0.75 s

1.5 s

3.0 s

Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
What will happen and why?

what will happen

why

both stones hit the floor at the same time

acceleration of free fall is constant

both stones hit the floor at the same time

they fall at constant speed

the heavier stone hits the floor first

acceleration increases with weight

the heavier stone hits the floor first

speed increases with weight

The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.


Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest?
C
speed
B

D
time

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

3
4

A large bag of feathers and a steel block balance each other on some scales.

bag of
feathers

steel block

What does this show about the masses and the weights of the bag of feathers and the steel
block?

It shows that the masses are equal and the weights are equal.

It shows that the masses are equal, but the weights might be different.

It shows that the masses might be different and the weights might be different.

It shows that the weights are equal, but the masses might be different.

A parachutist inside an aeroplane has a mass of 70 kg.

What is his mass after he has jumped from the aeroplane?


A

0 kg

between 0 kg and 70 kg

70 kg

greater than 70 kg

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

[Turn over

4
6

A liquid has a density of 0.80 g / cm3.


Which could be the volume and mass of this liquid?
volume / cm3

mass / g

2.0

16

8.0

10

10

8.0

16

2.0

The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
Which object is the most stable?
A

A see-saw is made by resting a long plank of wood with its centre of mass on a barrel.
A boy sits on one side of the barrel and a girl sits on the other side so that the see-saw is
balanced.
x

boy

girl

boys weight

girls weight

Which statement must be true?


A

boys weight = girls weight

distance x = distance y

total downward force = total moment about the barrel

resultant force and resultant moment are both zero

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

5
9

A power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.


In this process, nuclear energy is first changed into
A

chemical energy.

electrical energy.

gravitational energy.

thermal (heat) energy.

10 A person lifts boxes of equal weight on to a platform.

boxes
platform
Which quantity will not affect the work done by the person?
A

the height of the platform above the ground

the number of boxes lifted

the time taken to lift the boxes

the weight of the boxes

11 A skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10 000 J of gravitational potential
energy.
She skis down the slope. At the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000 J.

How much energy was converted into thermal energy and sound energy as the skier moved
down the slope?
A

2000 J

UCLES 2012

8000 J

10 000 J

0625/11/O/N/12

12 000 J

[Turn over

6
12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.
25 cm
mercury
75 cm

5 cm

Which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?


A

25 cm

75 cm

80 cm

100 cm

13 A heavy table has six legs. The area of cross-section of each leg is X.
The legs of the table make marks in a carpet. These marks become deeper with increased
pressure.
What would reduce the depth of the marks for a table of a fixed weight?
A

using three legs, each of an area smaller than X

using four legs, each of an area the same as X

using six legs, each of an area smaller than X

using eight legs, each of an area the same as X

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

7
14 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side.
Looking through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random, jerky
manner.
eye

microscope

light
pollen grains
in water
What are the moving specks of light?
A

pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains

pollen grains being hit by water molecules

water molecules being hit by other water molecules

water molecules being hit by pollen grains

15 A swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.
Why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?
A

The less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.

The more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly.

The water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm.

The water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.

16 Which physical property is used to measure temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer?


A

the length of the thermometer

the thickness of the glass bulb

the volume of the glass bulb

the volume of the liquid

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

[Turn over

8
17 The graph shows the temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.
In which part of the graph is the substance boiling?

D
temperature
C
B
A
time
18 A night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the
night. During the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.

Which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to
be stored by the block?
thermal capacity
of block

night-time
temperature increase

large

large

large

small

small

large

small

small

19 After a sheep has its wool cut off, it is harder for it to stay warm when the air temperature falls.
How does the wool help the sheep to stay warm?
A

Air can circulate between the wool fibres and heat up the skin by convection.

Air trapped by the wool fibres reduces heat losses from the skin by convection.

The wool fibres are curly so it takes longer for heat to be conducted away from the skin.

The wool fibres conduct heat to the skin from the air outside.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

9
20 A boy sits near a campfire. He pokes the fire with an iron bar. His hand becomes hot.

iron bar

In which ways does thermal energy (heat) from the fire reach his hand?
A

conduction and convection only

conduction and radiation only

convection and radiation only

conduction, convection and radiation

21 The diagram shows plane waves reflected by a plane surface.


Which line represents a wavefront?
C
A
D

22 A swimmer is sitting on a rock at the sea shore looking at passing waves. He notices that five
complete wavelengths pass him in 20 s.
What is the frequency of this wave?
A

0.25 Hz

UCLES 2012

4.0 Hz

15 Hz

0625/11/O/N/12

100 Hz

[Turn over

10
23 A thin converging lens forms an image.
object
image
F

What is the nature of this image and can it be formed on a screen?


nature of image

can be formed
on a screen?

not real

no

not real

yes

real

no

real

yes

24 A piece of paper has PAL written on it.


A student holds the paper in front of a plane mirror.

back of
mirror

PAL

What does the student see?


B

PAL

LAP

UCLES 2012

PAL

0625/11/O/N/12

PAL

11
25 A girl notices that when she shouts into a cave she hears an echo.
Which wave property causes the echo?
A

diffraction

dispersion

reflection

refraction

26 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high.
What information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave
produced?
amplitude

frequency

too large

too large

too large

too small

too small

too large

too small

too small

27 Two bars of soft iron are placed near a bar magnet.


bar magnet

soft iron

soft iron
P

Which row states and explains the behaviour of poles P and Q of the soft iron bars?
P and Q

reason

attract

P and Q are like poles

attract

P and Q are unlike poles

repel

P and Q are like poles

repel

P and Q are unlike poles

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

[Turn over

12
28 Some electrical devices require a magnet which may be switched on and off many times in a
second.
Which type of magnet may be used?
A

an electromagnet only

a permanent magnet only

either a permanent magnet or an electromagnet

neither a permanent magnet nor an electromagnet

29 Which of these is an electric current?


A

a beam of atoms

a beam of electrons

a beam of molecules

a beam of neutrons

30 The diagram shows a circuit used to find the resistance of lamp L.


Blocks P, Q and R represent the different components used.
12 V

R
L

Which is a correct possible choice of components to use for P, Q and R?


P

ammeter

variable resistor

voltmeter

variable resistor

voltmeter

ammeter

voltmeter

ammeter

variable resistor

voltmeter

variable resistor

ammeter

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

13
31 A student connects the circuit shown.

1
2

4
Which switches must be closed for the bell to ring without lighting the lamp?
A

1 and 2 only

1 and 3 only

1, 3 and 4 only

2, 3 and 4 only

32 Which row shows a use of a capacitor and a use of a relay?


use of a capacitor

use of a relay

switching circuit

voltage transformation

time-delay circuit

switching circuit

voltage transformation

switching circuit

voltage transformation

time-delay circuit

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

[Turn over

14
33 The diagram shows two voltmeters, P and Q, connected to a potential divider.

voltmeter P

voltmeter Q

The sliding connection at point X is moved towards the top of the diagram.
What happens to the reading on P and to the reading on Q?
reading on P

reading on Q

decreases

decreases

decreases

increases

increases

decreases

increases

increases

34 An electric oven is connected to the mains supply using insulated copper wires. The wires
become very warm.
What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?
A

Use thicker copper wires.

Use thinner copper wires.

Use thicker insulation.

Use thinner insulation.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

15
35 Which graph shows how the voltage of a simple a.c. generator varies with time?
A

voltage

voltage
0
0

0
0

time

voltage

voltage
0
0

UCLES 2012

time

0
0

time

0625/11/O/N/12

time

[Turn over

16
36 The diagram shows a wire in the magnetic field between two poles of a magnet.
magnet

wire

The current in the wire repeatedly changes between a constant value in one direction and a
constant value in the opposite direction. This is shown on the graph.
current

0
0

time

What is the effect on the wire?


A

The force on the wire alternates between one direction and the opposite direction.

The force on the wire is constant in size and direction.

There is no force acting on the wire at any time.

There is only a force on the wire when the current reverses.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

17
37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel, charged metal plates in a vacuum.

cathode rays

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+

In which direction is the beam deflected?


A

into the page

out of the page

to the left of the page

to the right of the page

38 How does the ionising effect of -particles compare with that of -particles and -rays?
compared with -particles

compared with -rays

-particles are less strongly ionising

-particles are less strongly ionising

-particles are less strongly ionising

-particles are more strongly ionising

-particles are more strongly ionising

-particles are less strongly ionising

-particles are more strongly ionising

-particles are more strongly ionising

39 The table shows the count rates obtained from four radioactive sources. The measurements were
taken at noon on four consecutive days.
Which source has the longest half-life?
count rate /.counts per second
day 1

day 2

100

48

27

11

200

142

99

69

300

297

292

290

400

202

99

48

UCLES 2012

day 3

day 4

0625/11/O/N/12

[Turn over

18
40 Which statement about a carbon nucleus represented by 146 C is correct?
A

It contains 6 neutrons.

It contains 6 electrons.

It contains 8 protons.

It contains 14 nucleons.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

19
BLANK PAGE

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2012

0625/11/O/N/12

CORE
PAPER TWO

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

0625/2

PHYSICS
PAPER 2
Monday

24 MAY 1999

Afternoon

1 hour

Candidates answer on the question paper.


Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.


MML LOC 864 4/98 QF91699
UCLES 1999

[Turn over

2
1

An insect lands on a 30 cm ruler and walks along the edge, as shown in Fig. 1.1.

topicvolume

cm

10

15

20

25

30

Fig. 1.1
A child measures the time the insect takes to walk from the 5 cm mark to the 25 cm mark. It
takes 50 s to do this.
What is the average speed, in cm/s, of the insect?

speed = ...................................... [3]

0625/2/S99

For
Examiner's
Use

3
2

(a) A uniform beam AB of weight W is balanced at its midpoint on a pivot. Two weights W1
and W2 are then hung at equal distances from the midpoint of the beam.

For
Examiner's
Use

topiccentreofmass
topiccentre
topicmass

B
pivot
W1

W2
Fig. 2.1
When this is done, the end B moves down.
(i) Which is the heavier weight?

..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which way would W1 have to be moved so that the beam is again balanced?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) W2 is removed from the beam. This means that the only forces acting downwards on
the beam are the weight W of the beam and W1.
W is much greater than W1.
A

W1

Fig. 2.2
On Fig. 2.2, mark a possible position for the pivot to be placed so that the beam is
again balanced.
[2]

0625/2/S99

[Turn over

4
3

(a) How does the separation of the molecules of substance X in the solid state compare
with the separation when substance X is in the gaseous state? Tick one box.

topicmolecularmodels
topicmolecular
topicmodels

molecules further apart in the solid state


molecules further apart in the gaseous state
molecules same distance apart in both cases

[1]

(b) State how the molecules of substance X move in the solid state and in the gaseous
state.
solid state .........................................................................................................................
gaseous state ............................................................................................................ [2]

Here are some statements about energy. Complete the statements using words from the
following list.

topicwork
topicworkandpower
topicpower

chemical, electrical, geothermal, heat, hydroelectric, light,


movement (kinetic), position (potential), strain, tidal, wave
(a) A coal fire converts .............................................. energy into
.............................................. energy and .............................................. energy.

[3]

(b) When a ball falls from rest, its .............................................. energy increases
and its .............................................. energy decreases.

[2]

(c) The source of energy, in which hot rocks under the Earths surface heat water
to produce steam, is referred to as .............................................. energy.

0625/2/S99

[1]

For
Examiner's
Use

5
5
topiccircuits

(a) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the graph you would expect to get if you plotted values of the
potential difference V across a metallic conductor at constant temperature and the
current I through it.
[2]

For
Examiner's
Use

V/V

I/A
Fig. 5.1

(b) How would you use the graph to find the resistance of the conductor?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/2/S99

[Turn over

6
6
topicrefraction

A narrow beam of white light passes through a glass prism and is split into a band of
colours, which is seen on a screen AB. This is illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
glass prism
A
narrow beam
of white light

B
Fig. 6.1
(a) What name do we give to the process by which the white light is split up into colours?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What name do we give to the band of colours seen on the screen?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) What colour is seen at the edge of the band of colours closer to A?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A thin sheet of clear red plastic is put in the path of the light before the light reaches
the prism. What is now seen on the screen?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/2/S99

For
Examiner's
Use

7
7

A student wraps a length of fine wire around a wood block and hangs the block between
the poles of a magnet, as shown in Fig. 7.1.

For
Examiner's
Use

topicforce
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
topicconductor
topicmagnetic
topicfield

fine wire

wood block

Fig. 7.1
(a) What is seen to happen when the student passes a current through the fine wire?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Why does this happen?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Name a device which makes use of this effect.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

State one safety reason why

topicradioactivity

(a) radioactive sources should not be touched with bare hands,


.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) radioactive sources emitting -rays should be stored in lead boxes with thick sides,
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) the radiation symbol should be displayed on the cupboard or drawer in which
radioactive materials are kept.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/2/S99

[Turn over

8
9

In a factory which makes paper, the sheets are packed in piles of 500. One pile (of
500 sheets) has a mass of 2.4 kg, and is 0.05 m thick. The sheets measure 0.3 m x 0.2 m.
The pile is illustrated in Fig. 9.1.

topicconverging
topicthinconverginglens
topicthin

500 sheets
of paper
0.3 m

0.2 m
0.05 m

Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the volume of the pile of 500 sheets,

volume = ............................................
(ii) the density of the paper.

density = ............................................
[6]
(b) An object of mass 1 kg has a weight of 10 N. Calculate the weight of one pile of paper.

weight = ....................................... [1]

0625/2/S99

For
Examiner's
Use

For
Examiner's
Use

(c) The pressure exerted by the pile of paper when it is on a table is given by
force
pressure = .
area
Calculate this pressure.

pressure = .................................... [4]


(d) Another pile of the same paper contains only 250 sheets.
(i) How does the mass of this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) How does the density of the paper in this pile compare with that of paper in the
first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) How does the weight of this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(iv) How does the pressure exerted by this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
[4]

0625/2/S99

[Turn over

10
10 You are given a steel spring hanging from a support, a load and a 30 cm rule.
topictransformer

spring

load

30 cm rule

Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, describe carefully the steps you would take in order to measure
the extension of the spring when the load is hanging on it. You may draw a diagram if
this helps you to answer the question.
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
[5]
(b) You also have a range of other loads which you can hang on to the spring. Equal
increases in load cause equal increases in length. Using the maximum load from this
range, the spring returns to its original length when this load is removed. On Fig. 10.2,
sketch the extension / load graph you would expect to obtain with the spring as the load
is increased. Label this line GRAPH 1.
[2]

extension

load
Fig. 10.2
0625/2/S99

For
Examiner's
Use

11
(c) The first spring is replaced with a second spring and the experiment is repeated. The
second spring does not stretch as much as the first spring when the same load is hung
on it.

For
Examiner's
Use

On Fig.10.2, sketch the graph you would expect to obtain.


Label this line GRAPH 2.

[1]

(d) A wooden trolley is placed on a horizontal bench.


F

Fig. 10.3
The first spring is attached to the trolley, as shown in Fig.10.3.
(i) A force F keeps the spring slightly extended and the trolley moves. Describe the
motion of the trolley.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The first spring is replaced by the second spring, and the same force F stretches
the spring. How does the motion of the trolley compare with your answer to (d)(i)?
Explain your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]

0625/2/S99

[Turn over

12
11 (a)

(i) Draw a clear diagram of a simple mercury barometer.

[4]

topicmercurybarometer
topicbarometer
topicmanometer
topicmercury

Now fully label your diagram.

[2]

(ii) State the physical quantity that can be determined by using a mercury barometer.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) On your diagram in (i), mark clearly, using the letter h, the length you would
measure to determine the physical quantity named in (ii).
[2]

0625/2/S99

For
Examiner's
Use

13
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a manometer being used to measure the pressure of the gas in a
container.
30 cm rule

glass tube

30

container

For
Examiner's
Use

25
20
15

gas
10
5

mercury

Fig. 11.1
(i) What is the difference in height of the two mercury levels?
............................. cm [1]
(ii) What does the difference in height of the mercury levels indicate?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State whether the gas pressure is greater than or less than the atmospheric
pressure and how you know this.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(iv) What would happen to the two mercury levels if the gas pressure increased
slightly?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) The mercury manometer is replaced by another manometer that contains a liquid
of lower density. How, if at all, does this affect the difference between the liquid
levels?
............................................................................................................................ [1]

0625/2/S99

[Turn over

14

For
Examiner's
Use

12 (a) Fig. 12.1 illustrates a cathode-ray tube.


topicmolecularmodel
topicmolecular
topicmodel
topictube
topicoscilloscope

cathode

anode

screen

A
filament

H
G

Fig. 12.1
(i) Between which two points would you connect a low potential difference in order to
heat the cathode?
Between ................................... and ..................................
(ii) Between which two points would you connect a high potential difference in order
to produce cathode rays?
Between ................................... and ..................................
(iii) Between which two points would you connect a potential difference in order to
deflect the cathode rays upwards?
Between ................................... and ..................................
[3]

0625/2/S99

15
(b) When the time base of a cathode-ray oscilloscope is turned on, there is a horizontal
trace across the screen, as shown in Fig. 12.2.

Fig. 12.2
(i) An alternating potential difference of constant frequency and constant amplitude
is connected to the Y-input of the oscilloscope.
On Fig. 12.2, sketch the trace which might be obtained.
(ii) The time base is switched off but the alternating potential difference is left
connected. Describe what would be seen on the screen.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) A microphone is connected to another cathode-ray oscilloscope, with the time base
switched to a suitable setting. First, a lady with a high-pitched voice sings into the
microphone. Then a man with a low-pitched voice sings into the microphone. Describe
how the traces seen on the screen would differ.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

0625/2/S99

For
Examiner's
Use

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

0625/2

PHYSICS
PAPER 2
Friday

12 NOVEMBER 1999

Morning

1 hour

Candidates answer on the question paper.


Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
300 mm ruler

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.


MML LOC 864 4/98 QK93705
UCLES 1999

[Turn over

2
1

For
Examiner's
Use

A small tank contains water of depth 2 cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1.

topicspeed

2 cm

8 cm

5 cm

Fig. 1.1
(a) Show that the volume of water in the tank is 80 cm3.

[3]

0625/2/W99

3
(b) The water is poured into the measuring cylinder shown in Fig. 1.2. On Fig. 1.2, mark
the level of the water surface in the measuring cylinder when this has been done.
[1]

For
Examiner's
Use

cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10

Fig. 1.2

0625/2/W99

[Turn over

4
2

When the cardboard shape in Fig. 2.1 is freely hung from A, line AX is vertical.

topicturningeffect
topiceffect
topicturning

X
Fig. 2.1
When it is freely hung from B, line BY is vertical.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark the position of the centre of mass of the shape, using a clear dot ().
[1]
(b) On Fig. 2.1, draw a line through C which would be vertical if the shape were to be
freely hung from C.
[1]

0625/2/W99

For
Examiner's
Use

5
3

For
Examiner's
Use

Magnet A is put on a smooth (frictionless) horizontal table, as shown in Fig. 3.1.

topicmagnet

S
magnet A
Fig. 3.1

(a) A second magnet is moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.2.

magnet A

S
magnet B

Fig. 3.2
What happens to magnet A?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Magnet C is now moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.3.

magnet A

N
magnet C

Fig. 3.3
What happens to magnet A?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/2/W99

[Turn over

6
(c) An iron bar is moved towards magnet A, as shown in in Fig. 3.4.

S
magnet A

iron bar
Fig. 3.4

What happens to magnet A?


.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A plastic rod is moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.5.

S
magnet A

plastic rod
Fig. 3.5

What happens to magnet A?


.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/2/W99

For
Examiner's
Use

7
4

A person walks from A to E, a journey which goes over the top of the hill BCD, as shown in
in Fig. 4.1.

For
Examiner's
Use

topicenergytransformations
topicenergy
topictransformations

Fig. 4.1
(a)

(i) During which part of the walk does the person do most work? Tick one box.
AB
BC
CD
DE
(ii) Explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b)

(i) The person now runs over the hill from A to E. How does the average power
developed by the person compare with that when the person walked? Tick one box.
greater than when walking
same as when walking
less than when walking
(ii) Explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]

0625/2/W99

[Turn over

8
5
topicresistance

Fig. 5.1 shows a battery, a switch and a bell connected so that the bell rings when the
switch is pushed.
battery

switch
bell

Fig. 5.1
(a) Draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement. Use standard circuit symbols.

[3]
(b) A second bell is now connected in parallel with the first bell.
(i) Copy your circuit diagram from (a) and add the second bell.

(ii) Why will the battery run out more quickly when the switch has been pushed?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

0625/2/W99

For
Examiner's
Use

9
6
topicdispersion

A ray of yellow light enters a rectangular glass block at A and leaves it at B, as shown in
Fig. 6.1.

For
Examiner's
Use

B
A
glass block
ray of
yellow light
Fig. 6.1
(a) At A on Fig. 6.1,
(i) draw the normal,
(ii) mark carefully and label clearly the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r.
[3]
(b) At B on Fig. 6.1, draw carefully the ray of light which emerges from the glass block. [2]

Fig. 7.1 shows an electric kettle.

topicconvection

element

Fig. 7.1
Explain why the heating element is placed near the bottom of the kettle.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]

0625/2/W99

[Turn over

10
8

Describe the structure of an atom in terms of its nucleus and electrons. Do not mention
protons or neutrons.

topicstructure
topicatomic
topicatomicstructure

.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
................................................................... [3]

9
topicdensity
topicpressure
topicvolume
topicrefraction
topiclens

(a) Light from an illuminated slit passes through two lenses A and B and forms a focused
image on a screen, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
screen
lens
A

slit

lens
B

source
of
light

Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, indicate clearly
(i) the focal length of lens A, using the symbol fA,
(ii) the focal length of lens B, using the symbol fB.

0625/2/W99

[4]

For
Examiner's
Use

11
(b) In Fig. 9.2, O is an object placed with its base on the axis of a lens, and PF is the focal
length of the lens.

For
Examiner's
Use

Fig. 9.2

(i) Use your rule to draw two rays from the top of the object, through the lens, which
meet at the top of the image.
[5]
(ii) Draw in the image, and label it I.

[1]

(iii) Put ticks in the boxes alongside the statements which correctly describe your
image.
real
upright
inverted
larger than object
smaller than object
same size as object
[3]

0625/2/W99

[Turn over

12

For
Examiner's
Use

10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the structure of a simple transformer.


topictension

Fig. 10.1
On Fig. 10.1, label the important components of the transformer.

[5]

(b) Explain why the coils of a transformer are made of copper, rather than some other
metal.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A transformer has 500 turns in its primary coil, and 1500 turns in its secondary coil.
Energy losses from the transformer are so small that they may be neglected.
V
N
(i) Use the equation s = s to calculate the potential difference across the
s
e
c
o
n
d
a
r
y
Vp Np
coil when an alternating potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil.

(ii) State the value of the potential difference across the secondary coil when a
steady (d.c.) potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil.
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(d) Another transformer has the same number of turns on its primary coil as it has on its
secondary coil. An alternating potential difference is supplied across the primary coil.
State the size of the output potential difference compared with the input potential
difference.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/2/W99

13
11 (a) In the table below, write two different physical properties which may be used to
measure temperature. An example has been given to help you.

For
Examiner's
Use

topicthermometer

The change in volume

OF

a liquid

OF
OF
[4]
(b) When creating a temperature scale, fixed points are needed.
Explain what is meant by a fixed point.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) In the table below, state the upper and lower fixed points used when calibrating a
liquid-in-glass thermometer with a centigrade temperature scale.
THE UPPER FIXED POINT IS
THE TEMPERATURE OF

ITS VALUE IS

THE LOWER FIXED POINT IS


THE TEMPERATURE OF

ITS VALUE IS

[5]

0625/2/W99

[Turn over

14
(d) Fig. 11.1 shows how the temperature changes with time for a substance as it is heated
steadily from a solid to a liquid and then to a gas.

temperature / C

time / min
Fig. 11.1

On Fig. 11.1,
(i) label the melting point and the boiling point of the substance,
(ii) indicate the time when the substance is completely liquid.
[3]

0625/2/W99

For
Examiner's
Use

15
12 A football is inflated by pumping air into it.
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
topicray

(a) Describe the behaviour of an air molecule in the middle of the football.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Using a diagram, describe the behaviour of the molecule near the inside surface of the
football.

..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Use your answer to explain how air molecules create the pressure on the inside of the
football.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) When the football is left in the Suns rays, it gets hot. Describe what happens to the air
molecules, and how this affects the pressure of the football.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]

0625/2/W99

For
Examiner's
Use

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

PHYSICS

0625/2

PAPER 2
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000

1 hour

Candidates answer on the question paper.


Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Ruler (30 cm)

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SB (SM/JG) QF05708/3
UCLES 2000

[Turn over

2
1

For
Examiners
Use

Read the sentences below and then answer the questions which follow.

topicvolume
topicweight
topicmass
topicdensity

When potatoes are bought in a market, the weight of a bag full of potatoes is affected by the
density of the potatoes. A lady fills her bag when she buys 5 kg of large potatoes. A man
buys 5 kg of small potatoes. He puts them in a bag of the same size as the ladys, but his bag
is not filled.
(a) Which word in these sentences describes a quantity which is a force?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) What does the 5 kg measure? Tick one box.
the density of the potatoes

the mass of the potatoes

the volume of the potatoes

the weight of the potatoes

[1]
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy

(c) Suggest one reason why the mans 5 kg of potatoes occupies less volume than the
ladys potatoes.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
2

A dish of hot food is put on a wooden table.

topicturningeffect
topiceffect
topicturning
topicenergy

Fig. 2.1
(a) State three processes by which the dish and its contents could lose heat to the
surroundings.
1.

...................................................................................................................................

2.

...................................................................................................................................

3.

...............................................................................................................................[3]

(b) (i)

Describe one way of reducing the heat loss to the surroundings.


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Which form of heat loss would this reduce?


...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00

3
3

For
Examiners
Use

You are given an iron bar, a reel of insulated wire, a battery and some wire cutters.

topicmagnet

iron bar

reel of
insulated
wire

battery

wire cutters

Fig. 3.1
(a) In the space below, describe how you would make an electromagnet. You may use a
labelled diagram if it helps you to answer the question.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) How would you check that your electromagnet actually works?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2 S00

[Turn over

4
4

At night, the light beam from a torch is shone into a swimming pool along the line TSA.
Instead of striking the bottom of the pool at A, the beam travels to B, as shown on Fig. 4.1.

topicenergytransformations
topicenergy
topictransformations
topicapparentdepth

torch

S
water

39
A

55
B

Fig. 4.1
(a) At S, the direction of the beam changes. State the name we use to describe this change.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
(ii)

On Fig. 4.1, draw the normal to the surface at S.


Clearly mark and label the angle of incidence.

[2]

(c) Fig. 4.2 shows the same pool and the same points A, B, S and T. The critical angle for
the water is 50.
T

S
water

39
A

55
B

Fig. 4.2
(i)

A beam of light is directed up from B to S. On Fig. 4.2, carefully draw the path of
the ray from B to S and then out into the air.

(ii)

1.

A beam of light is directed up from A to S. Describe what happens to the beam


at S.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................

2.

Explain why this happens.


...........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2 S00

For
Examiners
Use

5
5

A man is watching a thunderstorm which is directly over a village. Some distance behind the
village is a mountain.

For
Examiners
Use

topicsound
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topiclight
topicspeed

cloud

mountain

lightning

village

man

Fig. 5.1
(a) Thunder is created at the same time as the lightning flash but, after the man sees a
lightning flash, he has to wait a short time before he hears the thunder.
Why is there this delay?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) When he listens carefully, the man realises that, for each lightning flash, he can hear a
loud sound of thunder followed by a quieter one.
(i)

After studying Fig. 5.1, explain why he hears two sounds for each lightning flash.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Suggest why the second sound is quieter.


...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]

0625/2 S00

[Turn over

6
(c) The man measures the time between seeing a flash of lightning over the village, and
hearing the first sound of thunder. The time is 4 s.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.
How far away is the village?

ANSWER: ................................. m
6

[3]

Some smoke is mixed with the air in a glass box. The box is lit brightly from the side and its
contents studied from above through a microscope.

topicbrownian
topicbrownianmotion
topicmotion

glass box containing


air and smoke
mixed together
bright light
Fig. 6.1
(a) Bright specks are seen moving in continuous and jerky random movement.
(i)

What are the bright specks? Tick one box.


air molecules

smoke molecules

smoke particles

0625/2 S00

For
Examiners
Use

7
(ii)

For
Examiners
Use

What is the explanation for the jerky random movement? Tick one box.
The air molecules bombard each other.

The smoke particles bombard each other.

The air molecules bombard the smoke particles.

The air molecules bombard the glass.

The smoke particles bombard the glass.

[2]

(b) The contents of the glass box exert a pressure on the glass walls.
Tick any of the following sentences which might help explain this pressure.
The air molecules bombard each other.

The smoke particles bombard each other.

The air molecules bombard the smoke particles.

The air molecules bombard the glass.

The smoke particles bombard the glass.

0625/2 S00

[2]

[Turn over

8
7

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 7.1 shows one way of using water to generate electricity.

topicforce
topicconductor
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield

(a) Fill in the missing words in the boxes.

[4]

reservoir

dam

(iii) The water rotates the


pipe

(i) This water has

so that the generator


produces

energy because
of its height.

energy.

(ii) This moving water


has increased

energy.

generator
house

Fig. 7.1
(b) In other places, water is used in different ways to generate electricity.
State two of these ways.
1.

...................................................................................................................................

2.

...............................................................................................................................[2]

0625/2 S00

9
8

This question deals with the decay of a radioactive source.


The radioactive source has a count rate of 640 counts/minute at the start of an experiment.
This value has been plotted on Fig. 8.1.

For
Examiners
Use

topicradioactivity

x
600

count rate
counts / minute

500

400

300

200

100

0
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

time / minutes
Fig. 8.1
The source has a half-life of 20 minutes.
(a) (i)

What would you expect the count rate to be after 20 minutes?


............................................... counts/minute

(ii)
(b) (i)

Plot this value on the graph.

[2]

What would you expect the count rate to be after a further 20 minutes
(i.e. 40 minutes after the start of the experiment)?
............................................... counts/minute

(ii)

Plot this value on the graph.

[2]

(c) Plot two further points which might be expected if the decay curve were perfect.

[1]

(d) Draw a smooth curve through all five points on your graph.

[1]

0625/2 S00

[Turn over

10
(e) If this perfect decay continued, how long would it take from the beginning of the
experiment for the count rate to decrease to zero?
Tick one answer.
90 minutes

100 minutes

120 minutes

a very long time

an infinite time

(f)

[1]

In a real experiment, the values found for the count rates might not all lie exactly on a
smooth curve. One reason for this might be experimental error. State one other reason.
......................................................................................................................................[1]

9
topicpressure

(a) Heavy furniture sometimes marks the floor on which it stands.


Four tables of the same weight each have four legs. Fig. 9.1 shows part of a leg from
each table.
A

Fig. 9.1
(i)

Which leg is least likely to mark the floor underneath it? ...............

(ii)

Explain your answer.


...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

0625/2 S00

For
Examiners
Use

11

For
Examiners
Use

(b) A hot flat metal sheet is placed on a horizontal surface.

D
C

A
B

Fig. 9.2

As the hot metal sheet cools, what happens to the quantities in the list below?
Tick one answer for each.
increases

decreases

stays the same

length AB
width BC
thickness CD
area touching the
horizontal surface
mass of sheet
weight of sheet
density of metal
pressure on
horizontal surface

[6]

0625/2 S00

[Turn over

12
10 A laboratory technician wants to make a resistor of value 64 , using some resistance wire.
He takes 1.0 m of this wire. The wire is shown in Fig. 10.1 as AC. He connects up the circuit
shown.

topictension

V
uniform
resistance
wire
A

0.5 m

0.5 m

crocodile clip
Fig. 10.1
(a) He connects the crocodile clip at B, which is 0.5 m from A.
Here are the readings he gets.
voltmeter reading

12 V

ammeter reading

1.5 A

Calculate the resistance of wire AB.

ANSWER: resistance of AB = ...................

[3]

(b) The laboratory technician now connects the crocodile clip to C, to measure the
resistance of 1 m of the wire. The wire has constant thickness.
(i)

In the spaces below, write the readings he obtains. Ignore the effects of the
resistance of the ammeter, voltmeter and battery.
voltmeter reading

............... V

ammeter reading

............... A

0625/2 S00

For
Examiners
Use

13
(ii)

For
Examiners
Use

What is the resistance of wire AC?

ANSWER: resistance of AC = ................

[3]

(c) Use your answer to (b) to answer the following questions.


(i)

What is the resistance per metre of this wire?

ANSWER: resistance per metre = ........... /m


(ii)

What length of wire does the laboratory technician need for the 64 resistor?

ANSWER: length needed = .................. m

0625/2 S00

[3]

[Turn over

14
11 Here is a list of different types of waves.
topicmercury
topicbarometer
topicmercurybarometer

gamma ()
infra-red
radio
sound
ultra-violet
visible
X-rays
(a) Which one of these is the only one which is not part of the electromagnetic spectrum?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Which one of these makes us feel warm when the Sun shines?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Which one of these do doctors use to detect broken bones?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) (i)

Fig. 11.1
On the moon, two astronauts cannot hear each other, even when they shout,
unless they have their radios switched on.
1.

Why cannot they hear each other even when they shout?
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................

2.

Why can they hear each other using their radios?


...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................

(ii)

Which type of wave is used to carry messages from the astronauts to mission
control on Earth?
...............................................................................................................................[4]

0625/2 S00

For
Examiners
Use

15
12 The hammers A and B shown in Fig. 12.1 consist of steel hammer-heads of different weights
fitted to identical wooden handles.

topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topicray
topiccathode

A
hammer
-head

B
handle

nail

Fig. 12.1
(a) (i)

Which hammer-head causes the greater moment about the end of the handle
when the hammer is held horizontally, as shown in Fig. 12.1?
ANSWER: hammer ............

(ii)

Explain your answer.


...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

(b) (i)

Which hammer-head requires the greater work to lift it a distance of 30 cm from the
position shown?
ANSWER: hammer ............

(ii)

Explain your answer.


...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

(c) If you wanted to estimate the power developed when lifting hammer A through 30 cm,
what two other quantities would you need to measure?
1.

...................................................................................................................................

2.

...............................................................................................................................[2]

(d) One of the hammers hits the nail and comes to rest without bouncing.
(i)

What form of energy did the hammer lose when it came into contact with the nail?
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

State two forms of energy into which this lost energy is changed.
1.

...........................................................................................................................

2.

.......................................................................................................................[3]

0625/2 S00

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

0625/2

PHYSICS
PAPER 2
Friday

10 NOVEMBER 2000

Morning

1 hour

Candidates answer on the question paper.


Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Ruler (30 cm)

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 16 printed pages.


SB (KN/DJ) QK07574/3
UCLES 2000

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

2
1

Moving cars always experience friction. A driver goes on a short journey in a car.

topicweight
topicmass
topicdensity
topicvolume

Fig. 1.1 shows the car at four places during the journey. The arrows represent the size and
direction of the horizontal forces on the car.
driving
force

friction
force

The car is ............................... .


driving
force

driving
force

friction
force

The car is ............................... .

friction
force

The car is ............................... .

The car is ............................... .


Fig. 1.1

On the line underneath each picture, state whether the car is


at rest,
speeding up,
going at steady speed,
slowing down.

[4]

0625/2 W00

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

(a) Fig. 2.1 shows three types of water tap (faucet).

topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy

type A

type B

type C

PUSH KNOB
DOWN

Fig. 2.1
In the box underneath each tap, write YES if a person would need to cause a moment
on the handle in order to make the water flow, or NO if the person would not need to
cause a moment.
[3]
(b) A old person has taps of type A in the kitchen. The person has difficulty operating the
tap. What could be done to make it easier to operate the tap?
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2 W00

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

4
3

(a) Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a motorcycle.

topicmolecularmodels
topicmodels
topicmolecular

35
30
25
speed
m/s

20
15
10
5
0
0

10

15

20 25
time/s

30

35

40

Fig. 3.1
(i)

What is the maximum speed of the motorcycle? ..................... m/s

(ii)

Whilst accelerating, the motorcycle changes gear three times.


State one of the speeds at which the gear is changed. ............ m/s

(iii)

For how long is the motorcycle slowing down? ...................... s


[3]

0625/2 W00

5
(b) On another occasion, the motorcycle is made to increase its speed at a constant rate for
10 s. The speed/time graph for this is shown in Fig. 3.2.

For
Examiners
Use

20
15
speed
10
m/s
5
0
0

5
time/s

10

Fig. 3.2
How far does the motorcycle travel in these 10 s?

distance travelled = ................ m [3]

0625/2 W00

[Turn over

6
4

(a) Some students are asked to write down what they know about evaporation of a liquid.
Here are their statements, some of which are correct and some incorrect.

topicevaporation

Put a tick alongside those statements which are correct.


A

Evaporation occurs at any temperature.

Evaporation only occurs at the boiling point.

Evaporation occurs where the liquid touches the bottom of the container.

Evaporation occurs at the surface of the liquid.

It is the higher energy molecules which escape.

The molecules gain energy as they escape.

The liquid temperature always rises when evaporation occurs.

Rapid evaporation produces cooling.


[4]

(b) Sometimes after shaving, men splash a liquid, called an aftershave, over their faces.
This makes their faces feel fresher as the aftershave evaporates.
(i)

Which of the statements in part (a) explains why the aftershave, even though it is at
room temperature, cools the skin.
statement ................

(ii)

Suggest why the aftershave cools the skin better than water at room temperature.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

0625/2 W00

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

7
5

(a) Complete the following sentence.

topicsound
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topicspeed
topicthermal
topicthermalcapacity
topiclight

The temperature of a body rises when the .............................................. energy of its


molecules is increased.
[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 gives details about an empty beaker and the same beaker with different
substances in it.
empty
beaker

beaker
+ water

beaker
+ sand

mass

250 g

500 g

500 g

energy needed
to raise
temperature
by 1C

125 J

1175 J

325 J

Fig. 5.1
(i)

Which of the arrangements has the highest thermal capacity?


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

1.

What is the mass of the water? ..................... g

2.

What is the mass of the sand?

3.

How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of


the water by 1C?

4.

..................... J

How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of


the sand by 1C?

5.

..................... g

..................... J

Use your answers above to suggest why, on a sunny day, the temperature of
the sand on a beach rises faster than the temperature of the sea.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[6]

0625/2 W00

[Turn over

8
6

Fig. 6.1 shows a view from above of a vertical mirror. A small lamp is placed at the point
marked L.

topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian
topicmotion

mirror
P

Fig. 6.1
(a) One ray, LP, from the lamp has been drawn.
(i)

At P, draw and label the normal to the mirror.

(ii)

At P, draw and label the reflected ray.

(iii)

Mark, using an X for each, two angles which are equal.


[3]

(b) Carefully mark, using a clear dot, the position of the image of the lamp.

[1]

(c) If you were looking into the mirror from point L, you might see something like Fig. 6.2
looking back at you. (Apologies if you are better-looking than this!)

Fig. 6.2
(i)

Mark clearly with the letter R, the image of your right ear.

(ii)

Your nose is 30 cm from the mirror.


How far from your nose is its image? ........................................................................
[2]
0625/2 W00

For
Examiners
Use

9
7

(a) A ray of red light passes through a glass prism, as shown in Fig. 7.1.

For
Examiners
Use

topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
topicforce
topicconductor

red
light

red
light
Fig. 7.1

What name do we use for the change of direction of the ray as it enters the glass?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the same prism, with white light passing through it.
The path of red light is shown.

red
light

white
light
Fig. 7.2
(i)

On Fig. 7.2, draw a possible path for blue light.

(ii)

Something else is happening to the white light, in addition to what is shown in


Fig. 7.1.
What name do we use for this? ................................................................................
[5]

(c) Light from the Sun is now passed through the prism. The path of red light is shown in
Fig. 7.3.

red
light

Sun's
light
Fig. 7.3

We can detect infra-red rays using a thermocouple. On Fig. 7.3, mark with the letter T a
position where the thermocouple could detect the infra-red rays after they have passed
through the prism.
[1]
[Turn over
0625/2 W00

For
Examiners
Use

10
8

Here are the approximate densities of some metals.

topicradioactivity

platinum
gold
lead
brass
iron
aluminium

21 000 kg/m3
19 000 kg/m3
11 000 kg/m3
9 000 kg/m3
8 000 kg/m3
3 000 kg/m3

(21 g/cm3)
(19 g/cm3)
(11 g/cm3)
( 9 g/cm3)
( 8 g/cm3)
( 3 g/cm3)

A person sees a coin offered for sale in an antiques market.

Fig. 8.1
The market trader says that the coin is made of gold. After buying the coin, the person finds
that its volume is 1.4 cm3 and its mass is 12.6 g.
(a) Write down the equation which enables you to calculate density.

[1]
(b) Calculate the density of the metal from which the coin is made.

density = ....................... g/cm3 [2]


(c) Is the coin made of gold?

YES/NO

[1]

(d) If not, use the list above to suggest what it might be made from.
The coin might be made from ................................ .[1]
(e) If a country wanted to keep its coinage the same but of as low a mass as possible,
which of the metals in the list should it choose?
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2 W00

For
Examiners
Use

11
9

The circuit in Fig. 9.1 is connected up.

topicvolume
topiclens
topicpressure
topicdensity

20
6V

40

Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors in Fig. 9.1.

combined resistance = ..................... [2]


(b) (i)

State the relationship between resistance, p.d. and current by completing the
following equation.

resistance =

(ii)

Calculate the current, I, in Fig. 9.1. State the unit in your answer.

current = ..............................
[5]

0625/2 W00

[Turn over

12
(c) Use your answer to (b)(ii) to calculate the p.d. across the 40 resistor.
State the unit in your answer.

p.d. = ................................ [3]


(d) The circuit is now used as a potential divider, as shown in Fig. 9.2.

20
6V

40

V out

Fig. 9.2
Use your answer to (c) to state the value of Vout , the output voltage of the potential
divider.
Vout = ............................. V [1]

0625/2 W00

For
Examiners
Use

13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a view from above of a person standing at the edge of a pond, dipping
the end of a stick up and down in the water.
Some of the wavefronts that spread out are shown.

For
Examiners
Use

topicripples
topicwaves

small piece
of wood,
floating on
water

water

cm
90

edge
of
pond

Fig. 10.1
(i)

How many wavelengths are there between X and Y? ..........................................[1]

(ii)

The distance from X to Y is 90 cm. Calculate the wavelength of the waves.

wavelength = .......................... cm [2]


(iii)

The speed of the waves is affected by the depth of the water.


1.

Describe the shape of the wavefronts, as seen from above.


...........................................................................................................................

2.

What does the shape of the wavefronts tell you about the depth of the pond?
Give a reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[3]

0625/2 W00

[Turn over

14
(iv)

Fig. 10.2 shows a sideways view of the water surface just before the first wave
reaches the floating piece of wood.
small piece
of wood

stick

direction of
wave travel
Fig. 10.2
Describe how the piece of wood moves after the waves reach it.
You may draw on Fig. 10.2 if it helps you to answer the question.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An underwater loudspeaker, placed in the pond in part (a), sends out sound waves
through the water, as shown in Fig. 10.3.

underwater
loudspeaker
L

Fig. 10.3
(i)

What is the difference between the nature of these sound waves and the water
waves in (a)? Write the appropriate words in the gaps in the following sentences.
Water waves are ..................................... waves.
Sound waves are ..................................... waves.

(ii)

[2]

Fig. 10.4 shows a sideways view along the line KL.

underwater
loudspeaker
L

M
Fig. 10.4

The dot labelled M represents a water molecule on the line KL.


Describe how the molecule moves when the loudspeaker is working.
You may draw on Fig. 10.4 if it helps you to answer the question.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 W00

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

15
11 (a) (i)

Copper is an electrical conductor. What is meant by a conductor ?

topicmercury
topicmercurybarometer
topicbarometer

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)

Ebonite, glass and polythene are electrical insulators. What is meant by an


insulator ?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Polythene is easily given a negative charge by rubbing it with a dry woollen cloth.
(i)

nylon thread

Fig. 11.1 shows a charged


polythene rod being held
close to a suspended charged
polythene rod.

moves
away

Complete the phrase,


like charges ......................
negatively
charged polythene
Fig. 11.1

(ii)

nylon thread

Fig.11.2 shows rod X being


held near the suspended
charged polythene rod.

Tick any of the following which


might correctly describe rod X.

moves
towards

negatively
charged
polythene
rod X

positively charged glass


negatively charged ebonite
Fig. 11.2
uncharged copper
negatively charged polythene
[3]

0625/2 W00

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

16
210

12 (a) One nuclide is written as 84 Po.

topicradioactivity

(i)

Which figure is the proton number (atomic number)? ...............................................

(ii)

Which figure is the nucleon number (mass number)? ..............................................

(iii)

Which figure gives the number of protons in the nucleus? .......................................

(iv)

How can you find the number of neutrons in the nucleus?


...................................................................................................................................
[4]
4

(b) An -particle can be written as 2 .


210

Polonium 84 Po decays into lead (Pb) by emitting an -particle.


Complete the nuclear equation below, by writing the correct numbers in the boxes.
210
84 Po

Pb + 2

0625/2 W00

[2]

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

PHYSICS

0625/2

PAPER 2

MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001

1 hour

Candidates answer on the question paper.


No additional materials required.

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


SB (SC/CG) QF10309/4
UCLES 2001

[Turn over

2
1
topicspeed
topicdensity
topicweight

A machine operator is making metal cylinders. The factory inspector wants to check whether
the machine operator is working fast enough.
(a) He tells the operator to start working when the clock on the wall of the factory shows the
time in Fig. 1.1.
What time is this? Tick one box.
11 12 1
2

10
9

3.01

1.03

8
7

3.05
5.03

Fig. 1.1

[1]

(b) The operator is told to stop when the clock shows the time in Fig. 1.2.
What time is this? Tick one box.
11 12 1
2

10
9

3.07

7.03

8
7

3.35
4.35

Fig. 1.2

[1]

(c) How long did the test take?

length of test = ................... minutes [1]


(d) During this time, the operator makes 5 cylinders. What is the average time to make one
cylinder?

time to make one cylinder = ................... minutes [2]

0625/2/M/J/01

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

For
Examiners
Use

(a) What is meant by the term moment of a force?

topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy

..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The sawn-off branch of a tree is laid across a log.
A

Fig. 2.1
The branch balances when point A is in contact with the log.
(i)

How does the moment of the part of the branch to the left of A compare with the
moment of the part to the right of A?
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly, using the letter X, the centre of mass of the whole
branch.
[2]

A rubber balloon is filled with air.

topicmodels
topicmolecular
topicmolecularmodels

(a) Describe how the pressure in the balloon is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The temperature of the air in the balloon increases.
(i)

What happens to the air molecules?


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

What happens to the pressure in the balloon, and why?


what happens ...........................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
why ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/01

[Turn over

4
4

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 4.1 shows the view from above of a triangular object on one side of a vertical mirror.

topictransformations
topicenergytransformations
topicenergy

object

mirror
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the image formed by the mirror.

0625/2/M/J/01

[3]

5
5

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 5.1 represents a wave.

topicresistance

displacement

distance
from source

Fig. 5.1
(a) Making use of the letters on Fig. 5.1, state which distances you would measure to find
(i)

the wavelength of the wave: measure between and .

(ii)

the amplitude of the wave: measure between and .


[2]

(b) What is meant by the frequency of the wave?


..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) One complete wave takes 0.2 s to generate.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.

frequency of wave = ...................Hz [2]

0625/2/M/J/01

[Turn over

6
6

A charged ebonite rod has negative charges all over its surface. It is held above three small
pieces of aluminium foil, one positively charged, one negatively charged and one uncharged.
This is shown in Fig. 6.1.

topicmotion
topicbrownian
topicbrownianmotion

ebonite
rod

insulating
sheet

+
positive

negative no charge
Fig. 6.1

(a) Put a circle around any of the pieces of aluminium which are attracted by the ebonite
rod.
[2]
(b) Ebonite is an insulator. What is meant by the term insulator?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Write down the name of another insulating material.
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2/M/J/01

For
Examiners
Use

7
7

Three resistors are connected in series between X and Y. When a cell is connected across
XY, the current at X is 0.1 A, as shown in Fig. 7.1.

For
Examiners
Use

topicconvection

12

0.1A
V1
Fig. 7.1
(a) What is the value of the current at Y? ................... A

[1]

(b) Calculate V1, the p.d. across the 12 resistor.

p.d. across the 12 resistor = ...................V [2]


(c) What instrument would you use to measure the p.d. V1? ............................................[1]
(d) How does the e.m.f. of the cell compare with your answer to part (b)? Tick one box.

e.m.f. of cell is larger than V1


e.m.f. of cell is smaller than V1
e.m.f. of cell is the same as V1

[1]

(e) Calculate the combined resistance of the three resistors.

combined resistance = ................... [2]

0625/2/M/J/01

[Turn over

8
8

For
Examiners
Use

(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a simple transformer.

topicradioactivity

core

Vs

Vp

coil
N p turns

coil
N s turns
Fig. 8.1

Complete the following sentences about the transformer.


The transformer only works using current.
It steps the potential difference up or down according to the equation
Vp _____ .
__ =
Vs
The core of the transformer is made of . .

[3]

(b) In each of the following examples, state the potential difference Vs.
(i)
12 v~

100 turns

Vs

50 turns
Vs = ................... V

(ii)
6 v~

Vs

80 turns

80 turns
Vs = ................... V

(iii)

Vs

6v

80 turns

80 turns
Vs = ................... V
[4]
0625/2/M/J/01

9
9

For
Examiners
Use

The table below gives some data about an accelerating car.

topicpressure

time/s

10

speed
m/s

10

15

19

24

25

25

(a) On Fig. 9.1, plot the speed/time graph for the motion.
30
speed
m/s
20

10

0
0

10

time/s
Fig. 9.1

[4]

(b) How far did the car travel during the first 3 s?

distance travelled = ...................m [3]


(c) What was the top speed of the car? .....................................................................m/s [1]
(d) How far would the car travel in 3 s if travelling at its top speed?

distance travelled = ...................m [3]


0625/2/M/J/01

[Turn over

10
10 Two workers, A and B, are lifting boxes of food in a store-room. The boxes all weigh the
same and are lifted from the floor on to the same shelf.

topicwaves
topicripples
topicenergy

A is able to lift 10 boxes in 2 minutes.


B takes longer than 2 minutes to lift 10 boxes.
(a) How does the total work done by A compare with the total work done by B?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) How does the power of A compare with the power of B?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i)

Which form of energy in their bodies do the workers transform in order to do the
work lifting the boxes?
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

From what did they obtain this supply of energy?


...................................................................................................................................
[2]

(d) The boxes have more energy when they are on the shelf than when they were on the
floor.
Which form of energy has increased?...........................................................................[1]
(e) One of the boxes falls off the shelf and crashes to the ground.
Describe the energy changes as the box falls and hits the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]

0625/2/M/J/01

For
Examiners
Use

11
11 (a) A builder is building a brick wall. He has 500 bricks delivered, all neatly stacked together.

For
Examiners
Use

topicmercurybarometer
topicmercury
topicbarometer

Each brick measures 0.2 m x 0.1 m x 0.06 m and is a solid block, as shown in Fig. 11.1.

Fig. 11.1
(i)

Calculate the volume of one brick.

volume of one brick = ...................


(ii)

The brick has a density of 2400 kg/m3.


Show that the mass of one brick is 2.88 kg.

(iii)

What is the mass of the stack of bricks?

mass of stack = .................. kg


[6]
(b) Some other bricks have the same size and are made of the same material, but they
have a hollow in one face, as shown in Fig. 11.2.

Fig. 11.2
(i)

How does the mass of one of these bricks compare with the mass of one of the
bricks in (a)(ii)?
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over

12
(ii)

The hollow of one brick is filled level with wet cement, as shown in Fig. 11.3.
wet cement

Fig. 11.3
The brick now has a mass of 2.91 kg.
Compare this with the mass given in (a)(ii). What does it tell you about the density
of the wet cement?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
12 Fig. 12.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
topicray
topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode

IGCSE OSCILLOSCOPE CO.

brightness

focus

time-base

y-gain

ms/cm
x-shift

volts/cm
y-shift

y input

on
off

Fig. 12.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright line is seen across the centre of the
screen.
(i)

What causes the bright line?


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/01

For
Examiners
Use

13
(ii)

When the brightness control is turned up, the line gets brighter.
What happens inside the oscilloscope to cause this increase in brightness?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]

(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i)

Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope? ........................

(ii)

Fig. 12.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.

Fig. 12.2
1.

Which oscilloscope control would you adjust to vary the amplitude, h, of the trace
on the screen? ..................

2.

Which control would you adjust to vary the number of waves visible on the screen?
..................

3.

What would you see on the screen if you switched the time-base setting to zero?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

0625/2/M/J/01

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE

PHYSICS
PAPER 2
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001

0625/2
1 hour

Candidates answer on the question paper.


No additional materials are required.

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SB (NH/CG) S10760/3
UCLES 2001

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

2
1

A piece of string wraps around a cylinder 8 times.

topicmass
topicweight
topicdensity

string

cylinder

Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows the string laid along a 30 cm rule.
string

10

15

20

25 cm

30

Fig. 1.2
(a) How long is the string?

length of string = ......................... cm [1]


(b) Calculate the circumference (distance once round) the cylinder.

circumference of cylinder = ......................... cm [2]

0625/2 O/N01

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

A trainee designer makes a jug for holding drinks. The jug is shown in Fig. 2.1.

topiceffect
topicturningeffect
topicturning

Fig. 2.1
Unfortunately, it is very easy to knock the jug over, so the trainee designer has to change the
shape of the jug.
State two things he could do to improve the stability of the jug.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
2. .........................................................................................................................................[2]

0625/2 O/N01

[Turn over

4
3

(a) How can a metal bar be made to expand in all directions?

topicmodels
topicmolecularmodels
topicmolecular

......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) What happens to the spacing between the atoms in an iron bar when it expands?
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State one example where expansion of a solid can be useful.
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State one example where expansion of a solid causes problems which need to be
overcome.
.........................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2 O/N01

For
Examiners
Use

5
4
topicevaporation

(a) A ray of light passes through a rectangular glass block, as shown in Fig. 4.1. It emerges
at point X.

For
Examiners
Use

ray

Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, draw the ray which emerges from the block at X.

[2]

(b) The glass of which the block is made has a critical angle of 42.
Another ray passes into the block as shown in Fig. 4.2.
ray

50
Y
Fig. 4.2
(i)

On Fig. 4.2, show what happens to the ray at Y.

(ii)

Why does this happen?


...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

(c) A third ray enters the block perpendicularly, as shown in Fig. 4.3.
ray

Fig. 4.3
On Fig. 4.3, draw the ray as it passes through the block and out into the air again.

0625/2 O/N01

[2]
[Turn over

6
5
topicresistance

(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a students attempt at drawing a diagram to illustrate the formation of a
spectrum by using a glass prism.
screen
Suns
rays
red
orange
yellow
green
blue
indigo
violet

spectrum

Fig. 5.1
The student labelled the colours in the correct positions but made two mistakes in
showing the passage of the rays through the prism. What are these mistakes?
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. ...................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The prism in Fig. 5.1 can transmit infra-red radiation.
(i)

What instrument could the student use to detect the presence of the infra-red
radiation?
...................................................................................................................................

(ii) Use the letters I.R. to show where the infra-red radiation would strike the screen.
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Infra-red radiation is one example of an invisible part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Give the names of two other invisible parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. ...................................................................................................................................[2]

0625/2 O/N01

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

7
6

(a) Three metal rods look the same.

topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian

One is made of aluminium.


One is made of unmagnetised iron.
One is a permanent magnet.
Describe how a small bar magnet could show which rod is
(i)

made of aluminium,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii) made of unmagnetised iron,


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)

a permanent magnet.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]

(b) In an experiment, a steel ball-bearing is held up by an electromagnet, as shown in


Fig. 6.1.

electromagnet
steel ball-bearing
Fig. 6.1

The electromagnet then releases the ball-bearing, which falls to the floor.
(i)

From what metal is the core of the electromagnet made?


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

How is the electromagnet made to work?


...................................................................................................................................

(iii)

What is done to make the electromagnet release the ball-bearing?


...............................................................................................................................[3]

0625/2 O/N01

[Turn over

8
7

This question is about the dangers of electricity.

topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
topicforce
topicconductor

(a) A builder tries to save money by not fitting fuses or circuit-breakers to the electric
circuits in a house. Why might this be dangerous?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another builder only has switches like the one shown in Fig. 7.1.

Fig. 7.1
The builder decides it might be dangerous to fit one of these switches in a washroom,
where there would be water and steam.
Why might it be dangerous?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A cleaning operator is trained to check the cable of a vacuum cleaner for damage
before it is used.
Why might it be dangerous to use equipment with a damaged cable?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2 O/N01

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

9
8

(a) Describe what happens to an atom when it undergoes radioactive decay.

topicradioactivity

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A scientist measures the count rate from a radioactive substance over a period of 20
minutes. The table shows the results of his measurements.

(i)

time/minutes

10

15

20

count rate
counts/s

800

400

205

105

50

From the table, estimate the half-life of the substance.


half-life = ......................... minutes

(ii)

How many half-lives elapsed during the 20 minute experiment?


number of half-lives = ......................... minutes

(iii)

If the scientist had taken readings for 25 minutes, what might the count rate have
been at the end of his experiment?
count rate after 25 minutes = ......................... counts/s
[3]

(c) In the following table, write in the correct numbers of electrons, protons and neutrons
contained in an -particle and in a -particle.
electrons

protons

neutrons

-particle
-particle
[4]

0625/2 O/N01

[Turn over

10
9
topicpressure

A student draws the circuit shown in Fig. 9.1. The circuit is intended to be used to measure
the resistance of R, a length of nichrome resistance wire.
Z

R
Y

Fig. 9.1
(a) The student cannot remember which meters he should use at X and at Y.
(i)

Which meter should he show at X? ..........................................................................

(ii)

Which letter should he put in the circle at X? ............................................................

(iii)

Which meter should he show at Y? ..........................................................................

(iv)

Which letter should he put in the circle at Y? ............................................................


[4]

(b) (i)

What is the component labelled Z? ...........................................................................

(ii)

What is the purpose of Z in the circuit? .....................................................................


[3]

(c) The student connects the circuit and obtains the graph shown in Fig. 9.2.
4.0
p.d. / V

3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

Fig. 9.2

0625/2 O/N01

0.5

0.6 0.7 0.8


current / A

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

11
(i)

How can the student use the graph to find the resistance of R?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Calculate the value of R.

resistance R = ......................... [4]


(d) The student removes the length of nichrome wire R and replaces it with the same length
of thinner nichrome wire.
(i)

Will the resistance of this wire be greater than, smaller than or the same as the wire
in the rest of the question?
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

On Fig. 9.2, sketch a line which the student might obtain when he repeats the
experiment with the thinner wire.
[3]

0625/2 O/N01

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

12
10

The densities of three solids are

topictension

2 700 kg/m3,
2 200 kg/m3,
600 kg/m3,

aluminium
concrete
wood

Blocks having identical dimensions are made of these three substances. The blocks are
stood on a horizontal surface, as shown in Fig. 10.1.

con

alu

min

wo

cre

ium

aluminium

od

te

concrete

wood

Fig. 10.1
(a) (i)

Which block has the greatest mass? .........................................................................


How do you know this?..............................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Which block has the greatest weight? .......................................................................

(iii)

Which block exerts the greatest pressure on the horizontal surface? .......................
[4]

(b) The wood block can be placed on the horizontal surface in any one of three ways, A, B
or C (see Fig. 10.2).
B

wo

od

wood

wo

od

Fig. 10.2
In which position does the wood block exert the greatest pressure?................................
How do you know this? .....................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01

13
(c) A person spends some time relaxing on a sandy beach. He sits on a chair with four
legs, as shown in Fig. 10.3.

For
Examiners
Use

sand

Fig. 10.3
Unfortunately, the chair quickly sinks into the sand.
(i)

Why does this happen?


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Suggest how the person might stop this happening.


...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

0625/2 O/N01

[Turn over

14
11

A laboratory thermometer is put into some heated pure water, as shown in Fig. 11.1. After
some time the water boils.

topicthermometer

thermometer

pure water

heat
Fig. 11.1
(a) What quantity does the thermometer measure? ...........................................................[1]
(b) Suggest what liquid might be contained by the thermometer. ......................................[1]
(c) The atmospheric pressure is normal.
What value should the thermometer show when the water is boiling? .........................[2]
(d) The heating is continued and the water carries on boiling.
What happens to the reading on the thermometer?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) How could you check that the zero mark on the thermometer had been correctly
positioned? You may use a diagram if it helps you to answer clearly.
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................

0625/2 O/N01

[3]

For
Examiners
Use

15
12

Fig. 12.1 shows the plan of the dining room in a house in a cold country. Details of the rest of
the rooms are not shown. The air outside the house is much colder than that inside the house.

topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
topicray

interior walls

COLD

WARM
door

plan (view
from above)

WARM
external
walls

dining room

window
(single glass)
Fig. 12.1
Heat is lost from the dining room by conduction at the rates shown below.
through external walls
through internal walls
through door
through window

3 000 000 J/hour


100 000 J/hour
50 000 J/hour
1 000 000 J/hour

(a) Suggest why


(i)

much more heat is lost through the external walls than through the internal walls,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

such a lot of heat is lost through the window.


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) If the figures above relate to the only sources of heat loss, how many J/hour would the
heater in the dining room need to supply in order to keep the temperature in the room
constant?

rate of heat supply needed = ......................... J/hour [2]


(c) Suggest one other way heat might be lost from the room.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

0625/2

PHYSICS
PAPER 2

MAY/JUNE SESSION 2002


1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials required.

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SP (NF/JB) S22944/3
CIE 2002

[Turn over

2
1

Here are two statements made by people who havent learned their Physics very well.
Each statement is incorrect. In the space alongside each statement, say what is wrong with
the statement.
statement

what is wrong with this statement

The weight of this bag


of peas is 1 kg.

The mass of this object


is another name for its
weight.

[2]

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

(a) Which of the following statements describe the property of a substance that would be
suitable for measuring temperature? Tick the box alongside any acceptable statement.
(i)

a property that increases regularly with temperature

(ii)

a property that decreases regularly with temperature

(iii)

a property that remains constant as the temperature changes

For
Examiners
Use

[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows how the length of the thread in a liquid-in-glass thermometer varies with
temperature.

20
length / cm
15

10

0
0

25

50

75
100
temperature / C

Fig. 2.1
(i)

What temperature is indicated by a thread length of 14.5 cm?


temperature = ........................ C

(ii)

What happens to the thread of the thermometer if the temperature drops below the
ice point?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

4
3

(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a machine for making loud sounds. It is called a siren. This consists of a
rotating disc with 25 holes. As each hole passes the jet, a puff of air passes through the
hole.

disc with
25 holes

jet of air
Fig. 3.1
(i)

How many puffs of air will there be during one revolution of the disc?
number of puffs = ....................

(ii)

The disc rotates 40 times per second.


Show that the frequency of the note produced by the siren is 1000 Hz.
[3]

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

5
(b) The siren described in (a) is located some distance from a large building, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.

For
Examiners
Use

large
building
siren

Fig. 3.2
The siren is briefly sounded once. A short time later, the sound is heard again.
(i)

Why is this second sound heard?


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

What is the frequency of this second sound? Tick one box.


less than 1000 Hz
1000 Hz
more than 1000 Hz

(iii)

What is the amplitude of this second sound? Tick one box.


less than the original sound
the same as the original sound
more than the original sound
[3]

0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

6
4

(a) In the following table, tick the appropriate boxes to indicate where protons, neutrons and
electrons are found in an atom.

particle

found in the nucleus

found in an orbit

proton
neutron
electron

[3]

(b) A neutral atom of phosphorus (P) contains 15 protons, 16 neutrons and 15 electrons.
(i)

Write down the proton number (atomic number) of phosphorus. ...............

(ii)

Write down the nucleon number (mass number) of phosphorus. ..............

(iii)

The nuclide notation for oxygen is 168O.


Write down the nuclide notation for phosphorus.
[3]

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

7
5

(a) Describe one method of magnetising a steel rod.


..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) How would you check that the steel rod had been magnetised?
what would show that the steel
rod had been magnetised

what I would do

[2]
(c) A glass tube is supported vertically on a bench. A strong bar magnet A is placed in the
bottom of the tube, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
hand
S
N

magnet B

glass tube

N
bench

magnet A
S
Fig. 5.1

A second magnet B is now dropped into the tube.


Describe what happens to magnet B, and explain why.
what happens to magnet B

explanation

[3]
0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

8
6

Fig. 6.1 shows a vacuum tube in which it is hoped to generate cathode rays.
vacuum

filament

anode

y-plates
Fig. 6.1

(a) (i)

On Fig. 6.1, draw the symbol for a battery connected so that thermionic emission
occurs.

(ii)

What particles are emitted in thermionic emission? .................................................


[2]

(b)

+
Fig. 6.2

(i)

On Fig. 6.2, show the + and terminals suitably connected so that cathode rays
may pass along the tube.

(ii)

On Fig. 6.2, draw a line showing the path of the cathode rays.

(iii)

How are the cathode rays detected in the tube?


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

9
(c) Fig. 6.3 shows the same vacuum tube, with the terminals labelled.
T

P
Q

S
Fig. 6.3

Between which two points should a battery be connected if the cathode rays are to be
deflected upwards?
between point ........ and point ........ [1]

0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

10
7

Fig. 7.1 illustrates one countrys system for transmitting electricity around the country, from
the power station to peoples houses.
voltage here
=

power station

step-up
transformer

grid system

voltage here
=

voltage here
=

step-down step-down house


transformer transformer

Fig. 7.1
(a) At different points in this system, the voltage is 220 V, 11 000 V or 132 000 V. At the three
places marked on Fig. 7.1, write in the appropriate value of the voltage.
[3]
(b) State one advantage of using high voltages for the transmission of electricity.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

11
8

In a research laboratory using radioactive materials, safety precautions have to be observed.


Some of the safety precautions adopted by the laboratory are listed below.

For
Examiners
Use

On the lines after each precaution, state reasons why it is a wise precaution.
(a) Radioactive materials should only be picked up using long-handled tools.
REASON 1 .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
REASON 2 .......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Food must not be taken where radioactive materials are being used.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The researchers must wash their hands after the source has been put away safely.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Radioactive materials must be stored in a locked drawer or cabinet.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

12
9

(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes three ammeters. The resistance of the ammeters
and the battery can be ignored.

A1

A3
20 X

A2

20 X

Fig. 9.1
(i)

What is the total resistance of the circuit?


resistance = ............

(ii)

Ammeter A1 reads 0.2 A. What do the other two ammeters read?


A2 reads ............ A
A3 reads ............ A
[3]

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

13
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the same components as in (a), but connected differently.

A1

A2

20 X

A3

20 X
Fig. 9.2
(i)

What is the total resistance of the circuit? Tick one box.


40
30
20
10

(ii)

Ammeter A1 reads 0.8 A. What do the other two ammeters read? Tick the
appropriate boxes.
more than 0.8 A

0.8 A

less than 0.8 A

A2 reads
A3 reads
[3]

0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

14
10 (a) A manufacturer of car tyres estimates that the area of a car tyre in contact with the road
is about the same as the area of a persons shoe in contact with the ground.
(i)

A car weighs 10 000 N and a person weighs 500 N.


Calculate the ratio
pressure of car on ground
________________________ .
pressure of person on ground
Remember that the car has 4 tyres and a person has 2 feet.

(ii)

Suggest why it might be a good idea to reduce the pressure of the air in car tyres if
the car is to be driven over soft sand or over snow.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]

(b) A U-tube manometer is used to measure lung pressure by blowing at A, as shown in


Fig. 10.1.

liquid

Fig. 10.1
(i)

Before the person blows at A, the liquid levels X and Y are the same.
State the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

15
(ii)

Which way do the liquid levels move when the person blows at A?
level X moves ..........................
level Y moves ..........................

(iii)

What would you measure in order to find the persons lung pressure?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

16
11 In an experiment, different weights are hung on the end of a spring, and the length of the
spring is measured. The results are as follows.

weight/N
length/mm
extension/mm

40

48

60

64

72

80

88

96

20

(a) What is the length of the unstretched spring?


length of unstretched spring = ............ mm [1]
(b) Some of the extensions have been calculated for you.
Complete the table by writing in the remaining extensions.
(c) (i)

[2]

On the graph grid of Fig 11.1, plot the values from your table.

extension / mm

60

50

40

30

20

10

0
0

Fig. 11.1

0625/2/M/J/02

6
weight / N

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

17
(ii)

Draw the best straight line through your points.

(iii)

The experimenter has read one of the lengths incorrectly.


1. Which one is it? ...................................................................................................
2. What do you think the length reading should have been? ........... mm
[5]

(d) The spring is now attached to a block resting on a rough surface, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
block
rough
surface

spring

pulling
force

friction
force
Fig. 11.2
As the pulling force is increased, the block just starts to move to the right when the
spring is 68 mm long.
(i)

What is the extension of the spring when it is 68 mm long?


extension = .......... mm

(ii)

Use your graph to find the force that causes this extension.
force = .......... N

(iii)

What is the value of the friction force as the block starts to move?
friction force = .......... N
[4]

0625/2/M/J/02

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

18
12 (a) A beam of light is travelling parallel to the axis of a thin lens, as shown in Fig. 12.1.

P C

Fig. 12.1
After passing through the lens, the rays all pass through the point F.
(i)

Which word best describes what happens to the rays? Tick one box.
The rays

converge
diffract
disperse
reflect

(ii)

On Fig. 12.1, complete the paths of the two rays.

(iii)

Complete the following sentence, referring to Fig. 12.1.

The focal length of the lens is the distance between point ....... and point ...... .
[3]

0625/2/M/J/02

19
(b) In this part of the question, you are required to draw an accurate ray diagram on
Fig. 12.2 for the lens in part (a).

object

Fig. 12.2
(i)

From the top of the object, draw a ray that, after leaving the lens, passes through F.

(ii)

From the top of the object, draw a ray that passes through P.

(iii)

Mark in the image, and write image alongside it.

(iv)

From your diagram, state two things that are the same (or approximately the same)
about the image and the object.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................

(v)

From your diagram, state one thing that is definitely different about the image and
the object.
...................................................................................................................................
[9]

0625/2/M/J/02

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate
Number

Candidate Name

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

0625/2

PHYSICS
PAPER 2

OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002


1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.

TIME

1 hour

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

FOR EXAMINERS USE

This question paper consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


SP (CW/SLC) S23398/3
CIE 2002

[Turn over

2
1

A baggage handler at an airport lifts a suitcase from the ground and places it on a moving
belt. The moving belt then transfers the suitcase to the owner.
moving
belt

suitcase on ground

suitcase held
level with belt

suitcase moving
on belt

Fig. 1.1
(a) (i)

How does the total energy of the suitcase in B compare with its energy in A?
Tick one box.
The total energy is greater in B than in A.
The total energy is the same in B and in A.
The total energy is less in B than in A.

(ii)

Explain your answer.


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

3
(b) (i)

How does the total energy of the suitcase in C compare with its energy in B? Tick
one box.

For
Examiners
Use

The total energy is greater in C than in B.


The total energy is the same in C and B.
The total energy is less in C than in B.
(ii)

Explain your answer.


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

Here are five words relating to the transfer of thermal energy.


conductor, convection, evaporation, insulator, radiation
Complete each of the following sentences by writing in the appropriate word from the list.
(a) Cooking pots often have a wooden handle, because wood is a good thermal
...................................... .

[1]

(b) Thermal energy reaches Earth from the Sun by means of .......................................

[1]

(c) Copper is a good ...................................... of thermal energy.

[1]

(d) The heating element is put at the bottom of an electric kettle, so that
...................................... can rapidly transfer thermal energy throughout the water.

0625/2/O/N/02

[1]

[Turn over

4
3

Fig. 3.1 shows a vertical wire through a horizontal piece of card. There is a current down the
wire.

large
current

card

Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows the wire and card, viewed from above.
card

Fig. 3.2
The large circle is one of the magnetic field lines caused by the current.
On Fig. 3.2,
(a) show the direction of the magnetic field,

[1]

(b) carefully draw three more magnetic field lines.

[2]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

5
4

In an experiment to find the density of some oil, a student takes the following readings.

For
Examiners
Use

cm3
500

mass of empty measuring jug = 610 g

400
300
200
100

Fig. 4.1
cm3

oil

500

mass of jug containing 500 cm3 of oil = 1020 g

400
300
200
100

Fig. 4.2
(a) (i)

Calculate the mass of oil in the jug.

mass of oil =........................ g


(ii)

Calculate the density of the oil.

density of oil =......................................


(iii)

How could the volume of the oil be more accurately measured than with the
measuring jug?
...................................................................................................................................
[7]

(b) Water is more dense than oil.


On Fig. 4.3, mark approximately where the surface of the same mass of water would be
if it replaced the oil.
[1]
level
of oil

cm3
500
400
300
200
100

Fig. 4.3

0625/2/O/N/02

[Turn over

6
5

For
Examiners
Use

(a) What happens to the nucleus of an atom that undergoes radioactive decay?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Strontium-90 has a half-life of 28 years. How much time must pass before its activity
falls to  of its original value?

time = ........................ years [2]

(a) State what is meant by the melting point of a solid.


The melting point is ..........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Which two of the following quantities are the same? Tick two boxes.
boiling point of iron
freezing (solidifying) point of iron
melting point of iron

[1]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

7
(c) Some liquid in a beaker is kept boiling by heating the beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1.

boiling
liquid

heat

Fig. 6.1
(i)

On the axes of Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show what happens to the temperature
of the liquid whilst it is boiling.

temperature

time

time at which
liquid starts
to boil
Fig. 6.2
(ii)

On your graph, mark the boiling point of the liquid.


[2]

0625/2/O/N/02

[Turn over

8
7

A student holds a polythene rod in one hand and a dry cotton cloth in the other.
dry cotton
cloth

polythene
rod

Fig. 7.1
(a) How can the student cause the rod to become charged with static electricity?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) How can the student detect that the rod has become charged?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Around the charged rod will be an electric field.
What is meant by an electric field ?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

9
(d) The charged polythene rod is brought close to another charged polythene rod that has
been suspended from a nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
nylon
thread

For
Examiners
Use

charged
polythene
rod ()

charged
polythene
rod ()

Fig. 7.2
(i)

What is seen to happen to the suspended rod?


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Explain why this happens.


...................................................................................................................................
[2]

(e) If the student used a copper rod in (a), instead of the polythene rod, why would he not
be able to charge the rod?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2/O/N/02

[Turn over

10
8

Fig. 8.1 shows an electric circuit containing a battery, a 4.7 resistor, an ammeter and a
variable resistor with a sliding contact. The variable resistor is set at zero. The ammeter and
battery have such a small resistance that it can be ignored.

sliding contact

variable
resistor

A
Y
4.7
Fig. 8.1

(a) In what unit do we measure the e.m.f. of the battery? .................................................[1]


(b) Write down the equation that links resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.

[2]
(c) The ammeter shows that the current through the 4.7 resistor is 0.5 A.
Calculate the p.d. across the resistor.

p.d. across resistor = ........................ [2]


(d) The sliding contact of the variable resistor is moved from X to Y.
(i)

What happens to the resistance of the variable resistor?


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

What happens to the reading on the ammeter?


...................................................................................................................................
[2]

(e) The variable resistor is now adjusted to make the total resistance of the circuit 10.0 .
What is the resistance of the variable resistor now?

resistance of variable resistor = ........................ [2]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

11
9

A student wrote the following report about an experiment to measure the speed of sound in
air.

For
Examiners
Use

My friend and I went into a field a long way from any buildings and measured
the distance across the field. My friend stood at one side of the field and I
stood at the other. My friend banged two pieces of wood together, and as I
saw him do this, I started a stopwatch. I stopped the stopwatch when I heard
the sound. We obtained the following readings.
distance across field = 238 m
time for sound to cross field = 0.7 s
(a) Why was it necessary to be a long way from any buildings?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Why was it necessary to use such a large distance?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest what the students could have used to measure the distance across the field.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Why was there a delay between the student seeing the pieces of wood come together
and hearing the bang?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Use the readings to calculate the speed of sound.

speed of sound = ...................................... [4]


(f)

Suggest why it might have been a good idea for the students to repeat the experiment
after they had exchanged positions.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2/O/N/02

[Turn over

12
10 (a) The apparatus shown in Fig. 10.1 can be used to indicate when there is a force on the
copper rod.

hanging copper rod

N
S

mercury
Fig. 10.1
(i)

Suggest what is seen to happen to the hanging copper rod when the switch is
closed.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Explain your answer.


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(iii)

The cell is reversed and the switch closed.


How does what is seen now differ from what you described in (a)(i)?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

13
(b) Fig. 10.2 represents a d.c. motor.

coil

Fig. 10.2
(i)

In the boxes, label the various parts of the motor. One part has been labelled as an
example.

(ii)

Which part of the motor ensures that the coil keeps rotating when the battery is
connected?
...................................................................................................................................

(iii)

The battery is reversed. What difference does this make to the motor?
...................................................................................................................................
[5]

0625/2/O/N/02

[Turn over

14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a reed relay in a simple circuit.

lamp

flexible
iron reeds

Fig. 11.1
Explain why the iron reeds touch each other when switch S is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

15
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows a simple temperature-operated alarm.
warning
lamp

thermistor
Fig. 11.2
When the thermistor is cold, its resistance is too high to allow sufficient current to
operate the reed relay. The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases.
Describe what happens to make the warning lamp light as the air temperature changes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]

0625/2/O/N/02

[Turn over

16
12 (a) A narrow beam of red light strikes one face of a triangular prism at A, as shown in
Fig. 12.1.

screen

red light

Fig. 12.1
(i)

On Fig. 12.1, show the path of the beam until it reaches the screen.

(ii)

What name do we use to describe what happens to the beam at A?


...................................................................................................................................
[4]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

17
(b) The red light is replaced by a narrow beam of mixed red and violet light, as shown in
Fig. 12.2.

screen

red +
violet light

Fig. 12.2
Complete Fig. 12.2 to show what happens to the red and the violet light.

[2]

(c) The beam of red and violet light is replaced by a narrow beam of white light from the
Sun. State what is now seen on the screen.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The rays from the Sun also include infra-red rays. Infra-red radiation can pass through
glass.
(i)

On Fig. 12.2, mark with the letter X the place where infra-red radiation from the
Sun might strike the screen after passing through the prism.

(ii)

Why can infra-red not be seen on the screen?


...................................................................................................................................

(iii)

What could be used to detect the infra-red radiation?


...................................................................................................................................
[3]

0625/2/O/N/02

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2

May/June 2003
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

For Examiners Use


If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if
provided.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.


SP (AT/KN) S46409/2
CIE 2003

[Turn over

2
1

A person winds some thread tightly 4 times round the length of a metre rule and cuts the
ends off level with the left-hand end of the rule, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
ends cut
off here
thread

1 m rule

Fig. 1.1
(a) To the nearest metre, what is the length of the thread?
.................. m [1]
(b) Is the actual length of thread slightly greater or slightly less than your answer to (a)?
Tick one box and give your reason.
slightly greater

slightly less

reason .......................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2/M/J/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

(a) Two horizontal strings are attached to a soft rubber ball, as shown in Fig. 2.1.

10 N

Fig. 2.1
A force of 10 N pulls on one string.
(i)

The ball does not move. What is the value of the force F on the other string?
F = .............................. N

(ii)

What change to the rubber ball do the two forces cause?


...................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) A garden pot containing soil weighs a total of 360 N. The pot rests on three equallyspaced blocks, so that surplus water can drain out of the holes in the base of the pot.
The soil is uniformly distributed in the pot. The pot is shown in Fig. 2.2.

Fig. 2.2
(i)

What is the force exerted by each block on the pot?

(ii)

State the direction of these forces.

...............N

...................................................................................................................................
(iii)

The gardener finds that the blocks sink into the ground, but he must have the pot
up on blocks to allow the drainage. What can he do to reduce the sinking of the
pot?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]

0625/2/M/J/03

[Turn over

4
3

For
Examiners
Use

(a) An unopened bottle of olive oil has


a mass of 0.97 kg. The empty bottle
has a mass of 0.51 kg.
Calculate the mass of the olive oil.
OLI V
OIL

OLI V
OIL

0.97 kg

0.51 kg

Fig. 3.1

mass of olive oil = .................................. kg

[2]

(b) The olive oil is poured into three 250 cm3 measuring cylinders. The first two cylinders
are filled to the 250 cm3 mark. The third is shown in Fig. 3.2.
cm3
250
200

50

150
100
50

Fig. 3.2
(i)

What is the volume of the olive oil in the third measuring cylinder?
volume = .................................. cm3

(ii)

Calculate the volume of the olive oil in the unopened bottle.

volume = .................................. cm3


(iii)

Calculate the density of the olive oil. Express your answer to 2 significant figures.

density = ..................................
[7]

0625/2/M/J/03

5
4

The air trapped in a cylinder by a piston is kept under pressure by a load, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.

fixed
pivot

For
Examiners
Use

load

piston

cylinder
air

Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the pressure in the cylinder is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The load is increased.
(i)

State what happens to the piston.


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

State what happens to the pressure in the cylinder, and give a reason.
what happens ...........................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]

0625/2/M/J/03

[Turn over

6
5

An immersion heater is put into some crushed ice at 0 C. The immersion heater is switched
on.

insulating
beaker

immersion heater
crushed ice

Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the graph of temperature against time, up to the time when all the
ice has melted.
[3]

100
temperature / C

0
time

0
time when
all ice has
melted
Fig. 5.2

(b) The heater is left switched on after all the ice has melted, and the temperature rises.
After some time, the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
(i)

Suggest why the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

State what happens to the energy received by the water whilst this is happening.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

0625/2/M/J/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

7
6

In this question, drawing should be done carefully.


Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light striking mirror 1 at point X.
ray of
light

mirror 1

mirror 2

X
Fig. 6.1

(a) On Fig. 6.1,


(i)

draw the normal at X,

(ii)

draw the ray reflected from mirror 1,

(iii)

mark the angle of incidence using the letter i and the angle of reflection using the
letter r.
[3]

(b) Mirror 2 is parallel to mirror 1. The reflected ray from mirror 1 strikes mirror 2.
Compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 with the incident ray at X. You
may do a further construction if you wish. Complete the sentence below.
The reflected ray from mirror 2 is .....................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

0625/2/M/J/03

[Turn over

8
7

For
Examiners
Use

The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.


(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show how far a sound wave has travelled 2, 3, 4 and 5 seconds
after the sound was made.
[1]
time elapsed/s

distance travelled/m

340

Fig. 7.1
(b) On Fig. 7.2, draw the graph of distance travelled against time for the sound wave.

distance
travelled
/m

2000

1500

1000

500

5
time/s

Fig. 7.2

0625/2/M/J/03

[3]

For
Examiners
Use

9
(c) A ship is sinking in the dark as shown in Fig. 7.3.

distress
flare

lifeboat
sinking ship

Fig. 7.3
The sailors on the ship fire a distress flare into the air. It explodes with a bang and a
bright flash of light.
(i)

A lifeboat crew hear the bang and see the flash, but not at the same time.
State which reaches the lifeboat first, the bang or the flash, and give a reason.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

The time interval in (c)(i) is 4.2 s. Use your graph in (b) to find how far away the
lifeboat is from the flare. Show clearly on your graph how you got your answer.

distance of lifeboat = .................................. m


[6]

0625/2/M/J/03

[Turn over

10
8

(a) In an electronic circuit, what is a capacitor designed to store? ................................

[1]

(b) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a large-value resistor and a capacitor.

S1
large-value
resistor
+
6 V d.c.
V

capacitor
S2

Fig. 8.1
(i)

Switch S1 is open. Switch S2 is closed and then opened again.


What reading now shows on the voltmeter?

(ii)

................................ V

S2 is left open and S1 is closed and left closed.


Describe what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

(iii)

The circuit in Fig. 8.1 is an example of a simple time-delay circuit.


State one use of a time-delay circuit.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

0625/2/M/J/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

11
9

A length of flexible, slack wire is fixed at A and B so that part of it is held vertically
in the field of a horseshoe magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.

S
N

Fig. 9.1
Figs. 9.2 and 9.3 each show the same section through the apparatus. The wire between A
and B is not shown.

magnet
pole

magnet
pole

Fig. 9.2
(a) (i)
(ii)

Fig. 9.3

On Fig. 9.2, draw what the wire might look like when a large current passes
through it.
[2]
Explain why the wire looks like this.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

(b) On Fig. 9.3, draw what the wire might look like if the current in (a) is reversed.

0625/2/M/J/03

[1]

[Turn over

12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
IGCSE OSCILLOSCOPE CO.

brightness

focus

time-base

y-gain

ms/cm
x-shift

volts/cm
y-shift
on
off

y input

Fig. 10.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the screen.
(i)

Describe what causes this bright spot.


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

(ii)

The spot is rather blurred. Which control should be adjusted to make it sharper?
...............................................................................................................................[1]

(iii)

Which control would be switched on to turn the spot into a horizontal line?
...............................................................................................................................[1]

(iv)

Describe what happens inside the oscilloscope to turn the spot into a horizontal
line.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

0625/2/M/J/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

13
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i)

Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope?


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Fig. 10.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.

Fig. 10.2
1. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the x-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
2. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the y-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]

0625/2/M/J/03

[Turn over

14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a circuit containing a lamp and a variable resistor.

Fig. 11.1
The circuit does not work. The lamp does not light and altering the setting on the
variable resistor makes no difference.
In the space below, re-draw the diagram, showing a circuit in which the variable resistor
may be used to change the brightness of the lamp.
[2]

0625/2/M/J/03

For
Examiners
Use

15
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows two resistors and an ammeter connected in series to a 6 V d.c. supply.
The resistance of the ammeter is so small that it can be ignored.
8

Q
+

P
6V

For
Examiners
Use

R
S

Fig. 11.2
(i)

Calculate the combined resistance of the 8 and 4 resistors in series.

combined resistance = ..................................


(ii)

[2]

1. Calculate the current supplied by the 6 V d.c. supply.

current = ..................................
2. State the value of the current
in section PQ of the circuit ..................................
recorded by the ammeter ..................................
in section SR of the circuit ..................................
[5]
(iii)

On Fig. 11.2, show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference


across the 4 resistor.
[1]

0625/2/M/J/03

[Turn over

16

For
Examiners
Use

12 A rock climber climbs up a rock face, as shown in Fig. 12.1.

safety rope

climber

Fig. 12.1
(a) To climb the rock face, the climber must do work.
Which force must the climber work against as he climbs? Tick one box.
air resistance
friction on the rock
his weight
tension in the safety rope

[1]

(b) What other quantity, as well as the force ticked in (a), must be known in order to find the
work done by the climber?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) One climber weighs 1000 N and another weighs 800 N. They both take the same time to
climb the cliff.
(i)

Which one has done the most work? ........................................................................

(ii)

Which one has the greater power rating? .................................................................


[2]

(d) When the first climber reaches the top, he has more gravitational potential
energy than he had at the bottom.
(i)

What form of energy, stored in his body, was used to give him this extra
gravitational potential energy? ..................................................................................

(ii)

Where did he get this energy from? ..........................................................................

(iii)

Other than increasing gravitational potential energy on the way up, how else was
energy in his body used? State one way.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Theory

October/November 2003
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).

If you have been given a label, look at the


details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.

For Examiners Use

Stick your personal label here, if


provided.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


MML 4505 11/02 S53489/2
UCLES 2003

UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE
Local Examinations Syndicate

[Turn over

2
1

(a) The block of wood in Fig. 1.1 will balance on a horizontal table.
Q

B
A
Fig. 1.1
If the block is tilted slightly clockwise about AB, it returns to its original position when
released.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter G where the centre of mass of the block might be.
(ii) Small masses are added to the top PQRS of the block until it is just about to
topple (fall over). Fig. 1.2 shows a side view of the block.

A
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line along which the centre of mass of the arrangement must
now lie.
[2]

0625/02/O/N/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

3
(b) Fig. 1.3 shows two ways of using a laboratory retort stand.

B
Fig. 1.3

Which diagram shows the safer arrangement? .....................


Give a reason for your choice.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Some office filing cabinets have a mechanism that allows only one drawer to be
opened at a time, as shown in Fig. 1.4.

Fig. 1.4
Suggest why they have this mechanism.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/02/O/N/03

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

4
2

A wheel is rotating at approximately 2 revolutions per second.


Describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure as accurately as possible the time for
one revolution of the wheel. Make sure you include all the relevant information.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [5]

Fig. 3.1 shows a rock-fall down a mountain-side.

loose
rocks

mountain

Fig. 3.1
The rocks higher up the mountain were disturbed by something and they roll down the
mountain until they stop at the bottom. In the boxes below, write the name of the type of
energy being described.
Before they fall, the rocks have this
energy because of their position.

As the rocks are falling,


their energy is changing
to these other types of energy.
At the bottom, the only energy
retained by the rocks is this type
of energy.
[5]

0625/02/O/N/03

5
4

(a) A farmer has two vehicles with the same weight and the same number of wheels.
Fig. 4.1 shows what the wheels on these two vehicles look like.

vehicle 1

For
Examiners
Use

vehicle 2
Fig. 4.1

Which vehicle should the farmer use when driving across his fields when the ground is
very soft? Give your reasons.
vehicle ................................................................
reasons ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b)

(i) If you stepped on the point of a sharp nail with your bare foot, it would be
extremely painful. Explain, in terms of pressure, why this is so.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) A person can lie on a bed of nail-points if there is a large number of nails. Explain
why this is not extremely painful.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]

0625/02/O/N/03

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

6
5

Fig. 5.1 shows two parallel rays of light, AB and CD, in a symmetrical glass block.
glass block
A

B
P

Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1,
(i) draw the ray AB before it entered the block at A,
(ii) draw the normal at B,
(iii) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at B,
(iv) draw the normal at D,
(v) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at D.
[5]
(b) State two things about the directions of the two rays emerging from the block.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) What might happen to a third ray in the block, parallel to the others, which reached the
point P?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/02/O/N/03

7
6

(a) Here are three quantities that are associated with waves in the electromagnetic spectrum.

For
Examiners
Use

speed, wavelength, frequency


(i) Which of these is the same in a vacuum for both X-rays and radio waves?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which of these determines the colour of a ray of light?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Which of these is the distance between two successive wavecrests?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum has the shortest wavelength?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/02/O/N/03

[Turn over

8
7

(a) The resistance of a piece of wire of constant diameter depends on its length.
On the axes of Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show how the resistance of the wire varies
with length.
[2]
resistance

0
0

length
Fig. 7.1

(b) A reel contains 50 m of insulated wire. The ends of the wire are connected to the
circuit shown in Fig. 7.2, so that the resistance of the wire can be found.

50 m
meter 1

meter 2

Fig. 7.2
(i) What sort of meter is meter 1? ........................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the sentence: Meter 1 is measuring the .................................................
across the coil of wire.
[1]
(iii) What sort of meter is meter 2? ........................................................................... [1]
(iv) Complete the sentence: Meter 2 is measuring the .................................................
in the coil of wire.
[1]

0625/02/O/N/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

9
(v) The dials of the meters are shown in Figs. 7.3(a) and 7.3(b).

3 4

0.1

0.4

0.5

10

0.3

0.2

Fig. 7.3(a)

Fig. 7.3(b)

From the readings, calculate the resistance of the coil of wire.

resistance of coil = ................................ [5]


(vi) What is the resistance per metre of the wire?

resistance per metre = .......................... [2]

0625/02/O/N/03

[Turn over

10
8

Fig. 8.1 shows the view, from above, of a sheet of cardboard on top of a bar magnet. The
dotted line is the outline of the bar magnet.

Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe how the pattern of the magnetic field round the bar magnet can be shown
experimentally. If you wish, you may draw on Fig. 8.1 as well as write on the lines
below.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State how you would identify the north pole of the magnet.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/02/O/N/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

11
9

(a) When a nucleus decays by emitting an -particle, what happens to


(i) the number of neutrons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the number of protons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) the charge on the nucleus?
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) On 1st January 1900, a sample of a particular radioactive nuclide had an activity of
3200 count / min. The nuclide has a half-life of 22 years. Calculate the activity of the
nuclide remaining in the sample on 1st January 1966.

activity = ......................... count / min [4]

0625/02/O/N/03

[Turn over

12
10 In a spring-stretching experiment, the following values were found for the extension of the
spring.
load / N

extension / mm

16

45

48

64

80

104 150

(a) Plot these values on the axes of Fig. 10.1.

[3]

200

extension / mm
150

100

50

0
0

10
load / N

Fig. 10.1
(b) A mistake was made with measuring one of the extensions. On the table above, put a
circle around the incorrect extension.
[1]
(c) After a load of about 5 N, the graph begins to curve upwards.
Suggest what is happening to the spring when the load is greater than 5 N.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Describe how you would measure the extensions if you were doing this experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/02/O/N/03

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

13
11

Fig. 11.1 shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer, calibrated in C.


10

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

Fig. 11.1
(a)

(i) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in steam, just above boiling
water at standard pressure?
........................... C
(ii) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in pure melting ice?
........................... C
(iii) On Fig. 11.1, mark where the end of the mercury thread might be when the
thermometer is in a freezer, where the temperature is well below the freezing
point of water.
[3]

(b) The mercury-in-glass thermometer uses the expansion of a liquid to measure


temperature. State another physical property that can be used to measure temperature.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

0625/02/O/N/03

[Turn over

14
12 In a country where the mains electricity supply is 240 V, the transformer in Fig. 12.1 is used
to enable a 6 V lamp to be lit.

A
240 V
mains

8000
turns

6V
lamp
B

Fig. 12.1
(a) Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil if the lamp is to be lit at
normal brightness.

number of turns = ........................ [3]


(b) Without further calculation, state the number of secondary turns needed to light, at
normal brightness,
A
(i) two identical 6 V lamps in parallel i.e.
number of turns = ....................
B
A
(ii) two identical 6 V lamps in series i.e.
number of turns = ....................
B
[2]

0625/02/O/N/03

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2

May/June 2004
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

For Examiners Use


If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if
provided.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.


SPA (NH/BI) S61205/2
UCLES 2004

[Turn over

2
1

The clock on a public building has a bell that strikes each hour so that people who cannot
see the clock can know what hour of the day it is.
At precisely 6 oclock, the clock starts to strike. It strikes 6 times.
At the first strike of the bell, a mans wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.

11

12

1
2

10
9

3
8

4
7

Fig. 1.1
When the bell strikes for the sixth time, the wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.

11

12

1
2

10
9

3
8

4
7

Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 6th strike.

time interval = s [1]


(b) Calculate the time interval between one strike and the next.

time interval = s [2]


(c) At precisely 11 oclock, the clock starts to strike.
Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 11th strike.

time interval = s [2]


UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

Fig. 2.1 shows a hinged rail in a fence. The rail has to be lifted vertically in order to let people
through.
hinge

For
Examiners
Use

rail

Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that
would be needed to begin to raise the rail.
[3]
(b) What is the correct Physics term for the turning effect of a force?
Tick one box.
force
work
moment
movement

[1]

(c) Suggest one way the designer of the fence could have reduced the force needed to lift
the rail.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

[Turn over

4
3

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 3.1 shows the speed-time graph of part of a short journey made by a cyclist.
25
speed
m/s

20

15
10
5
R

0
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

time/s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which part of Fig. 3.1 shows when the cyclist is travelling at constant speed?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what is happening during the rest of the journey shown in Fig. 3.1.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i)

Calculate the distance travelled during the first 50 s.

distance travelled = ... m


(ii)

Calculate the distance travelled between 50 s and 100 s.

distance travelled = ... m

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

5
(iii)

For
Examiners
Use

Calculate the total distance travelled.

total distance travelled = ... m


(iv)

Calculate the average speed during the 100 s.

average speed = ... m/s


[8]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

[Turn over

6
4

(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a person pulling a loaded barrow along a path from A to B at a steady
speed.

B
Fig. 4.1

State the two quantities you need to know in order to be able to calculate the work done
by the person.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another person pulls an identical barrow and load from A to B, but this person pulls
much harder than the person in (a).
Describe what happens to the second persons barrow.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i)

State which person has the greater power between A and B.


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

Give two reasons for your answer to (c)(i).


reason 1 ....................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...................................................................................................................
[3]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

For
Examiners
Use

7
5

Fig. 5.1 shows a shallow dish containing a liquid that evaporates easily. The bulb of a
thermometer is held in the liquid. A jet of air is blown over the surface of the liquid, so that the
liquid evaporates rapidly.

For
Examiners
Use

thermometer

jet of air

liquid
shallow dish

Fig. 5.1
(a) State what happens to the reading shown on the thermometer.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the behaviour of the molecules of the liquid.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State one example in everyday life where the effect demonstrated by this experiment
occurs.
......................................................................................................................................[1]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

[Turn over

8
6

(a) When a certain amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated aluminium, the temperature
of the aluminium rises by 1 C.

1 kg aluminium inside
a layer of insulation

heat supplied
to aluminium
Fig. 6.1
In what form does the aluminium store the energy that has been supplied?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The same amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated copper, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
1 kg copper inside
a layer of insulation

heat supplied
to copper
Fig. 6.2
The temperature rise of the 1 kg copper block is greater than the temperature rise of the
1 kg aluminium block in (a).
Explain, in terms of thermal capacity, why this is so.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

For
Examiners
Use

9
7

For
Examiners
Use

Boy A throws a large stone into a large still pond, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.

B
A

Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.1
(a) Girl B hears the plop sound of the stone entering the water a very short time after she
sees the splash, but it is many seconds before the water wave reaches the edge of the
pond where she is sitting.
Use this information to decide which wave travels fastest and which travels slowest.
Write fastest in one box and slowest in another box. Leave one box empty.
sound wave
light wave
water wave

[2]

(b) In the boxes below, state whether each type of wave is a transverse or a longitudinal
wave.
sound wave
light wave
water wave

[3]

(c) In the boxes below, put a tick alongside any of the types of wave that do not need a
substance in which to travel.
sound wave
light wave
water wave
UCLES 2004

[1]
0625/02 M/J/04

[Turn over

10
8

A, B, C and D are an aluminium bar, an unmagnetised iron bar and two bar magnets. Tests
are performed to find out which bar is which.
Each row of Fig. 8.1 shows what happens when two of the bars are placed end to end.
A

repel

attract

no effect

Fig. 8.1
Which bar is which? Complete the lines below.
Bar A is ........................................................................
Bar B is ........................................................................
Bar C is ........................................................................
Bar D is ........................................................................

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

[4]

For
Examiners
Use

11
9

Some pond water becomes contaminated by the release of radioactive waste.


The radioactivity of a sample of the contaminated water is tested every week for 5 weeks.
The results are shown in the table below.

time/weeks
activity
count/s

800

440

240

130

70

40

(a) Plot these values on Fig. 9.1.

For
Examiners
Use

[3]

activity 800
count/s
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0

6
time/weeks

Fig. 9.1
(b) Draw the best curve through your points.

[1]

(c) Use your graph to find the half-life of the radioactive material in the sample. Show clearly
on the graph how you obtained your answer.

half-life of radioactive material = weeks [2]


(d) If the sample of contaminated water used in the test had been smaller, state how this
would have affected, if at all,
(i)

the activity readings, .................................................................................................

(ii)

the value of the half-life. ............................................................................................


[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

[Turn over

12
10 (a) One coil of a transformer is connected to a toy train set. The other coil is connected to a
240 V a.c. mains supply, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V

primary coil
4800 turns

secondary coil
200 turns

to
train
set
Fig. 10.1
(i)

How can you tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]

(ii)

Calculate the voltage at which the toy train operates.

toy train operates at V [3]


(iii)

1.

The voltage of the mains supply is reduced. What happens to the voltage
supplied to the train set? Tick one box.
increases
decreases
stays the same

2.

An attempt is made to use the train set in a country where the mains supply is
110 V. Suggest one difference that might be noticed in the way the toy train
operates.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

For
Examiners
Use

13

For
Examiners
Use

(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to operate an electric motor.
pivoted iron
armature

power supply
for motor

M motor
switch
contacts
relay core
Fig. 10.2
Below are sentences that describe stages of the process by which the circuit works.
A

The armature pivots and the contacts close.

The core of the relay is magnetised.

The switch is closed and the current flows through the coil.

A current flows through the motor, making it work.

The core attracts the top part of the armature.

Put the sentences so that the stages are in the correct order. Put the appropriate letters
in the boxes below. One box has been filled in as an example.
Stage 1 is sentence

Stage 2 is sentence
Stage 3 is sentence
Stage 4 is sentence
Stage 5 is sentence

UCLES 2004

[3]

0625/02 M/J/04

[Turn over

14
11 (a) The list below contains the names of five different components that might be found in an
electric circuit.
capacitor

light-dependent resistor

resistor

thermistor

variable resistor

Which of these has


(i)

a resistance that falls rapidly when the temperature rises,


...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

a resistance that changes when a sliding contact is moved,


...................................................................................................................................

(iii)

a high resistance in the dark but a low resistance in daylight?


...................................................................................................................................
[3]

(b) A lamp shines with full brightness when connected to a 12 V battery, as shown in
Fig. 11.1.

0.50 A

12 V

lamp
Fig. 11.1
(i)

1.

Write down the equation that links resistance with p.d. and current.

2.

The current in the lamp is 0.50 A. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.

resistance of lamp =
[4]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

For
Examiners
Use

15
(ii)

For
Examiners
Use

A resistor is now connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 11.2.

12 V

lamp
Fig. 11.2
1.

State what happens to the current in the lamp when the resistor is added.
...........................................................................................................................

2.

Explain your answer.


...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................

3.

Suggest what change might be seen in the lamp.


...........................................................................................................................
[3]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

[Turn over

16
12 (a) A man looks at his reflection in a vertical mirror. This is shown from the side in Fig. 12.1.
mirror

Fig. 12.1
(i)

On Fig. 12.1, accurately mark with a clear dot labelled B where the image of the tip
A of the mans beard will be.

(ii)

On Fig. 12.1, accurately draw a ray from the tip of the mans beard that reflects from
the mirror and goes into his eye. You may use faint construction lines if you wish.
Use arrows to show the direction of the ray.

(iii)

The man can see the image, but it cannot be formed on a screen. What name is
given to this type of image?
...................................................................................................................................

(iv)

Write down the equation that links the angles of incidence and reflection that the
ray makes with the mirror.

[7]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

For
Examiners
Use

17
(b) A girl looks into a bathroom mirror to brush her hair. Fig. 12.2 shows what she sees in
the mirror.

reflection seen
in mirror

Fig. 12.2
(i)

In which hand is she holding the brush? Tick one box.


left hand
right hand

(ii)

She has a spot on her skin just below her left eye.
Mark clearly on Fig. 12.2 where this will appear on the reflection.
[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 M/J/04

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Theory

October/November 2004
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

For Examiners Use


If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if
provided.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SPA (NH/BI) S66584/2
UCLES 2004

[Turn over

2
1

Fig. 1.1 shows the top part of a measuring cylinder containing some liquid.
cm3
100

90

80

liquid

Fig. 1.1
(a) What is the volume of liquid in the measuring cylinder?
volume = .............................cm3 [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 indicates four ways the observers eye could look when taking the reading from
the measuring cylinder. Put a circle around the eye position that gives the correct
reading.
[1]
(c) In order to fill the measuring cylinder up to the 100 cm3 mark, 80 drops of the liquid are
added to the liquid already in the measuring cylinder.
Calculate the average volume of one drop.

average volume of a drop = ............................cm3 [4]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

(a) In Fig. 2.1, the sealed drum containing gas has a mercury manometer connected to it in
order to indicate the gas pressure.

For
Examiners
Use

air pressure
760 mm of mercury

gas pressure
781 mm of mercury

B
A

mercury

Fig. 2.1
For convenience, gas pressure is often expressed in mm of mercury.
The gas pressure is 781 mm of mercury and air pressure is 760 mm of mercury.
(i)

State the difference in height between levels A and B on the manometer.

difference in height = ...mm


(ii)

The temperature of the gas rises.


State what happens to
1. the gas pressure, ..................................................................................................
2. the level A, ............................................................................................................
3. the level B. ...........................................................................................................
[3]

(b) The air in part (a) is also pressing on a large window pane in the wall of the room where
the drum is situated.
(i)

State how the air pressure on the window pane compares with the air pressure on
the mercury surface at B in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

State how the force exerted by the air on the window pane compares with the force
exerted by the air on the mercury surface at B.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

[Turn over

4
3

A packaging company purchases corrugated cardboard boxes in which to pack its goods.
The boxes are not made up when they are delivered, but are flat, as shown in Fig. 3.1.

0.20 m

0.60 m
0.50 m
Fig. 3.1
(a) A bundle of these boxes measures 0.60 m x 0.50 m x 0.20 m and has a mass of 7.2 kg.
(i)

Calculate the volume of the bundle of boxes.

volume = .....................................[3]
(ii)

Calculate the density of the corrugated cardboard.

density = .....................................[4]
(b) Corrugated cardboard is made up of 3 sheets of thick paper stuck together. Fig. 3.2
shows an enlarged view of the edge of a sheet of corrugated cardboard.
thick paper

air

Fig. 3.2
(i)

Here is an incomplete sentence about the paper.


The density of the paper is ................................... that of the corrugated cardboard.
Which of the words below correctly complete the sentence? Tick one box.
greater than

(ii)

the same as

less than

Explain your answer to (b) (i).


...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

For
Examiners
Use

5
4

For
Examiners
Use

Logs of wood are burning in a camp-fire on the ground. A person is sitting nearby.

Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)

State two types of energy that the burning logs possess.


1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................

(ii)

State the main method of heat transfer by which energy from the fire reaches the
person sitting nearby.
...................................................................................................................................
[3]

(b) A spark jumps out of the fire.


(i)

State the name of the type of energy that the spark possesses due to its
movement.
...................................................................................................................................

(ii)

The spark lands on the persons hand.


State which method of heat transfer causes the person to feel the spark.
...................................................................................................................................

(iii)

The pain caused by the spark makes the person stand up.
1. State the type of energy that has increased, now that he is standing.
...................................................................................................................................
2. State the type of energy stored in his body that enabled him to stand.
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

[Turn over

6
5

In order to observe Brownian motion, some smoke is mixed with air trapped in a small glass
box. The box is strongly illuminated from the side, and the smoke is viewed from above
through a microscope. This is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.

Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe what is seen when the microscope is focussed on the smoke particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State what causes the effect described in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) The temperature of the glass box and its contents is increased. Suggest what change is
seen through the microscope.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

For
Examiners
Use

7
6

(a) Here is a list of solid materials. Put a tick in the box alongside those materials which are
good conductors of heat.

For
Examiners
Use

aluminium
copper
cork
gold
polystyrene
wood
[3]
(b) State the word we use to describe materials that are poor conductors of heat.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) From the list of materials given in (a), state which would be suitable to use for
(i)

the base of a cooking pot,..........................................................................................

(ii)

the covering on the handle of a kettle. .......................................................................


[2]

(d) Water is a poor conductor of heat. A beaker of water is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1.

water

heat
Fig. 6.1
All the water heats up quite quickly.
State the process by which heat spreads most rapidly through the water.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State why the heating element is always placed near the bottom of an electric kettle.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

[Turn over

8
7

A girl is walking along a path 1600 m from the rock-face of a quarry (a place where stone is
obtained).
girl

explosion
rock face
quarry

1600 m
Fig. 7.1
(a) The quarry workers set off an explosion at X to break up some rock. The girl measures
the time interval between seeing the flash and hearing the bang.
The time is 5.0 s.
(i)

Calculate the speed of the sound.

speed of sound = ...m/s [3]


(ii)

State what assumption you have made in your working in (i).


...............................................................................................................................[1]

(b) Suppose the explosion had taken place at Y instead of X.


State two ways in which the girls observations would have been different.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

For
Examiners
Use

9
8

For
Examiners
Use

Two light conducting balls A and B are hanging side by side, as shown in Fig. 8.1.

Fig. 8.1
A and B are given a series of different charges, as indicated in the table below.
In the third column of the table, write what is seen to happen in each case.
Use the words repulsion or attraction or nothing, as appropriate.
charge on A

charge on B

positive

positive

negative

negative

positive

negative

zero

positive

negative

zero

what is seen to happen

[5]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

[Turn over

10
9

(a) Two 10 resistors are connected in series in a circuit, as shown in Fig. 9.1.

3.0 A

10

10
Fig. 9.1

The current at point X is 3.0 A.


(i)

State the current at


1. point Y, ....................A
2. point Z. ....................A

(ii)

Calculate the combined resistance of the two 10 resistors.

combined resistance = ...


[3]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

For
Examiners
Use

11

For
Examiners
Use

(b) The 10 resistors are now arranged in parallel, as shown in Fig. 9.2.

3.0 A

1.5 A

10

10
Fig. 9.2
(i)

The current at X is adjusted to 3.0 A. The current through one resistor is 1.5 A.
1. What is the current at Y? Tick one box.
0A
1.5 A
3.0 A
4.5 A
2. State the value of the current at Z. ....................A

(ii)

What is the combined resistance of the two 10 resistors? Tick one box.
0
5
10
20
[3]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

[Turn over

12
10 Atoms contain protons, neutrons and electrons.
State which of these three
(a) has a negative charge, ..................................................................................................[1]
(b) is uncharged,.................................................................................................................[1]
(c) has a much smaller mass than the others, ...................................................................[1]
(d) is outside the nucleus,...................................................................................................[1]
(e) are nucleons,.................................................................................................................[2]
(f)

are lost from the nucleus during -particle emission. ...................................................[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

For
Examiners
Use

13

For
Examiners
Use

11 The ray diagram in Fig. 11.1 shows a lens forming an image II of an object OO.

O
D
O

BC

I
Fig. 11.1
(a) State
(i)

which of the marked points is a principal focus of the lens, .......................................

(ii)

which distance is the focal length of the lens.............................................................


[2]

(b) Which of the following words describe the image?


Tick all that are correct.
real
virtual
inverted
upright
enlarged
diminished
[3]
(c) On Fig. 11.1, draw one other ray that goes from O, the top of the object, to the image.
[1]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

[Turn over

14
12 (a) A small pin is fixed to the edge of a bench. A triangular piece of card with a small hole in
each corner is hung on the pin from corner A and allowed to settle, as shown in
Fig. 12.1. A plumb-line is then hung from the pin and the vertical line AP is marked on
the card.
A

P
plumb-line
B

Fig.
Fig. 12.1
This procedure is then repeated with the card hanging from C and the vertical line CQ is
marked.
After this, the card is as shown in Fig. 12.2.
A

Fig. 12

B
Fig. 12.2
On Fig. 12.2,
(i)

draw the vertical line that would be obtained if the card were hung from B,

(ii)

clearly mark the centre of mass of the card using a dot labelled G.

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

[2]

For
Examiners
Use

15
(b) Fig. 12.3a shows a glass ornament standing on a shelf. Fig. 12.3b shows an identical
ornament filled with coloured glass beads.

State which ornament is more stable, and why.


..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 12.4 shows two wooden blocks standing on a hinged board with a rough surface.

B
A

rough
surface

Fig. 12.4
The board is slowly tilted. The blocks do not slip. State which block falls over first, and
explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

UCLES 2004

0625/02 O/N/04

For
Examiners
Use

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2

May/June 2005
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

For Examiners Use


If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if
provided.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.


SPA (MML 8112 3/04) S80361/3
UCLES 2005

[Turn over

2
1

For
Examiner's
Use

(a) A measuring cylinder contains 100 cm3 of water. 20 cm3 of the water is poured into a
beaker.
On Fig. 1.1, mark the level of the water left in the cylinder.

[2]

cm3
100

50

Fig. 1.1
(b) A rule, calibrated in cm, is placed alongside the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
15

100

10
50
5

Fig. 1.2
(i) What is the length of the measuring cylinder, from zero up to the 100 cm3 mark?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The volume of a cylinder is found using the equation
volume = cross-sectional area length.
Calculate the cross-sectional area of the measuring cylinder.

cross-sectional area = .................................


[5]
UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

3
2

A boat sails along a river, stopping at various places along the way. Fig. 2.1 shows how the
speed of the boat changes during the day, starting at 0900 hrs and reaching its final
destination at 2100 hrs.

For
Examiner's
Use

speed

0
0900

1100

1300

1500

1700
1900
2100
time of day (24 -hour clock)

Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate how long the whole journey takes.

time taken = ....................... hours [2]


(b) State the time of day at which the boat reaches its greatest speed.
time of day = ................................. [1]
(c) State the longest time for which the boat was stationary at one place.
longest time = ....................... hours [1]
(d) If the speed axis had values marked on it, state
(i) how the graph could be used to find the distance travelled between 0900 hrs and
1130 hrs,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the average speed for the whole journey could be found.
..................................................................................................................................

UCLES 2005

..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Turn
over
0625/02/M/J/05

4
3

(a) A light vertical triangular piece of rigid plastic PQR is pivoted at corner P.
A horizontal 5 N force acts at Q, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
Q
5N
P
pivot
R
Fig. 3.1
Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On another occasion, two horizontal 5 N forces act on the piece of plastic, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
Q
5N
P
pivot
R

5N

Fig. 3.2
(i)

Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic.


..................................................................................................................................

(ii)

UCLES 2005

On Fig. 3.2, mark the force that the pivot exerts on the piece of plastic. Show the
direction of the force by means of an arrow and write the magnitude of the force
next to the arrow.
[4]

0625/02/M/J/05

For
Examiner's
Use

5
4

For
Examiner's
Use

Fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electricity.

reservoir
power
station

water flows down

water flows out

Fig. 4.1
Answer the following questions, using words from this list.
chemical
kinetic

electrical
light

gravitational
nuclear

sound

internal (heat)
strain

(a) What sort of energy, possessed by the water in the reservoir, is the main source of
energy for this system?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the water flows down the pipe, it is moving. What sort of energy does it possess
because of this movement?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The water makes the turbines in the power station rotate. What sort of energy do the
turbines possess because of their rotation?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) What sort of energy does the power station generate?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) None of the energy transfer processes is perfect. In what form is most of the wasted
energy released?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

[Turn over

6
5

(a) On a hot day, a child drinks all the water in a plastic bottle. She then screws the cap
back tightly on the bottle, so that the bottle contains only air.
cap screwed on tightly

air

Fig. 5.1
She throws the bottle into a waste basket, where the Sun shines on it.
After a while in the Suns rays, the air in the bottle is much hotter than before.
(i) State what has happened to the pressure of the air in the bottle.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

For
Examiner's
Use

7
(b) Also in the waste basket is a broken glass bottle containing a small quantity of water, as
shown in Fig. 5.2.

For
Examiner's
Use

water
Fig. 5.2
As the Sun shines on it, the volume of water slowly decreases.
(i) State the name of the process causing this decrease.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the effect of the Suns rays on the water molecules, explain your answer
to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

[Turn over

8
6

The table below shows the potential difference (p.d.) needed at different times during a day
to cause a current of 0.03 A in a particular thermistor.
time of day (24-hour clock)

0900

1200

p.d. / V

15.0

9.9

resistance / 

500

1500

1800
7.5

210

250

(a) Calculate the two values missing from the table. You may use the space below for your
working. Write your answers in the table.

[3]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, plot the four resistance values.
600
resistance / 
400

200

0
0600

0900

1200

1500

1800

2100

time of day
Fig. 6.1
(c)

[2]

(i) Draw a smooth curve through your points.


(ii) Why do we draw a smooth curve rather than a series of straight lines joining the
points?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

For
Examiner's
Use

9
(d) The thermistor is a circuit component with a resistance that decreases as the temperature
increases.

For
Examiner's
Use

(i) From your graph, estimate the time of day when the temperature was greatest.
time of day = .............................
(ii) State the reason for your answer to (d)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

[Turn over

10
7

For
Examiner's
Use

Fig. 7.1 shows the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

radio

visible

Fig. 7.1
Two of the regions have been labelled.
(a) In the boxes provided, write the names of the other regions.

[4]

(b) Only one of the following types of wave is not an electromagnetic wave.
Tick one box to show which type of wave is not electromagnetic.
microwave
radar
sound

UCLES 2005

[1]

0625/02/M/J/05

11
8

An inventor is trying to make a device to enable him to see objects behind him. He cuts a
square box in half diagonally and sticks two plane mirrors on the inside of the box.

For
Examiner's
Use

A side view of the arrangement is shown in Fig. 8.1.


mirror

box cut
in half
mirror
Fig. 8.1
Fig. 8.2 shows the arrangement, drawn larger.

ray 1 from object


ray 2 from object
45

90

Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.2 shows parallel rays from two different points on a distant object behind the man.
(a) Carefully continue the two rays until they reach the place where the inventors head will
be.
[3]
(b) Look at what has happened to the two rays.
What can be said about the image the inventor sees?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

[Turn over

12
9

The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. A man stands 249 m from a large flat wall, as shown in
Fig. 9.1, and claps his hands once.

woman

man

249 m

249 m
Fig. 9.1

(a) Calculate the interval between the time when the man claps his hands and the time
when he hears the echo from the wall.

time interval = ........................... s [3]


(b) A woman is standing 249 m further away from the wall than the man. She hears the
clap twice, once directly and once after reflection from the wall.
How long after the man claps does she hear these two sounds? Tick two boxes.
0.75 s
1.50 s
2.25 s
3.00 s

UCLES 2005

[2]

0625/02/M/J/05

For
Examiner's
Use

13
10 (a)

(i) What name do we give to the type of material that allows electrical charges to pass
through it?

For
Examiner's
Use

..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) What must be done to this type of material in order to make electrical charges pass
through it?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b)

(i) What name do we give to the type of material that does not allow electrical
charges to pass through it?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Which of the two types of material in (a)(i) and (b)(i) may be held in the hand and
charged by friction (e.g. by rubbing with a soft cloth)?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

[Turn over

14

For
Examiner's
Use

11 The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is connected up.

2
resistance wire
Fig. 11.1
(a) How does the current in the resistance wire compare with the current in the 2 
resistor? Tick one box.
smaller

same

greater

[1]

(b) A voltmeter connected across the resistance wire shows the same reading as a
voltmeter connected across the 2  resistor.
State the value of the resistance of the resistance wire.
........................................  [1]
(c) Calculate the combined resistance of the wire and the resistor.

combined resistance = ........................................  [2]


(d) The wire and resistor are disconnected and then reconnected in parallel, as shown in
Fig. 11.2.

resistance wire

2
Fig. 11.2
UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

15
(i) What is the combined resistance of the wire and resistor in Fig.11.2? Tick one box.

For
Examiner's
Use

zero
1
2
3
(ii) The ammeter in Fig. 11.1 reads 0.3 A. What is the reading on the ammeter in
Fig. 11.2? Tick one box.
zero
less than 0.3 A
0.3 A
more than 0.3 A
[2]
(e) Walls in buildings sometimes develop cracks. The width of a crack can be monitored by
measuring the resistance of a thin wire stretched across the crack and firmly fixed on
either side of the crack, as illustrated in Fig. 11.3.

thin wire

fixing pin
fixing pin
crack

Fig. 11.3
The wall moves and the crack widens slightly.
State what happens to
(i) the length of the wire, ...............................................................................................
(ii) the resistance of the wire. ........................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

[Turn over

16
12 (a) Complete the following table about the particles in an atom. The first row has been filled
in as an example.
particle
proton

mass

charge

location

1 unit

+1 unit

in the nucleus

For
Examiner's
Use

neutron
electron
[6]
(b)

(i) Which of the particles in the table make up an -particle?


..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On the same scale as indicated by the table, state
1.

the mass of an -particle, .................................................................................

2.

the charge of an -particle. ...............................................................................


[3]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2005

0625/02/M/J/05

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

October/November 2005
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

For Examiners Use


If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if
provided.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.


MML 8113 3/04 S80925/2
UCLES 2005

[Turn over

2
1

The length of a spring is measured when various loads from 1.0 N to 6.0 N are hanging
from it. Fig. 1.1 gives a graph of the results.

25

20
length / cm

15

10

0
0

5
load / N

Fig. 1.1
Use the graph to find
(a) the length of the spring with no load attached,
length = ......................... cm [1]
(b) the length of the spring with 4.5 N attached,
length = ......................... cm [1]
(c) the extension caused by a 4.5 N load.

extension = ................... cm [2]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

For
Examiner's
Use

3
2

For
Examiner's
Use

Palm trees are growing every 25 m alongside the highway in a holiday resort.
1

IGCSE

Fig. 2.1
The IGCSE school bus drives along the highway.
(a) It takes 2 s for the bus to travel between palm tree 1 and palm tree 2.
Calculate the average speed of the bus between tree 1 and tree 2.

average speed = .......................... [4]


(b) It takes more than 2 s for the bus to travel from tree 2 to tree 3.
State what this information indicates about the speed of the bus.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The speed of the bus continues to do what you have said in (b). State how the time
taken to go from tree 3 to tree 4 compares with the time in (b).
The time taken to travel from tree 3 to tree 4 is ............................................. the time to
travel from tree 2 to tree 3.
[1]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

[Turn over

4
3

(a) Fig. 3.1 shows two examples of footwear being worn by people of equal weight at a
Winter Olympics competition.

skate
ski

Fig. 3.1
Which footwear creates the greatest pressure below it, and why?
Which? .............................................................................................................................
Why? .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Drivers of high-sided vehicles, like the one in Fig. 3.2, are sometimes warned not to
drive when it is very windy.

Fig. 3.2
Suggest why they receive this warning.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

For
Examiner's
Use

5
4

For
Examiner's
Use

A man is delivering a cupboard to a house.

house

step

wheels
Fig. 4.1

(a) The man rolls the cupboard at a steady speed from the lorry to the house. The friction
force in the wheels is 40 N. State the force with which the man has to push.
force = .................... N [1]
(b) The cupboard weighs 720 N. State the smallest force needed to lift the cupboard.
force = .................... N [1]
(c) The step is 0.20 m high. Calculate the work required to lift the cupboard onto the step.

work required = ..................................... [4]


(d) The man has to ask his assistant to help him lift the cupboard onto the step. Together,
they lift it onto the step in 1.2 s. The men work equally hard.
Calculate the power developed by each man.

power developed = ................................ [4]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

[Turn over

6
5

The apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1 is set up in a laboratory during a morning science lesson.

flask

air

clamp

tube

water

Fig. 5.1
Later in the day, the room temperature is higher than in the morning.
(a) What change is observed in the apparatus?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why this change happens.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Suggest one disadvantage of using this apparatus to measure temperature.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

For
Examiner's
Use

7
6

Fig. 6.1 shows a reed relay being used to switch on an electric motor when a variable
resistor is adjusted.

For
Examiner's
Use

power
supply

reed
relay

S
variable resistor
Fig. 6.1

(a) The variable resistor is set at its greatest resistance and then switch S is closed. The
reeds in the reed relay do not close when this is done.
(i) State two things that happen in the coil of the reed relay.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State what happens to the two reeds in the reed relay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is slowly decreased. The reeds in the reed relay
close. Fig. 6.2(a) shows how the current in the coil changes with time.

current
in
coil

Fig. 6.2(a)

0
0

time

current
in
motor

Fig. 6.2(b)

0
0

time

On Fig. 6.2(b), draw a line that might show how the current in the motor changes with
time as the variable resistor is adjusted.
[4]
UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

[Turn over

8
7

For
Examiner's
Use

(a) The filament of a lamp is placed at the principal focus of a lens, as shown in Fig. 7.1.

Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, continue the three rays through the lens and out into the air on the right of
the lens.
[1]
(b) The lens in Fig. 7.2 has a focal length of 2.0 cm.

object

1 cm

1 cm
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2,
(i) mark and label the positions of the principal focus on the left of the lens and the
principal focus on the right of the lens,
[1]
(ii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the axis, through the lens
and continue it until it reaches the edge of the squared area,
[1]
(iii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, which travels parallel to the axis
after it has passed through the lens,
[1]
(iv) draw and label the image.
UCLES 2005

[2]

0625/02/O/N/05

9
8

(a) Two magnets are laid on a bench. End A of an unidentified rod is held in turn above
one end of each magnet, with the results shown in Fig. 8.1.

A
S

bench

For
Examiner's
Use

A
N

south pole
lifted off
bench

north pole
lifted off
bench

Fig. 8.1
(i) Suggest what the unidentified rod is made from.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State what, if anything, happens when the end A is held over one end of
1.

an unmagnetised iron bar, ................................................................................

2.

an uncharged plastic rod. ........................................................................... [2]

(b) Fig. 8.2 shows four identical plotting compasses placed around a bar magnet where
the magnetic field of the surroundings can be ignored. The pointer has only been
drawn on one plotting compass.

Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pointers on the other three plotting compasses to indicate the
directions of the magnetic field of the bar magnet in those three places.
[3]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

[Turn over

10
9

(a) Fig. 9.1 shows five circuit symbols and their names. The names are in the wrong order.
Draw a straight line from each symbol to its name. One line has been drawn as an
example.

cell

lamp

ammeter

voltmeter

switch

Fig. 9.1
[3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a circuit.
ammeter 1

switch
lamp 2

lamp 1

cell

1.5

ammeter 2

Fig. 9.2

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

For
Examiner's
Use

11
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit using circuit symbols.

[1]

For
Examiner's
Use

(ii) On your diagram in (b)(i), add a voltmeter connected to measure the potential
difference across the cell.
[1]
(iii) When the switch is pressed so that the contacts join, which of the lamps light up?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) When there is a current in the circuit, ammeter 1 reads 0.5 A.
What current does ammeter 2 read?
current = .................... A [1]
(v) One lamp blows, so that its filament breaks.
What happens in the circuit?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

[Turn over

12
10 Some fat purchased from a shop is supplied as the block shown in Fig. 10.1.

10 cm

4 cm

6.5 cm

Fig. 10.1
Use the information in Fig. 10.1 to calculate
(a) the volume of the block,

volume = ...................... cm3 [2]


(b) the density of the fat. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.

density = ............................. [5]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

For
Examiner's
Use

13

For
Examiner's
Use

11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays. The tube contains various parts.
B

C
D

A
Fig. 11.1
A spot is formed on the screen by the cathode rays.
(a) What do cathode rays consist of? .............................................................................. [1]
(b) Which part, A, B, C or D, must be heated to create the cathode rays? ..................... [1]
(c)

(i) Which part, A, B, C or D, is coated with fluorescent material? ........................... [1]


(ii) What is the purpose of the fluorescent material?
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(d) A potential difference is applied between the two halves of part C.


What effect does this have on the cathode rays?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Explain why there needs to be a vacuum inside the tube.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

[Turn over

14

For
Examiner's
Use

12 (a) State what is meant by


(i) the half-life of a radioactive substance,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) In a certain laboratory, the background radiation level is 25 counts/minute.
Fig. 12.1 is a graph of the count-rate measured by a detector placed a short distance
from a radioactive source in the laboratory.
80

70
count-rate
counts / min
60

50

40

30

20

10

0
0

20

40

60

80

100
time / min

Fig. 12.1
UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

120

140

15
(i) At zero time, the measured count-rate of the source and background together is
80 counts/minute.
Calculate the count-rate due to the source alone.

count-rate due to source = .................. counts/min [2]


(ii) After one half-life has elapsed, what is the count-rate
1.

due to the source alone,

count-rate due to source = ................. counts/min


2.

measured by the detector?

count-rate measured by detector = ........................ counts/min


[2]
(iii) Use the graph to find the half-life of the source.
half-life of source = ......................... min [1]
(iv) Why does the graph not drop below the 25 counts/minute line?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might be obtained for a source with a shorter
half-life.
[2]

UCLES 2005

0625/02/O/N/05

For
Examiner's
Use

16
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.

0625/02/O/N/05

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

May/June 2006
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

For Examiners Use

This document consists of 16 printed pages.


MML 10757 3/05 S99216/2
UCLES 2006

[Turn over

2
1

(a) For a special parade, the guest of honour is to sit on a chair whilst the parade passes
by. Unfortunately the ground beneath the chair is soft, so the parade organisers put the
chair on a large flat board, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
chair
board

soft
ground

Fig. 1.1
Explain why the board prevents the chair from sinking into the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) At the parade, some air-filled balloons are used as decorations, as shown in Fig. 1.2.

Fig. 1.2
(i) State what happens to the balloons when the Sun makes them hotter.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

For
Examiner's
Use

3
(c) A pump is used to pump up the balloons in (b). A valve in the pump becomes blocked,
as shown in Fig. 1.3.

blocked
valve

air

For
Examiner's
Use

piston

direction of motion of piston


Fig. 1.3
(i) The piston of the pump is pushed in. State what happens to the pressure of the air
trapped in the pump.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[Turn over

4
2

For
Examiner's
Use

Fig. 2.1 is a full-size diagram of a rectangular block.

C
B
Fig. 2.1
(a) Use your rule to measure the lengths of the three sides AB, BC and CD. Write your
values below, in cm, to 2 significant figures.
length of AB = ......................... cm
length of BC = ......................... cm
length of CD = ........................ cm [2]
(b) Write down the equation you would use to calculate the volume of the block. Do not
attempt a calculation.

[1]
(c) If you used your values from (a), what would be the unit for the volume of the block?
unit of volume = ........................... [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

5
3

For
Examiner's
Use

Fig. 3.1(a) shows a measuring cylinder, containing some water, on a balance.


Fig. 3.1(b) shows the same arrangement with a stone added to the water.
measuring
cylinder

reading Q

reading P
water
stone

balance

reading S

reading R
(a)

(b)
Fig. 3.1

(a) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the volume of the stone?
reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]
(b) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the mass of the stone?
reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]
(c) In a certain experiment,
mass of stone = 57.5 g,
volume of stone = 25 cm3.
(i) Write down the equation linking density, mass and volume.

[1]
(ii) Calculate the density of the stone.

density of stone = ........................ [3]


UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[Turn over

6
4

For
Examiner's
Use

A piece of fruit is falling from a tree.

Fig. 4.1
(a) The list below contains the names of some different forms of energy.
Put a tick in the box alongside four that are possessed by the falling fruit.
chemical
electrical
gravitational (PE)
internal (thermal)
kinetic (KE)
light
sound
strain

[4]

(b) Which form of energy increases as the fruit falls?


....................................................................

[1]

(c) Which form of energy decreases as the fruit falls?


....................................................................

[1]

(d) Which form of energy is stored in the body of a person as a result of eating the fruit?
....................................................................
UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[1]

7
5

(a) State two changes that usually happen to the molecules of a solid when the solid is
heated.

For
Examiner's
Use

1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Most substances expand when they are heated.
(i) State one example where such expansion is useful.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one example where such expansion is a nuisance, and has to be allowed for.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

Fig. 6.1 shows a section through a series of waves on water.

Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully mark and label
(i) the wavelength of the waves,

[2]

(ii) the level of the flat, still water surface after the waves have passed.

[2]

(b) Describe how, using a stopwatch, the frequency of the waves could be found.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[Turn over

8
7

For
Examiner's
Use

(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of blue light shining onto a glass prism.
screen
air
no

air

rm

al

of
ray ht
lig
blue

Fig. 7.1
With the aid of a straight edge, draw a possible path of the ray through the prism and
into the air until it reaches the screen.
[3]
(b) When a ray of white light passes through the prism, it spreads into a spectrum of
colours that can be seen on the screen.
(i) What is the name of this spreading effect? Tick one box.
convergence
diffraction
dispersion
reflection

[1]

(ii) Which colour is deviated least by the prism? ..................................................... [1]


(iii) Which colour is deviated most by the prism? ..................................................... [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

9
8

For
Examiner's
Use

(a) State what is meant by the north pole of a magnet.


..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The north poles of two magnets are brought close together.
What sort of force, if any, is there between the poles? Tick one box.
attractive
repulsive
no force

[1]

(c) Fig. 8.1 shows the north pole of a magnet close to an iron bar.

magnet

N
iron
bar

Fig. 8.1
(i) The iron bar is attracted to the north pole because of induced magnetism in the
iron bar.
On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the induced north pole and the induced south pole of the
iron bar.
[1]
(ii) State what happens to the induced magnetism in the iron bar when the magnet is
taken away.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[Turn over

10
9

(a) The table below gives the half-lives of three radioactive substances.

substance

half-life

iodine-128

25 minutes

radon-222

3.8 days

strontium-90

28 years

Samples of each of the three substances have the same activity today. Which sample
will have the greatest activity in 1 years time? Explain your answer.
substance with greatest activity after 1 year ....................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In 1986, an explosion at the Chernobyl nuclear power station released radioactive
substances into the air. One of the radioactive substances released was iodine-131.
Some of the iodine-131 found its way into cows milk.
The activity of a sample of this contaminated milk was measured each week for 4 weeks.
The results are shown below.
time / days
activity

counts / s

UCLES 2006

14

21

28

1000

547

294

162

88

0625/02/M/J/06

For
Examiner's
Use

11

For
Examiner's
Use

(i) On Fig. 9.1, plot the values given in the table.


1000

800
activity
_______
counts / s
600

400

200

0
0

10

15

20

25
time / days

30

Fig. 9.1
(ii) Draw the best-fit curve through your points.
(iii) Use your graph to find the half-life of iodine-131, showing clearly on your graph
how you obtained your value.
half-life of iodine-131 = ....................... days
[6]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[Turn over

12

For
Examiner's
Use

10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a type of tube in which cathode rays can be produced.
fluorescent
screen

anode

filament

A
B

D
Fig. 10.1
(i) A p.d. is connected between two terminals in order to cause thermionic emission.
Between which two of the four labelled terminals is the p.d. connected?
between point .................. and point .................... [1]
(ii) Where does the thermionic emission occur?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) What particles are emitted during thermionic emission? Tick one box.

-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons

[1]

(iv) On Fig. 10.1, draw the path of the cathode rays that are created when all the
electrical connections are correctly made.
[1]
(v) State what is seen when the cathode rays strike the fluorescent screen.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

13
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same tube as in Fig. 10.1, with two metal plates alongside the tube.
A high p.d. is connected between the plates.

For
Examiner's
Use

+V

V
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, draw the path of the cathode rays.

[3]

(c) The tube in Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 has a vacuum inside it.
State why this vacuum is necessary.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[Turn over

14

For
Examiner's
Use

11 Fig. 11.1 illustrates part of the journey of a car.

1000 m

500 m
start
of
town

end
of
town

oil drops
on road

1500 m
pylon

tree

Fig. 11.1
The car engine is leaking oil. Regularly, every 2.5 s, a drop of oil hits the road.
(a) The car is driven at a steady speed of 10 m/s through the town.
(i) Calculate the distance on the road between one oil drop and the next oil drop.

distance between oil drops = ................... m [2]


(ii) The town is 500 m across. Show that it takes the car 50 s to travel through the
town.

[3]
(b) At a distance of 1000 m outside the town, the car passes a tree. At a further distance of
1500 m, the car passes a pylon. Between the tree and the pylon the oil drops are all
75 m apart.
Calculate the speed of the car between the tree and the pylon.

speed of car = ................ m/s [2]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

15

For
Examiner's
Use

(c) What has happened to the car between the end of the town and the tree?
Tick one box.
The car has accelerated.
The car has decelerated.
The car has travelled at constant speed.

[1]

(d) Each of the three parts of the journey takes 50 s.


Calculate the average speed of the car for the whole journey between the beginning of
the town and the pylon.

average speed = ................ m/s [5]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

[Turn over

16
12 In the boxes of the left column below are some electrical hazards. In the boxes of the right
column are means of protecting against those hazards.
From each hazard, draw a line to the appropriate protection. One line has been drawn as an
example.
electrical hazard

means of protection

loose live wire touches


metal case of appliance

fuse or circuit-breaker
in the circuit

worn insulation on cable


to an appliance

use of switches with


a nylon pull-cord

steam in a washroom
condenses inside a switch

earth wire connected to the


metal case of the appliance

wires get hot because


current is too high

visual check of cables


before connecting appliance
[3]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2006

0625/02/M/J/06

For
Examiner's
Use

Centre Number

Candidate Number

Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

October/November 2006
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST


Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

For Examiners Use

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.


MML 10757 3/05 S99316/2
UCLES 2006

[Turn over

2
1

A worker on the production line in a factory is making brackets. An inspector times the
worker whilst he makes 5 brackets. To start, the stopwatch is set to zero.
After 5 brackets have been made, the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.

55

60

50

10
50

45

40

60

30

10
20

40

15

20
35

30

25

Fig. 1.1
(a) State the reading on the stopwatch.
reading = .......................... s [1]
(b) Calculate the time taken to make 1 bracket.

time taken = .......................... s [2]


(c) The worker has a target of making 300 brackets per hour.
Does the worker meet his target? Tick one box and show the working which led you to
your answer.

Does the worker meet his target?

Yes
No

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

[4]

For
Examiner's
Use

3
2

For
Examiner's
Use

Some IGCSE students were asked to write statements about mass and weight.
Their statements are printed below. Put a tick in the box alongside each of the two correct
statements.
Mass and weight are the same thing.
Mass is measured in kilograms.
Weight is a type of force.
Weight is the acceleration caused by gravity.

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

[2]

[Turn over

4
3

For
Examiner's
Use

Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a journey travelled by a tractor.

speed
m/s

4
2

P
O

S
0

50

170
time / s

100

200

Fig. 3.1
(a) Use the graph to describe the motion of the tractor during each of the marked sections.
OP ....................................................................................................................................
PQ ....................................................................................................................................
QR ...................................................................................................................................
RS .............................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Which two points on the graph show when the tractor is stationary?
point ................. and point ................. [1]
(c) State the greatest speed reached by the tractor.
greatest speed = ................ m/s [1]
(d) For how long was the tractor travelling at constant speed?
at constant speed for ................... s [1]
(e) State how the graph may be used to find the total distance travelled during the 200 s
journey. Do not attempt a calculation.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

5
4

For
Examiner's
Use

(a) Name the process by which thermal energy is transferred


(i) from the Sun to the Earth, ........................................................................................
(ii) through the metal of a cooking pot. ..........................................................................
[2]
(b) A child is sitting on an oscillating swing, as shown in Fig. 4.1. At the top of the
oscillation, the child and swing are momentarily at rest.

Fig. 4.1
(i) Use the names of appropriate types of energy to complete the following word
equation. Write on the lines in the boxes.

gravitational
potential energy
at the top of the
oscillation

.........................
energy at the
bottom of the
oscillation

.........................
energy at the
bottom of the
oscillation

energy losses

(ii) The child continues to sit still on the swing. The amplitude of the oscillations slowly
decreases.
Explain why this happens.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

[Turn over

6
5

For
Examiner's
Use

(a) State the two factors on which the turning effect of a force depends.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Forces F1 and F2 are applied vertically downwards at the ends of a beam resting on a
pivot P. The beam has weight W. The beam is shown in Fig. 5.1.

F1

F2

Fig. 5.1
(i) Complete the statements about the two requirements for the beam to be in
equilibrium.
1. There must be no resultant ..................................................
2. There must be no resultant ..................................................
(ii) The beam in Fig. 5.1 is in equilibrium. F is the force exerted on the beam by the
pivot P.
Complete the following equation about the forces on the beam.

F = ....................................................
(iii) Which one of the four forces on the beam does not exert a moment about P?
...................................................
[4]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

7
6

A woman stands so that she is 1.0 m from a mirror mounted on a wall, as shown in Fig. 6.1.

For
Examiner's
Use

mirror

1.0 m
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully draw
(i) a clear dot to show the position of the image of her eye,
(ii) the normal to the mirror at the bottom edge of the mirror,
(iii) a ray from her toes to the bottom edge of the mirror and then reflected from the
mirror.
[5]
(b) Explain why the woman cannot see the reflection of her toes.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c)

(i) How far is the woman from her image?


............................ m
(ii) How far must the woman walk, and in what direction, before the distance between
her and her image is 6.0 m?

distance walked = ............................ m


direction = ............................................
[4]
UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

[Turn over

8
7

A man is using an axe to chop down a tree, as shown in Fig. 7.1.

Fig. 7.1
(a) A short time after the axe hits the tree, the man hears a clear echo.
He estimates that the echo is heard 3 seconds after the axe hits the tree.
(i) Suggest what type of obstacle might have caused such a clear echo.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s.
Calculate the distance of the obstacle from the tree.

obstacle distance = ............................ m


[4]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

For
Examiner's
Use

9
(b) A branch from the tree falls into some shallow water in a pond nearby. The branch sets
up a wave. The wave moves to the left a distance of 3.0 m before hitting the side of a
moored boat and reflecting back again.

For
Examiner's
Use

water
wave
B

side of
boat

3.0 m
A
Fig. 7.2

The wave takes 5.0 s to travel from AB to the boat and back to AB.
Calculate the speed of the water-wave.

speed of wave = ......................... m/s [2]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

[Turn over

10
8

For
Examiner's
Use

(a) Fig. 8.1 shows two groups of materials.

GROUP 1

GROUP 2

copper

plastics
iron

silk

gold

glass
aluminium

ebonite
Fig. 8.1

(i) Which group contains metals?


...................................................
(ii) Which group contains insulators?
...................................................
(iii) Write down the name of one of the eight materials above that may be charged by
rubbing it with a suitable dry cloth.
...................................................
[3]
(b) Two charged metal balls are placed close to a positively-charged metal plate.
One is attracted to the plate and one is repelled.

attracted to plate

charged
plate
repelled by plate

Fig. 8.2
Write a + sign on the ball that is positively charged and a sign on the one that is
negatively charged.
[1]
(c) State what is meant by an electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

11
9

The points plotted on the grid shown in Fig. 9.1 were obtained from a spring-stretching
experiment.

For
Examiner's
Use

100
length / mm
80

60

40

20

0
0

load / N
Fig. 9.1
(a) Using a straight edge, draw a straight line through the first 5 points. Extend your line to
the edge of the grid.
[1]
(b) Suggest a reason why the sixth point does not lie on the line you have drawn.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the extension caused by the 3 N load.

extension = ...................... mm [2]


(d) A small object is hung on the unloaded spring, and the length of the spring becomes
62 mm.
Use the graph to find the weight of the object.
weight of object = ......................... N [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

[Turn over

12
10 A person has a 6 V bell. He hopes to operate the bell from a 240 V a.c. mains supply, with
the help of the transformer shown in Fig. 10.1.

240 V
a.c.
input

primary coil
5000 turns

output

secondary coil
250 turns
Fig. 10.1

(a) State how you can tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State how the output voltage compares with the input voltage in a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer when connected to the 240 V mains
supply.

output voltage = .................... V [3]


(d) Why would it not be wise for the person to connect the 6 V bell to this output?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

For
Examiner's
Use

13

For
Examiner's
Use

11 The table below contains some information about uranium-238.

proton number Z = 92
nucleon number A = 238
decays by emitting -particle

(a) State how many electrons there are in a neutral atom of uranium-238.
........................................

[1]

(b) State where in the atom the electrons are to be found.


........................................

[1]

(c) State how many neutrons there are in an atom of uranium-238.


........................................

[1]

(d) State where in the atom the neutrons are to be found.


........................................

[1]

(e) State what happens to the number of protons in an atom of uranium-238 when an
-particle is emitted.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

[Turn over

14

For
Examiner's
Use

12 Fig. 12.1 shows an electric circuit.

ammeter
battery

lamp

15  resistor
Fig. 12.1
(a) The lamp lights, but the ammeter needle moves the wrong way.
What change should be made so that the ammeter works correctly?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What does an ammeter measure?
.............................................................................

[1]

(c) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the circuit in Fig. 12.1, using correct circuit
symbols.

[2]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

15
(d)

(i) Name the instrument that would be needed to measure the potential difference
(p.d.) across the 15  resistor.
.............................................................
(ii) Using the correct symbol, add this instrument to your circuit diagram in (c), in a
position to measure the p.d. across the 15  resistor.
[2]

(e) The potential difference across the 15  resistor is 6 V.


Calculate the current in the resistor.

current = .................... A [3]


(f)

Without any further calculation, state the value of the current in the lamp.
lamp current = .................... A [1]

(g) Another 15  resistor is connected in parallel with the 15  resistor that is already in the
circuit.
(i) What is the combined resistance of the two 15  resistors in parallel?
Tick one box.
30 
15 
7.5 
zero
(ii) State what effect, if any, adding this extra resistor has on the current in the lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

UCLES 2006

0625/02/O/N/06

For
Examiner's
Use

16
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.

0625/02/O/N/06

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*8187295232*

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiners Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SPA (MML 13116 3/06) T25803/4
UCLES 2007

[Turn over

2
1

The mechanical stop-clock shown in Fig. 1.1 has

and

For
Examiners
Use

a seconds hand, which rotates once every minute


a minutes hand, which rotates once every hour.

start
55

reset
60

stop
5
10

50

minutes hand

15

45

seconds hand
20

40
35

30

25

Fig. 1.1
(a) A student uses the clock to time the intervals between trains travelling along the railway
past his school.
He sets the clock to zero (both hands vertical).
As train 1 passes, he starts the clock and leaves it running.
After 35 s, train 2 passes.
On the blank face of Fig. 1.2, show the positions of the two hands of the clock as train 2
passes. Make sure it is clear which hand is which.
[2]

55

60
5
10

50

15

45

20

40
35

30

25

Fig. 1.2

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

3
(b) Train 3 passes the school 4 minutes and 55 s after the clock was started.
On the blank face of Fig. 1.3, show the positions of the hands of the clock as train 3
passes.
[2]

55

60
5
10

50

15

45

20

40
35

25

30
Fig. 1.3

(c) Calculate the time interval between train 2 and train 3.

time interval = ............... min ............... s [1]


[Total: 5]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

4
2

In a training session, a racing cyclists journey is in three stages.


Stage 1

He accelerates uniformly from rest to 12 m/s in 20 s.

Stage 2

He cycles at 12 m/s for a distance of 4800 m.

Stage 3

He decelerates uniformly to rest.

For
Examiners
Use

The whole journey takes 500 s.


(a) Calculate the time taken for stage 2.

time = ............... s [2]


(b) On the grid of Fig. 2.1, draw a speed/time graph of the cyclists ride.
14
12
speed /
m/s

10
8
6
4
2
0
0

100

200

300

400

500
time / s

Fig. 2.1

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[3]

5
(c) Show that the total distance travelled by the cyclist is 5400 m.

For
Examiners
Use

[4]
(d) Calculate the average speed of the cyclist.

average speed = ............... m/s [2]


[Total: 11]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

6
3

A piece of stiff cardboard is stuck to a plank of wood by means of two sticky-tape hinges.
This is shown in Fig. 3.1.
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape hinge
A

plank of
wood

Fig. 3.1
(a) The cardboard is lifted as shown, using a force applied either at A or B or C.
(i)

On Fig. 3.1, draw the force in the position where its value will be as small as
possible.
[2]

(ii)

Explain why the position you have chosen in (a)(i) results in the smallest force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) Initially, the cardboard is flat on the plank of wood. A box of matches is placed on it. The
cardboard is then slowly raised at the left hand edge, as shown in Fig. 3.2.

stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape hinge
plank of
wood

Fig. 3.2
State the condition for the box of matches to fall over.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

For
Examiners
Use

7
(c) The box of matches is opened, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The procedure in (b) is repeated.

stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape hinge
plank of
wood

Fig. 3.3
(i)

Complete the sentence below, using either the words greater than or the same
as or less than.
In Fig. 3.3, the angle through which the cardboard can be lifted before
the box of matches falls is the angle
before the box of matches falls in Fig. 3.2.

(ii)

[1]

Give a reason for your answer to (c)(i).


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

8
4

In Fig. 4.1, a small bird, a large bird and a squirrel are on the ground under a tree.

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 4.1
A loud noise scares the two birds. They both fly up to the top of the tree.
(a) (i)
(ii)

Which bird does the most work raising itself to the top of the tree? ................... [1]
Explain your answer to (a)(i).
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) A squirrel has the same weight as the large bird. It climbs the tree, to the same height
as the birds.
How does the increase in the squirrels gravitational potential energy compare with that
of each of the two birds? Answer the question by completing the sentences below.
Compared with that of the small bird, the increase of the squirrels potential
energy is ................................................................. .
Compared with that of the large bird, the increase of the squirrels potential
energy is ................................................................. .

[2]

(c) Which creature has the least gravitational potential energy when they are at the top of
the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The small bird flies back down to the ground.
What happens to the gravitational potential energy it had at the top of the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

9
5

(a) Here is a list of descriptions of molecules in matter.


description

For
Examiners
Use

solid

gas

free to move around from place to place


can only vibrate about a fixed position
closely packed
relatively far apart
almost no force between molecules
strong forces are involved between molecules

In the columns alongside the descriptions, put ticks next to those which apply to the
molecules in
(i)

a solid,

(ii)

a gas.

[4]

(b) The water in a puddle of rainwater is evaporating.


Describe what happens to the molecules when the water evaporates.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

10
6

(a) Fig. 6.1 shows how the pressure of the gas sealed in a container varies during a period
of time.

pressure

time
Fig. 6.1
Which of the following statements could explain this variation of pressure?
Tick two statements.
The temperature of the gas is increasing.
The temperature of the gas is decreasing.
The volume of the container is increasing.
The volume of the container is decreasing.

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[2]

For
Examiners
Use

11
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows some gas trapped in a cylinder with a movable piston.
cylinder

For
Examiners
Use

piston

gas

Fig. 6.2
The temperature of the gas is raised.
(i)

State what must happen to the piston, if anything, in order to keep the pressure of
the gas constant.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

State your reasons for your answer to (b)(i).


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

12
7

An electric soldering iron is used to melt solder, for joining wires in an electric circuit. A
soldering iron is shown in Fig. 7.1.

copper tip

metal cylinder
with heater coil
inside

plastic handle

lead to
electricity
supply
Fig. 7.1
Solder is a metal which melts easily. The heater coil inside the metal cylinder heats the
copper tip.
(a) (i)

Suggest why the tip is made of copper.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

Suggest why the handle is made of plastic.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) The heater coil is switched on. When the tip is put in contact with the solder, some of the
heat is used to melt the solder.
(i)

State the process by which the heat is transferred from the copper tip to the solder.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

By which process or processes is the rest of the heat transferred to the surroundings?
Tick the boxes alongside any of the following (you may tick as many as you think
are correct).
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation

UCLES 2007

[2]

0625/02/M/J/07

For
Examiners
Use

13
(c) A short time after switching on the soldering iron, it reaches a steady temperature, even
though the heater coil is constantly generating heat.
The soldering iron is rated at 40 W.
What is the rate at which heat is being lost from the soldering iron? Tick one box.
greater than 40 W
equal to 40 W
less than 40 W

[1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

14
8

A square wooden block is made to rotate 3000 times per minute. A springy metal strip presses
against the block, as shown in Fig. 8.1. A person nearby observes what is happening.

3000 rotations / minute

springy
metal strip

Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate how many times per second the block rotates.

number of rotations per second = ....................... [1]


(b) Calculate the frequency of the sound caused by this arrangement.

frequency = ................ Hz [2]


(c) State whether or not this sound could be heard by the person nearby, and give a reason
for your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

For
Examiners
Use

15
9

(a) Fig. 9.1 shows two resistors connected to a 6 V battery.

For
Examiners
Use

2
6V

X
10
Y
Fig. 9.1

(i)

What name do we use to describe this way of connecting resistors?


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.

combined resistance = ..................  [1]


(iii)

Calculate the current in the circuit.

current = ...................... [4]


(iv)

Use your answer to (a)(iii) to calculate the potential difference across the 10 
resistor.

potential difference = .................. V [2]


(v)

State the potential difference between terminals X and Y.


.................. V [1]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

16
(b) The circuit in Fig. 9.2 is similar to the circuit in Fig. 9.1, but it uses a resistor AB with a
sliding contact.

A
sliding
contact
6V

Fig. 9.2
(i)

(ii)

State the potential difference between X and Y when the sliding contact is at
1.

end A of the resistor,

.............. V

2.

end B of the resistor.

.............. V

[2]

The sliding contact of the resistor AB is moved so that the potential difference
between X and Y is 5 V.
On Fig. 9.2, mark with the letter C the position of the sliding contact.

[1]
[Total: 12]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

For
Examiners
Use

17
10 Your teacher gives you a length of wire, a sensitive millivoltmeter and a powerful magnet. You
are asked to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the wire.
(a) Describe what you would do.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) How would you know that an e.m.f. has been induced?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Name a device which makes use of electromagnetic induction.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a bar magnet on a board in a region where the magnetic field of the
surroundings is so weak it can be ignored. The letters N and S show the positions of the
north and south poles of the magnet. Also on the diagram are marked four dots.

Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw four magnetic field lines, one passing through each of the
four dots. The lines you draw should begin and end either on the magnet or at the edge
of the board.
[5]
(b) On one of your lines, put an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field.

[1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

For
Examiners
Use

19
12 Three particles you have learned about are

For
Examiners
Use

protons, neutrons and electrons.


(a) How many of each of these particles
(i)

are found in an -particle,


number of protons

= ...................

number of neutrons = ...................


number of electrons = ...................
(ii)

[1]

are found in a -particle?


number of protons

= ...................

number of neutrons = ...................


number of electrons = ...................

[1]

(b) Sodium-24 can be represented as 24


11Na.
How many of each of these particles are there in a neutral atom of 24
11Na?
number of protons

= .....................

number of neutrons = .....................


number of electrons = .....................

[3]

(c) A nucleus of sodium-24 decays to become magnesium-24, by the emission of one


particle. The equation below describes this change.
The symbol yx  represents the emitted particle.
24Na
11

24 Mg
12

+ yx 

(i)

State the value of x.

....................

[1]

(ii)

State the value of y.

....................

[1]

(iii)

What type of particle is ? ....................

[1]
[Total: 8]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/M/J/07

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

0625/02/M/J/07

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*8902325113*

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

October/November 2007
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.

For Examiners Use


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

This document consists of 16 printed pages.


SP (MML 13331 4/06) T25940/5
UCLES 2007

[Turn over

2
1

Fig. 1.1 shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The metal can next to it has a crosssectional area which is four times that of the measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
measuring
cylinder

90
80
70
60
metal
can

50
40
liquid

30
20
10

Fig. 1.1
(a) State the volume of the liquid.
volume = ........................................ cm3 [1]
(b) The liquid is poured into the metal can.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the surface of the liquid in the can.

[2]

(c) Complete the following sentence.


The pressure of the water at the bottom of the can is than
the pressure that the water had at the bottom of the measuring cylinder.
[1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

A theatre measures 100 m 80 m 25 m. The air inside it has a density of 1.3 kg / m3 when it
is cool.

For
Examiners
Use

(a) Calculate the volume of the air in the theatre.

volume of air = .......................................... m3 [1]


(b) Calculate the mass of the air. State the equation you are using.

mass of air = ................................................ [4]


(c) Some time after the doors are opened, the heating in the theatre is switched on.
State and explain what happens to the mass of the air in the theatre as it warms up.
statement .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the temperature of the air in the balcony of the theatre (nearer the ceiling)
is likely to be greater than that lower down in the theatre.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

4
3

Fig. 3.1 shows a simple mercury barometer, drawn 1/10 full size.

glass tube

mercury

reservoir

Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to make an appropriate measurement, and then use it to
calculate the atmospheric pressure.

atmospheric pressure = ..................................... cm Hg [2]


(b) State what occupies the space in the tube above the mercury.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

5
(c) On another occasion, the atmospheric pressure is much less than that shown in
Fig. 3.1.

For
Examiners
Use

On Fig. 3.1, mark where the mercury surfaces in the tube and in the reservoir might
be.
[2]
(d) The tube above the mercury gets broken and allows air to move in to and out of the
tube.
Explain why the barometer no longer functions.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

6
4

A diesel engine is used to drag a boat up a slipway (see Fig. 4.1).


diesel
engine

slipway
s
h

Fig. 4.1
The boat finishes in the position shown by the broken outline.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, carefully mark
(i)

the weight W of the boat, using an arrow labelled W,

[1]

(ii)

the friction force F on the boat, using an arrow labelled F.

[1]

(b) State, in terms of W, F, h and s, how you could calculate


(i)

the work done lifting the weight of the boat,


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

the work done against the friction force,


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii)

the total work done pulling the boat up the slipway.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(c) What other measurement would you need to make if you wanted to calculate the useful
power output of the diesel engine?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

For
Examiners
Use

7
5

Fig. 5.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.

capillary tube
10

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90 100 110 120 130 140 150

liquid
Fig. 5.1
(a) The thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in school laboratory experiments.
State the units in which the temperatures are measured. .......................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 5.1, mark where the liquid thread will reach when the thermometer is placed in
(i)

pure melting ice (label this point ICE),

[1]

(ii)

steam above boiling water (label this point STEAM).

[1]

(c) A liquid-in-glass thermometer makes use of the expansion of a liquid to measure


temperature. Other thermometers make use of other properties that vary with
temperature.
In the table below, write in two properties, other than expansion of a liquid, that can be
used to measure temperature.

example

expansion

OF

1.

OF

2.

OF

a liquid

[2]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

[Turn over

8
6

A motorcyclist drives along a straight road. Fig. 6.1 gives information about the first 10 s of
his ride.
start
0m/s

after 10 s
18 m / s

after 5 s
9m/s

Fig. 6.1
(a) From the information on Fig. 6.1,
(i)

describe the motion of the motorcyclist by ticking one of the following boxes,
constant speed
uniform acceleration
uniform deceleration
[1]

(ii)

estimate the average speed of the motorcyclist during the 10 s,

average speed = ........................................ m / s [1]


(iii)

calculate the distance travelled during the 10 s.

distance travelled = ............................................ m [2]


(b) State why the distance travelled in the first 5 s is less than half of the distance travelled
in the first 10 s of the journey.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

9
7

A girl drops a small stone from a bridge into a pond.

Fig. 7.1
(a) The stone hits the water surface at point X. Fig. 7.2, which is drawn full-size, shows the
wavefront a fraction of a second after the stone hits the water.
(i)

The wave travels at 5 cm / s.


Calculate how far the wave travels in 0.3 s.

distance travelled = .......................................... cm [1]


(ii)

On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of the wavefront 0.3 s after that already shown.

[2]

Fig. 7.2
(b) A ringing bell also sends out waves in all directions.
State two ways in which these waves are different from the waves in part (a), other than
the fact that one is created in air and the other in water.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

10
8

An object OX is placed in front of a converging lens. The lens forms an image IY.
Fig. 8.1 shows two rays from the object to the image.
X

I
O

Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1,
(i)

clearly mark and label the principal focus and the focal length of the lens,

[3]

(ii)

draw a third ray from X to Y.

[1]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

For
Examiners
Use

11
(b) The following list contains descriptions that can be applied to images.
Tick any which apply to the image shown in Fig. 8.1.
real
virtual
enlarged
diminished
inverted
upright
image distance less than object distance
image distance more than object distance
[4]
(c) State two things that happen to the image in Fig. 8.1 when the object is moved further
away from the lens.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

[Turn over

12
9

A thermistor connected to a variable voltage supply is immersed in a beaker of water.


The beaker of water is heated slowly, using a Bunsen burner, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
variable voltage supply

A
V

thermometer
water

Bunsen
burner
Fig. 9.1
At different temperatures, the voltage is adjusted until the current is 25 mA and the value of
the voltage is noted.
The results are shown below.
temperature / C
voltage / V

15

30

45

60

75

90

18.8

8.8

4.7

2.6

1.5

1.2

(a) On the axes of Fig. 9.2, shown on page 13, plot a graph of voltage against temperature.
[4]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

For
Examiners
Use

For
Examiners
Use

13
25
voltage / V
20

15

10

0
0

20

40

60

80

100

temperature / oC
Fig. 9.2
(b) From the graph, find the voltage needed to give a current of 25 mA
(i)

at 40 C,

voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]

(ii)

at 80 C.

voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]

(c) Use your results in (b) to calculate the resistance of the thermistor
(i)

at 40 C,

resistance at 40 C = .....................................................
(ii)

at 80 C.

resistance at 80 C = .....................................................
[5]
(d) Use your results in (c) to complete the following sentence about thermistors of the sort
used in this experiment.
The thermistor in this experiment is a device whose resistance
as the temperature increases.
[1]
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

14
10 A coil of insulated wire is connected in series with a battery, a resistor and a switch.

Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch is closed and the current in the coil creates a magnetic field.
(i)

On Fig. 10.1, draw the shape of the magnetic field, both inside and outside the coil.
[4]

(ii)

A glass bar, an iron bar and a perspex bar are placed in turn inside the coil.
Which one makes the field stronger? ................................................................. [1]

(b) Two thin iron rods are placed inside the coil as shown in Fig. 10.2. The switch is then
closed.

Fig. 10.2
The iron rods move apart. Suggest why this happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

15
11 The activity of a sample of radioactive material is determined every 10 minutes for an hour.
The results are shown in the table.
time / minutes
activity

10

20

30

40

50

60

461

332

229

162

106

81

51

For
Examiners
Use

count / s

(a) From the figures in the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.
half-life = .................................. minutes [1]
(b) A second experiment is carried out with another sample of the same material. At the
start of the experiment, this sample has twice the number of atoms as the first sample.
Suggest what values might be obtained for
(i)

the activity at the start of the second experiment,


................................... count / s [1]

(ii)

the half-life of the material in the second experiment.


................................... minutes [1]

(c) Name one type of particle that the material might be emitting in order to cause this
activity.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

[Turn over

16
12 A beam of cathode rays is travelling in a direction perpendicularly out of the page. The beam
is surrounded by four metal plates P1, P2, P3 and P4 as shown in Fig. 12.1.
On Fig. 12.1, the beam is shown as the dot at the centre.
P2
P1

P3
P4

Q
Fig. 12.1

(a) Cathode rays are produced by thermionic emission.


What is the name of the particles which make up cathode rays?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A potential difference is applied between P1 and P3, with P1 positive with respect to P3.
State what happens to the beam of cathode rays.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The potential difference in (b) is removed. Suggest how the beam of cathode rays can
now be deflected down the page towards Q.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Cathode rays are invisible. State one way to detect them.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2007

0625/02/O/N/07

For
Examiners
Use

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*3498617057*

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

May/June 2008
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).

For Examiners Use

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


SP (SLM/CGW) T41975/6
UCLES 2008

[Turn over

2
1

(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a uniform rod.

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 1.1
(i)

Use your rule to find the length of the rod.


length = ...........................................cm

(ii)

[1]

On Fig. 1.1, show the position of the centre of mass of the rod using the letter C.
[1]

(b) Fig. 1.2 shows another rod, of the same length as the previous one, but this rod is thicker
at one end.

Fig. 1.2
Use your judgement to mark with the letter M approximately where the centre of mass
of this rod will be.
[2]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

3
2

A motorcyclist is travelling along a country road, as shown in Fig. 2.1.

For
Examiners
Use

B
1375 m

Fig. 2.1
The statements below describe the motion of the motorcycle from point A to point B.
1.
2.
3.

The motorcycle accelerates uniformly from rest at point A, increasing its speed to
25 m/s in 10 s.
It then travels at a constant speed of 25 m/s for 40 s.
It then decelerates uniformly to rest at point B, 70 s after leaving point A.
35
30
speed
m/s 25
20
15
10
5
0

time/s
Fig. 2.2

(a) For the motorcycle moving from point A to point B, draw on Fig. 2.2,
(i)

a suitable time scale,

[1]

(ii)

the graph of the motion of the motorcycle.

[5]

(b) The distance from A to B is 1375 m.


Calculate the average speed of the motorcycle between A and B. Give your answer to
the nearest m/s.

UCLES 2008

average speed = ..........................................m/s [4]


[Total: 10]
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over

4
3

A beam is pivoted at its centre. Three forces, F1, F2 and F3, act on the beam as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
b

c
a

F1

F2

F3
Fig. 3.1

(a) Which of the forces exert(s)


a clockwise moment,

...................

an anticlockwise moment? ...................

[3]

(b) When the beam is released, the right-hand side of the beam starts to go down.
Which of the three distances, a, b or c, should be decreased in order to balance the
beam? Explain your answer.
Which distance? ..............................................................................................................
Explanation
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 3.2 represents a simple beam-balance with the pivot accurately at its centre.

?
Fig. 3.2
The person using the beam-balance puts the object to be weighed in the left-hand pan.
He has a selection of standard masses to put in the right-hand pan, but he finds he
cannot exactly balance the beam.
His best attempts are
masses used

effect

10 g, 10 g, 5 g, 2 g, 2 g

beam tips down slightly on the left-hand side

20 g, 10 g

beam tips down slightly on the right-hand side

Estimate the mass of the object.


mass = ............................................. g [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

For
Examiners
Use

5
4

(a) An electrician climbs up to the platform


of a special tower, in order to reach a
high-level spotlight, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
Which form of energy, possessed by the
electricians body,
(i)

is greater at the top of the tower than


it was at the bottom,
..................................................... [1]

(ii)

is less at the top of the tower than it


was at the bottom?
..................................................... [1]

(b) One of the electricians assistants also


climbs up to the platform. The assistant
weighs less than the electrician.
Which of the two people does the most
work climbing up to the platform, and
why?
Which person? ........................................
Why? .......................................................
.................................................................
.................................................................
............................................................. [1]

Fig. 4.1
(c) The electrician wishes to know what power he develops as he climbs the tower.
Which quantities does he need to know in order to do this?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

6
5

In the atomic model, the atom has a central mass. Much smaller particles orbit this central
mass, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
central
mass

orbiting
particles
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the name given to the central mass.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the name given to the orbiting particles.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the names of the particles from which the central mass is made.
........................................................... and .................................................................... [2]
(d) The central mass of the helium atom is identical to one of the particles emitted in
radioactive decay.
Which particle is this? ................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State the name of the particles that form cathode rays.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

For
Examiners
Use

7
6

Fig. 6.1 and Fig. 6.2 show two of the rays from the top of an object, passing through a lens.

object

F2

F1

Fig. 6.1

object

F2

F1

Fig. 6.2
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the third ray whose path from the top of the object through the lens is
known.
[1]
(b) On Fig. 6.2,
(i)

copy the ray shown on Fig. 6.1 and complete the diagram to locate the image
formed by the lens,
[1]

(ii)

mark and label the image.

[2]

(c) On Fig. 6.2, indicate clearly where you would position a screen on which to see the
focused image.
[1]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

8
7

(a) The table below describes the conditions of the molecules of a substance in each of the
three states of matter, solid, liquid and gas.
In the right-hand column, write the state of the substance that is described in the lefthand column.
condition of the molecules

state in which the


substance exists

The molecules are a great distance apart, moving


very rapidly, with negligible interaction. The
substance occupies all the space available.
The molecules are only able to vibrate rapidly about
fixed positions. The substance does not need a
container to maintain its shape.
The molecules move about amongst each other,
with attractive forces between them. The substance
does not necessarily fill its container.
[2]
(b) (i)

What is the state of matter just before a substance boils?


.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii)

Describe what happens to the molecules during boiling.


..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii)

State two differences between boiling and evaporating.


1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) (i)

What is the state of matter just before a substance melts?


.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii)

Aluminium melts at 660 C. At what temperature does it freeze?


.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

For
Examiners
Use

9
8

(a) The thermometer in Fig. 8.1 is calibrated at two fixed points, and the space between
these is divided into equal divisions.
-10

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

Fig. 8.1
A thermometer is being calibrated with the Celsius scale.
(i)

1.

Write down another name for the lower fixed point.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2.

How is this temperature achieved?

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii)

3.

What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [1]

1.

Write down another name for the upper fixed point.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2.

How is this temperature achieved?

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
3.

What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [2]

(b) A block of copper and a block of aluminium have identical masses. They both start at
room temperature and are given equal quantities of heat. When the heating is stopped,
the aluminium has a lower temperature than the copper.
Fill in the missing words in the sentence below, to explain this temperature difference.
The aluminium block has a smaller temperature rise than the copper block because the
aluminium block has a larger ................................................ than the copper block.

[1]

[Total: 10]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

10
9

Fuses are often included in circuits.

For
Examiners
Use

(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.

[1]
(b) When the statements in the boxes below are put in the correct order, they describe how
a fuse protects a circuit.
A
fuse wire heats up

B
circuit is broken,
so current stops

C
fuse wire melts
D
current becomes
too high

On the line below, list the letters of the four boxes in the correct order.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) By mistake, a fuse with too high a rated value is put in the fuse-holder in a circuit.
State two possible outcomes of this mistake.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

11
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a series circuit.

For
Examiners
Use

R1

R2

Fig. 10.1
Resistance R1 = 25 and resistance R2 = 35 . The cell has zero resistance.
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of R1 and R2.

resistance = ...........................................

[2]

(b) On Fig. 10.1, use the correct circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure
the potential difference between X and Y.
[1]
(c) The variable resistor is set to zero resistance. The voltmeter reads 1.5 V.
(i)

Calculate the current in the circuit.

current = .................................................. [4]


(ii)

State the value of the potential difference across the cell.


potential difference = ............................................ V

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

[1]

[Turn over

12
(d) The resistance of the variable resistor is increased.
(i)

For
Examiners
Use

What happens to the current in the circuit? Tick one box.


increases
stays the same
decreases

(ii)

[1]

What happens to the voltmeter reading? Tick one box.


increases
stays the same
decreases

(iii)

[1]

State the resistance of the variable resistor when the voltmeter reads 0.75 V.
resistance = ............................................

[1]

[Total: 11]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

13
11 (a) An experimenter uses a length of wire ABC in an attempt to demonstrate
electromagnetic induction. The wire is connected to a sensitive millivoltmeter G.

N
S

Fig. 11.1
Using the arrangement in Fig. 11.1, the experimenter finds that she does not obtain the
expected deflection on G when she moves the wire ABC down through the magnetic
field.
(i)

Explain why there is no deflection shown on G.


..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii)

What change should be made in order to observe a deflection on G?


..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Name one device that makes use of electromagnetic induction.


...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

14
12 (a) The table below shows how the activity of a sample of a radioactive substance changes
with time.
time/minutes

activity
counts/s

128

30

58

60

25

90

11

120

Use the data in the table to estimate the half-life of the radioactive substance.
half-life = .........................................min [2]
(b) The half-lives of various substances are given below.
radon-220
iodine-128
radon-222
strontium-90
(i)

55 seconds
25 minutes
3.8 days
28 years

If the radioactive substance in (a) is one of these four, which one is it?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii)

A sample of each of these substances is obtained.


Which sample will have the greatest proportion of decayed nuclei by the end of one
year, and why?
Which? .....................................................................................................................
Why? ........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/M/J/08

For
Examiners
Use

15
BLANK PAGE

0625/02/M/J/08

16
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

0625/02/M/J/08

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*5545678956*

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

October/November 2008
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question.

For Examiners Use


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

This document consists of 16 printed pages.


SP (NF/CGW) T41976/4
UCLES 2008

[Turn over

2
1

A boy is fishing in a river. Nearby, a ferry-boat is taking passengers backwards and forwards
across the river.

11

12

10

11
2

2
3

10
3

12

Fig. 1.1

Fig. 1.2

When he starts fishing one morning, the boys wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
When he finishes his mornings fishing, the wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(a) For how many minutes was the boy fishing?

number of minutes = ................................................ [3]


(b) It takes the ferry-boat 20 minutes to load up passengers, take them across the river,
load up with passengers at the other side, and return, to start all over again.
Calculate how many journeys, across the river and back, the ferry made whilst the boy
was fishing.

number of journeys = ................................................ [2]


[Total: 5]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

The tank in Fig. 2.1 measures 2.0 m 1.5 m 1.0 m. It is full of water.

For
Examiners
Use

water

Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the volume of the tank.

volume = ................................................ [3]


(b) Water has a density of 1000 kg/m3.
Calculate the mass of water in the tank.

mass = ................................................ [3]


[Total: 6]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[Turn over

4
3

A spring is hung from a beam, and a load is suspended from it.


Fig. 3.1 shows the spring before and after suspending the load.
before

For
Examiners
Use

after
W
X

Z
load
Fig. 3.1
(a) Using the letters on Fig. 3.1, state which distance you would need to measure in order
to find the extension of the spring.
distance = ................................................ [1]
(b) An experimenter measures the extension of the spring with different loads, and obtains
the graph shown in Fig. 3.2.

3
extension / cm
2

0
0

4 load / N 5

Fig. 3.2
(i)

When the experimenter hangs an unknown load on the spring, the extension
of the spring is 1.7 cm.
Use Fig. 3.2 to find the weight of the unknown load.
weight = ............................................ N [1]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

5
(ii)

State the value of the tension in the spring when this load is hanging from it.
tension = ................................................ [2]

(iii)

The load is pulled down further.


State what happens to the tension in the spring.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv)

After being pulled down, the load is released.


State what happens to the load immediately after it is released.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

6
4

Fig. 4.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, with an enlargement of the
visible light part of the spectrum.
microwaves

infra
-red

visible

X-rays

-rays

visible
M

Fig. 4.1
(a) Two of the regions have not been named in Fig. 4.1.
In the two boxes below the spectrum, write the names of these regions.

[2]

(b) Write long wavelength next to the long wavelength end of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
[1]
(c) State one use for the radiation of each of the following regions.
microwaves ......................................................................................................................
infra-red ...........................................................................................................................
-rays ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) State the colour you would expect to find
(i)

at end M of the visible spectrum, ..............................................................................

(ii)

at end N of the visible spectrum. ..............................................................................


[2]
[Total: 8]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

For
Examiners
Use

7
5

(a) Make the following sentences about sound echoes correct by crossing out the incorrect
alternatives. An example has been given to help you.
large
(example) An echo is caused when a sound wave hits a small obstacle.
thin

(i)

(ii)

reflected
An echo is a sound wave which is refracted by an obstacle.
dispersed

[1]

An echo from a stationary obstacle has


a greater frequency than
the same frequency as
a smaller frequency than
the sound hitting the obstacle.

[1]

(b) Two students, A and B, are trying to use echoes to enable them to measure the speed
of sound. Student A has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged
together. Student B has a stopwatch. They stand 240 m from the school wall, as shown
in Fig. 5.1.

school
wall

240 m
Fig. 5.1

Student A bangs the blocks together and, at the same time, B starts the stopwatch.
B stops the stopwatch when he hears the echo. The watch then reads 1.6 s.
(i)

How far did the sound travel during the 1.6 s?

(ii)

Calculate the speed of sound.

................................ m [1]

speed of sound = ......................................... m/s [3]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

8
(iii)

The students expected that the value for the speed of sound would be closer to
330 m/s.
Suggest two reasons that might explain why the students value was different from
what was expected.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

Fig. 6.1 shows two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram is
incomplete. The space labelled X is a vacuum.
X
glass
tube

mercury

dish

Fig. 6.1
(a) On the left-hand barometer, carefully mark the distance that would have to be measured
in order to find the value of the atmospheric pressure.
[2]
(b) A small quantity of air is introduced into X.
(i)

State what happens to the mercury level in the tube.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

(c) The space above the mercury in the right-hand barometer is a vacuum.
On Fig. 6.1, mark the level of the mercury surface in the tube.
UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[1]

For
Examiners
Use

9
(d) The left-hand tube now has air above the mercury; the right-hand tube has a vacuum.
Complete the table below, using words chosen from the following list, to indicate the
effect of changing the external conditions.
rises

falls

stays the same

effect on the level of the


mercury in the left-hand tube

change

effect on the level of the


mercury in the right-hand tube

atmospheric pressure
rises
temperature
rises
[4]
[Total: 10]
7

This question requires the use of a ruler or other straight edge. Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light
striking a plane mirror.

ray of
light
mirror
A
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1,
(i)

draw the normal to the mirror at A,

[1]

(ii)

draw the path of the reflected ray,

[1]

(iii)

mark and label the angle of incidence, i,

[1]

(iv)

mark and label the angle of reflection, r.

[1]

(b) State the equation that links i and r.


.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 7.1
(i)

draw another mirror which is perpendicular to the one in the diagram and 2 cm to
the right of A,
[1]

(ii)

draw the path of the ray of light after reflection from this second mirror.

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[1]
[Total: 7]
[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

10
8

(a) An iron rod is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
N

For
Examiners
Use

S
iron rod
Fig. 8.1

(i)

On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the north pole and the south pole that are induced in the
iron rod.
[1]

(ii)

What happens to the magnet and the rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel

[1]

(b) A second bar magnet is now placed next to the iron rod, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
N

iron rod
Fig. 8.2
(i)

On Fig. 8.2, mark clearly the magnetic poles induced in the iron rod.

(ii)

What happens to the iron rod and the second magnet? Tick one box.

[1]

nothing
they attract
they repel

[1]

(c) The iron rod is removed, leaving the two magnets, as shown in Fig. 8.3.
N

Fig. 8.3
What happens to the two magnets? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[1]

11
(d) The second magnet is removed and replaced by a charged plastic rod, as shown in
Fig. 8.4.
N

charged
plastic rod

Fig. 8.4
What happens to the magnet and the plastic rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel

[1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

12
9

A toymaker wires a circuit in a toy house, so that a 6 V lamp can be switched on using either
switch 1 at the bottom of the stairs or switch 2 at the top of the stairs.
The circuit is shown in Fig. 9.1.
X

6V
lamp

switch 2
a
b

6 V supply

switch 1
A
B

Fig. 9.1
(a) When switch 1 is in position A, what is the position of switch 2 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When switch 2 is in position b, what is the position of switch 1 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The lamp has a resistance of 4.0 .
Calculate the current in the circuit.

current = ................................................ [4]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

For
Examiners
Use

13
(d) The toymaker decides he wants to have two 6 V lamps in the circuit with the 6 V supply.
Which of the following means of connecting the lamps between X and Y, shown in
Fig. 9.2, is the best? Give two reasons for your answer.
X

connection 2

connection 1
Fig. 9.2

Which is best? .................................................................................................................


Reason 1 .........................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

14
10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to switch an electric motor
on and off. The relay coil has a much greater resistance than the potential divider.
pivoted iron
armature
6V

power supply
for motor

M motor

switch

relay core

contacts

Fig. 10.1
(a) The relay operates when there is a potential difference of 3 V across the coil.
On Fig. 10.1, mark the position of the slider of the potential divider when the relay just
operates.
[1]
(b) Describe how the relay closes the contacts in the motor circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

For
Examiners
Use

15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a transformer being used to operate a 6 V lamp from a 240 V mains supply.
A
6V
lamp

240V
mains
B
iron

8000 turns
Fig. 11.1

(a) What name is given to the piece of iron that links the two coils?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For the transformer to operate, must the mains supply be a.c., d.c., or doesnt it
matter?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Using the information on Fig. 11.1, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.

number of turns = ................................................ [3]


(d) State why it would not be wise to connect a 1.5 V lamp between A and B.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

[Turn over

For
Examiners
Use

16
12 The nucleus of one of the different nuclides of polonium can be represented by
the symbol

For
Examiners
Use

218
84

Po

(a) State the proton number of this nuclide.

........................ [1]

(b) State the nucleon number of this nuclide.

........................ [1]

(c) The nucleus decays according to the following equation.


218
84

Po

214
82

Pb + emitted particle

(i)

State the proton number of the emitted particle.

.......................... [1]

(ii)

State the nucleon number of the emitted particle.

.......................... [1]

(iii)

Name the emitted particle. Tick one box.


-particle
-particle
neutron
proton

[1]
[Total: 5]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2008

0625/02/O/N/08

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*4743961177*

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

May/June 2009
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
For Examiners Use
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
1
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
2
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


SPA SHW 00151 2/08 T76303/3
UCLES 2009

[Turn over

2
1

A schoolteacher is concerned about the large number of vehicles passing along the busy
road next to the school. He decides to make a measurement to find the number of vehicles
per minute. Using the school clock he notes the following readings.

11

12

10
appearance of clock at beginning of investigation

3
8

4
7

11

12

10
appearance of clock at end of investigation

3
8

4
7

vehicles counted travelling left to right = 472


vehicles counted travelling right to left = 228
(a) Calculate the time for which the schoolteacher was counting vehicles.

counting time = ......................................... min [1]


(b) Calculate the total number of vehicles passing the school per minute.

vehicles per minute = ................................................ [3]


[Total: 4]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

In the left-hand column below are four physical quantities that might be measured in the
Physics laboratory. In the right-hand column are eight statements which might be definitions
of the quantities in the left-hand column.

For
Examiners
Use

Use a line to join each quantity with its definition. An example has been given to help you.
There is only one definition for each quantity.
work

force of gravity on a body


how big the body is

mass

power of a given force


weight mass

weight

amount of matter in a body


force distance moved

density

mass volume
the acceleration due to gravity
[3]
[Total: 3]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

4
3

The car in Fig. 3.1 is on a level road.

For
Examiners
Use

500 N
frictional forces

2000 N force
propelling car forwards

Fig. 3.1
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force on the car.

resultant force = ............................................. N [1]


(b) Tick the box below that describes the motion of the car.
travels forward at constant speed
travels forward with increasing speed
travels forward with decreasing speed
travels backward at constant speed
travels backward with increasing speed
travels backward with decreasing speed
remains at rest
[1]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

5
(c) The frictional forces increase to 2000 N when the car is moving. What happens to the
car?

For
Examiners
Use

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest two things that might have caused the frictional forces in (c) to increase.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

6
4

Fig. 4.1 shows a manometer, containing mercury, being used to monitor the pressure of a
gas supply.
mm
300

250

from a
gas supply

200

150

100

50

mercury
0

Fig. 4.1
(a) Using the scale on Fig. 4.1, find the vertical difference between the two mercury levels.
difference = ......................................... mm [1]
(b) What is the value of the excess pressure of the gas supply, measured in millimetres of
mercury?
excess pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1]
(c) The atmospheric pressure is 750 mm of mercury.
Calculate the actual pressure of the gas supply.

actual pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1]


(d) The gas pressure now decreases by 20 mm of mercury.
On Fig. 4.1, mark the new positions of the two mercury levels.

[2]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

For
Examiners
Use

7
5

Fig. 5.1 shows a typical laboratory thermometer.

C 10

10

20

30

40

50

For
Examiners
Use
60

70

80

90

100

110

Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain why the thermometer has
(i)

thin walls on its bulb,


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

thick walls on its stem,


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii)

a narrow capillary tube along which the liquid expands.


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) Suggest a liquid which the thermometer might contain.


.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Such a thermometer is calibrated at the ice point and the steam point. The scale is put
on between these two marks.
State the values of
(i)

the ice point, ......................................

(ii)

the steam point. .................................


[2]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

8
6

Fig. 6.1 shows the waveform of the note from a bell. A grid is given to help you take
measurements.

time

Fig. 6.1
(a) (i)

State what, if anything, is happening to the loudness of the note.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

State how you deduced your answer to (a)(i).


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) (i)

State what, if anything, is happening to the frequency of the note.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

State how you deduced your answer to (b)(i).


............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

For
Examiners
Use

9
(c) (i)

How many oscillations does it take for the amplitude of the wave to decrease to half
its initial value?

For
Examiners
Use

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)

The wave has a frequency of 300 Hz.


1.

What is meant by a frequency of 300 Hz ?


...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [1]

2.

How long does 1 cycle of the wave take?


..................................................................................................................... [1]

3.

How long does it take for the amplitude to decrease to half its initial value?
..................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) A student says that the sound waves, which travelled through the air from the bell, were
longitudinal waves, and that the air molecules moved repeatedly closer together and
then further apart.
(i)

Is the student correct in saying that the sound waves are longitudinal? .................

(ii)

Is the student correct about the movement of the air molecules?

(iii)

The student gives light as another example of longitudinal waves.


Is this correct?

.................

.................
[2]
[Total: 11]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

10
7

Two apartment blocks are one each side of a road, as shown in Fig. 7.1. A beam of light from
a police helicopter is hitting the top window H of the left-hand apartment block.

beam of light

apartment
block

apartment
block

Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)

UCLES 2009

On Fig. 7.1,
1.

draw the normal at the point where the beam hits window H,

[1]

2.

label the angle of incidence of the beam of light on window H.

[1]

0625/02/M/J/09

For
Examiners
Use

11
(ii)

State the equation that links the angle of incidence with the angle of reflection.
................................................. [1]

(iii)

For
Examiners
Use

Which window does the beam hit next, after reflection from H?
................................................. [1]

(iv)

Which other windows, if any, receive light from the helicopter?


................................................. [1]

(b) Fig. 7.2 shows another example of reflection. The drawing is incomplete.

mirror

card

Fig. 7.2
The horizontal card with the letter P on it is being reflected in the vertical mirror.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the reflection of the letter P.

[2]
[Total: 7]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

12
8

(a) Four rods are shown in Fig. 8.1.

plastic rod

For
Examiners
Use

iron rod

wooden rod

brass rod

Fig. 8.1
State which of these could be held in the hand at one end and be
(i)

magnetised by stroking it with a magnet,


................................................. [1]

(ii)

charged by stroking it with a dry cloth.


................................................. [1]

(b) Magnets A and B in Fig. 8.2 are repelling each other.

N
magnet A

magnet B
Fig. 8.2

The north pole has been labelled on magnet A.


On Fig. 8.2, label the other three poles.

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[1]

13
(c) Charged rods C and D in Fig. 8.3 are attracting each other.

For
Examiners
Use

+
rod C

rod D
Fig. 8.3

On Fig. 8.3, show the charge on rod D.

[1]

(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a plotting compass with its needle pointing north.
N

Fig. 8.4
A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction. A plotting compass is put at each
end of the brass rod, as shown in Fig. 8.5.
brass rod

plotting
compass

Fig. 8.5
On Fig. 8.5, mark the position of the pointer on each of the two plotting compasses. [2]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

14
9

Fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit.

For
Examiners
Use

6V

reading
50 mA

A
R

Fig. 9.1
(a) What is the value of
(i)

the e.m.f. of the battery,


................................................. [1]

(ii)

the current in the circuit?


................................................. [1]

(b) Calculate the resistance R of the resistor.

R = ................................................ [3]
(c) State how the circuit could be changed to
(i)

halve the current in the circuit,


............................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii)

reduce the current to zero.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

15
(d) A student wishes to include a switch in the circuit, but mistakenly connects it as shown
in Fig. 9.2.

For
Examiners
Use

6V

students
incorrect
connection

A
R

Fig. 9.2
(i)

Comment on the size of the current in the circuit if the student closes the switch.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

What effect would this current have on the circuit?


..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

16
10 The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is called a force-on-conductor balance. When there is an electric
current I as shown in XY, there is a force on XY that pulls it down. This force is measured by
putting weights in the pan until XY is brought back to its original position.
pan
current
out
current
in

Fig. 10.1
(a) State what would happen if the current direction were from Y to X.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An experimenter uses the balance to determine the force F on XY for different currents I.
His results are given below.

(i)

UCLES 2009

I/A

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

F/N

0.012

0.023

0.035

0.047

On the grid of Fig. 10.2,


1.

mark suitable scales to plot a graph of F / N against I / A for these values,

[2]

2.

plot the points on your grid,

[2]

3.

draw the best straight line through your points.

[1]

0625/02/M/J/09

For
Examiners
Use

17
For
Examiners
Use

F/N

I/A

0
Fig. 10.2
(ii)

From your graph, find the force on XY when the current is 1.6 A.
force = ............................................. N [1]

(c) Name one common device that uses the effect demonstrated by the force-on-conductor
balance.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

[Turn over

18
11 Fig. 11.1 represents a cathode-ray tube containing a number of different parts. There are
empty boxes connected to four of the parts. These boxes are for some of the answers to this
question. Not all of the boxes will be used.

heater filament

cathode rays

anode

grid

Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, write the word CATHODE in the appropriate box.

[1]

(b) One part shown in Fig. 11.1 is used to deflect the cathode rays up and down.
Write UP AND DOWN in the appropriate box.

[1]

(c) One part glows when the cathode rays strike it.
Write GLOWS in the appropriate box.

[1]

(d) On Fig. 11.1, draw a battery connected so that the cathode is heated.
(e) Name the particles that make up cathode rays.
(f)

[1]

................................................ [1]

What fills the rest of the space in the cathode-ray tube? Tick one box.
air
alpha particles
hydrogen
steam
vacuum
[1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

For
Examiners
Use

19
12 The following table includes some of the properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations.

For
Examiners
Use

Complete the table by filling in the missing properties.


alpha
nature

2 protons +
2 neutrons

approximate mass
charge
ability to penetrate
solids

beta

gamma
[2]

1 unit
positive

[2]
[2]

very penetrating

[2]

[Total: 8]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/M/J/09

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

0625/02/M/J/09

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*3735851861*

0625/02

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

October/November 2009
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.


DCA (SHW 00151 2/08) 12741/5
UCLES 2009

[Turn over

2
1

Fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing some water.


A student allows 200 drops of water to fall into the water in the measuring cylinder. Fig. 1.2
shows the measuring cylinder after the addition of the drops.
cm3

cm3

50

50

40

40

30

30

20

original level
of water

20

final level
of water

10

10

Fig. 1.1

Fig. 1.2

(a) State
(i)

the original volume of water in the cylinder,


................................................ cm3

(ii)

the final volume of water in the cylinder.


................................................ cm3
[1]

(b) Calculate the volume of water added.

volume added = ......................................... cm3 [1]


(c) Calculate the average volume of one of the drops of water.

average volume = ......................................... cm3 [2]


[Total: 4]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

As a pole vaulter runs towards the jump, his pole is straight. When he is jumping, the pole is
bent, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.

For
Examiners
Use

pole

Fig. 2.1
(a) Which form of energy of the athlete increases as he accelerates towards the jump?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which form of energy of the athlete increases because he is rising towards the bar?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which two quantities need to be known in order to calculate how much work is done
lifting the athlete up from the ground to the bar?
............................................................. and .............................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Turn over

4
3

Fig. 3.1 shows the distance/time graph for a girls bicycle ride and the axes for the
corresponding speed/time graph.
distance
from
starting
point

0A

time

time

speed

Fig. 3.1
(a) Look at the distance/time graph that has been drawn for you.
(i)

Answer the following questions for the time interval AB.


1.

What is happening to the distance from the starting point?


...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]

2.

What can you say about the speed of the bicycle?


..................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

For
Examiners
Use

5
(ii)

On the speed/time axes in the lower part of Fig. 3.1, draw a thick line that could
show the speed during AB.
[1]

For
Examiners
Use

(b) On the speed/time axes of Fig. 3.1


(i)

draw a thick line that could show the speed during BC,

[1]

(ii)

draw a thick line that could show the speed during CD.

[2]

(c) How far from her starting point is the girl when she has finished her ride?

distance from starting point = ................................................ [1]


[Total: 8]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Turn over

6
4

(a) The object illustrated in Fig. 4.1 is not in equilibrium. It has a weight of 12 N.

12 N

15 N

6N

weight = 12 N
Fig. 4.1
(i)

State what happens to the object.


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii)

On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the extra force necessary to bring the object to
a state of equilibrium. Label the arrow with the size of the force.
[2]

(iii)

On Fig. 4.1, show where the centre of mass of the object is situated, using the
letter G.
[1]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

For
Examiners
Use

7
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a car transporter, first unloaded and then loaded with two cars on the
upper deck.

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 4.2
(i)

What happens to the centre of mass of the transporter and its load when the cars
are loaded?
Tick one box.
rises
stays at the same height
falls
[1]

(ii)

How do the two loaded cars affect the stability of the transporter?
Tick one box.
more stable
no effect
less stable
[1]
[Total: 7]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Turn over

8
5

(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the cooling curve for a pure substance. The substance is liquid at A.

For
Examiners
Use

temperature
A

C
B
D
time
Fig. 5.1
(i)

(ii)

Describe what is happening to the substance between


1.

A and B, . ..........................................................................................................

2.

B and C, ...........................................................................................................

3.

C and D. ...........................................................................................................
[3]

During which of the sections of the graph is energy being lost from the substance to
the surroundings? Put a tick in any of the boxes to indicate where this is happening.
between A and B
between B and C
between C and D
[2]

(iii)

What is the state of the substance at D?


................................................. [1]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

9
(b) When the temperature reaches that at D, the substance is then heated steadily until it
again reaches the temperature it had at A.

For
Examiners
Use

On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph of temperature against time for the heating of the
substance.
[2]
temperature

time
Fig. 5.2
[Total: 8]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Turn over

10
6

A bicycle pump has its outlet sealed with a tight rubber bung, as shown in Fig. 6.1.

For
Examiners
Use

handle
bung

A
piston

air
Fig. 6.1

(a) The temperature of the air in the pump is kept constant. The handle of the pump is
pushed in so that the piston moves from A to B.
Tick the correct box in each row of the table below to show how each quantity varies as
the piston is moved.
greater with
piston at A

greater with
piston at B

same with
piston at A or B

the average speed of the air molecules


the frequency with which the air
molecules hit the walls and the piston
the pressure of the air in the pump
[3]
(b) When the handle is pushed in even further, the rubber bung pops out of the hole.
Which two forces are equal just before the bung pops out? Tick two boxes.
friction force between bung and hole
resultant due to forces of air on each side of piston
resultant due to forces of air on each side of bung
gravitational force on bung
force of air on walls
[2]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

11
7

Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment in which an image is being formed on a card by a lens and a
plane mirror.
lens

For
Examiners
Use

image

r
torch
p

plane
mirror

hole cut
in card
Fig. 7.1

The card and the mirror are shown angled, so that you can see what is happening. In a real
experiment they are each roughly perpendicular to the line joining the torch bulb and the
centre of the lens.
(a) State which of the three marked distances, p, q and r, is the focal length of the lens.
................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1 clearly mark a principal focus of the lens, using the letter F.

[1]

(c) Tick the boxes alongside two features that describe the image formed on the card.
erect
inverted
real
virtual

[2]

(d) What can be said about the size of the image, compared with the size of the object?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) In the experiment, the plane mirror is perpendicular to the beam of light.
State what, if anything, happens to the image on the card if
(i)

the plane mirror is moved slightly to the left,


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

the lens is moved slightly to the left.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Total: 7]
[Turn over

12
8

Fig. 8.1 shows a student standing midway between a bell tower and a steep mountainside.

steep
mountainside
student
bell tower
and bell

990 m

990 m
Fig. 8.1

The bell rings once, but the student hears two rings separated by a short time interval.
(a) Explain why the student hears two rings.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State which of the sounds is loudest, and why.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

For
Examiners
Use

13
(c) Sound in that region travels at 330 m / s.
(i)

Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for
the first time.

For
Examiners
Use

time interval = ............................................. s [2]


(ii)

Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for
the second time.

time interval = ............................................. s [1]


(iii)

Calculate the time interval between the two sounds.

time interval = ............................................. s [1]


[Total: 8]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Turn over

14
9

(a) The two circuits shown in Fig. 9.1 each contain two resistors and a battery.

For
Examiners
Use

Complete the statement under each circuit.

R1

R3

R2

R4

Resistors R1 and R2 are

Resistors R3 and R4 are

connected in

connected in

[1]

Fig. 9.1
(b) A student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 9.2. The resistance of the 12 V battery is so
low that it can be ignored.

280
12 V
A

200

Fig. 9.2
(i)

Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.

resistance = ............................................ [2]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

15
(ii)

Calculate the current delivered by the battery.

For
Examiners
Use

current = ................................................ [4]


(iii)

Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 200 resistor.

p.d. = ............................................. V [2]


(iv)

Describe how the student could check whether the p.d. across the 200 resistor is
the same as you have calculated. Include the name of the instrument he would use
for this.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Turn over

16
10 Fig. 10.1 is a diagram of a transformer.

For
Examiners
Use

30 turns

300 turns

12 V
a.c.

a.c. voltmeter

Fig. 10.1
(a) (i)
(ii)

On Fig. 10.1, clearly label the core of the transformer.

[1]

Name a suitable material from which the core could be made.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii)

State the purpose of the core.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.

voltmeter reading = ............................................. V [3]


[Total: 6]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

17
11 A woodworker buys an old electric drill that has been used before. The drill is illustrated in
Fig. 11.1.

For
Examiners
Use

Fig. 11.1
The drill mechanism itself is guaranteed to be electrically safe.
Suggest three checks the woodworker could make in order to ensure that the rest of his
purchase is electrically safe.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
2. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
3. .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 3]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

[Turn over

18
12 A radioactive material, X, has a half-life of 2 minutes.
At the beginning of an experiment, a sample of the material produces a count-rate of
800 counts / s.
Fig. 12.1 shows the count-rate readings at the start of the experiment and after one half-life
has elapsed.
900

800

700

600

500
count-rate
counts / s
400

300

200

100

0
0

time t / minutes
Fig. 12.1

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

10

12

14

For
Examiners
Use

19
(a) Complete the plot of the decay curve, for times up to t = 12 minutes. Draw the best curve
through your points.
[3]
(b) From your graph find
(i)

the count-rate from the sample after 9 minutes,


count-rate = ................................. counts / s [1]

(ii)

the time it takes for the count-rate to fall from 700 counts / s to 350 counts / s.
time = ................................... minutes [1]

(c) A second sample of this radioactive material X gives an initial count-rate of


400 counts / s.
What will be the half-life of this sample?
half-life = ................................... minutes [1]
(d) A river contains fine particles of mud. The mud builds up on the bottom of the river and
prevents the movement of large ships. To solve this problem, the authorities remove the
mud and dump it at sea. To check where the mud goes after it is dumped, a radioactive
material is mixed with it and tracked with radioactivity detectors.
(i)

Explain why the radioactive material X is not suitable to trace the movement of the
dumped mud.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

State two other properties that a radioactive material must have to make it suitable
for tracking the mud.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

UCLES 2009

0625/02/O/N/09

For
Examiners
Use

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

0625/02/O/N/09

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*2425863101*

0625/21

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


DCA (SHW 00380 1/09) 20403/6
UCLES 2010

[Turn over

2
1

Imagine that you live beside a busy road. One of your neighbours thinks that many of the
vehicles are travelling faster than the speed limit for the road.
You decide to check this by measuring the speeds of some of the vehicles.
(a) Which two quantities will you need to measure in order to find the speed of a vehicle,
and which instruments would you use to measure them?
quantity measured

instrument used

[4]
(b) State the equation you would use to calculate the speed of the vehicle. If you use
symbols, state what your symbols mean.

[1]
(c) One lorry travels from your town to another town. The lorry reaches a top speed of
90 km / h, but its average speed between the towns is only 66 km / h.
(i)

Why is the average speed less than the top speed?


..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

The journey between the towns takes 20 minutes.


Calculate the distance between the towns.

distance = .......................................... km [3]


[Total: 9]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

For
Examiners
Use

3
2

A helical spring is hung from the edge of a bench top, as shown in Fig. 2.1.

For
Examiners
Use

bench top
0

29.8
cm

spring

pin

62.8
cm

metre rule

load = 5.5 N
100

100

Fig. 2.1
Before the load is hung on the spring, the pin points to the 29.8 cm mark on the metre rule.
When a load of 5.5 N is hung on the spring, the pin points to 62.8 cm.
(a) Calculate the extension of the spring.

extension = .......................................... cm [2]


(b) The law relating extension to load is given by the equation
load = constant extension.
(i)

Calculate the numerical value of the constant.

constant = ................................................ [2]


(ii)

Suggest a suitable unit for the constant.


............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Turn over

4
3

(a) Fig. 3.1 represents the energy into and out of a machine.

For
Examiners
Use

useful output
energy U

input energy I

wasted energy W
Fig. 3.1
Write down the equation linking I, U and W.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An electric motor and a pulley in a warehouse are being used to lift a packing case of
goods from the ground up to a higher level. This is shown in Fig. 3.2.

electric
motor

pulley
cable

chains
packing case
pallet

ground
Fig. 3.2
The packing case of goods, the chains and the pallet together weigh 850 N.
(i)

State the value of the tension force in the cable when the load is being lifted at a
steady speed.
tension force = ............................................. N [1]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

5
(ii)

When the load is just leaving the floor, why is the force larger than your answer to
(b)(i)?

For
Examiners
Use

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)

The warehouse manager wishes to calculate the useful work done when the load
is lifted from the ground to the higher level. Which quantity, other than the weight,
does he need to measure?
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv)

Which further quantity does the manager need to know, in order to calculate the
power required to lift the load?
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(c) How does the electrical energy supplied to the electric motor compare with the increase
in energy of the load? Answer by completing the sentence below.
The electrical energy supplied to the motor is the
increase in energy of the load.

[1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Turn over

6
4

(a) A musical note is being produced by a loudspeaker connected to a signal generator.


A person is listening to the note, as shown in Fig. 4.1.

signal generator
amplitude frequency

Fig. 4.1
By adjusting the controls on the signal generator, the amplitude and the frequency of
the note from the loudspeaker can each be changed.
The person moves to a position further away from the loudspeaker.
(i)

State what, if anything, happens to


1.

the pitch of the sound heard,


...........................................................................................................................

2.

the loudness of the sound heard.


..................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii)

What adjustment, if any, should be made to the two controls so that the sound
heard in the new position is the same as in the original position?
frequency control ......................................................................................................
amplitude control ................................................................................................ [2]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

For
Examiners
Use

7
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a girl standing some distance from a rock face. She has a bell in her
hand.

For
Examiners
Use

rock face

Fig. 4.2
The girl rings the bell once. After a short time the sound of the bell reaches her again.
(i)

Why did the sound return to her?


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

Why was there a short time delay before the girl heard the second sound?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Turn over

8
5

Fig. 5.1 shows a childs toy. It is made out of wood, in the shape of a bird. The toy includes a
metal weight stuck to the tail. When placed on a metal rod, the toy balances in equilibrium.

metal rod

metal weight

Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter X a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy.
[1]
(b) The metal weight falls off the tail.
(i)

On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter Y a possible new position for the centre of mass.
[1]

(ii)

What happens to the toy immediately after the metal weight falls off?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

For
Examiners
Use

9
6

(a) Fig. 6.1 shows a beaker in which coffee is served at an airport kiosk.

For
Examiners
Use

section through
beaker

layer of corrugated
cardboard stuck to
a layer of smooth
cardboard, with air
trapped between them

Fig. 6.1

Fig. 6.2

The beaker itself is made of two layers of cardboard, as shown in section in Fig. 6.2. It
has a thin plastic lid.
(i)

State two sources of heat loss that are reduced by the lid.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii)

State two reasons why the layer of corrugated cardboard stops the fingers of the
person holding the beaker from becoming uncomfortably hot.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) (i)

State the meaning of the term thermal capacity.


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii)

Another airport kiosk serves coffee in pottery mugs. The mugs all have the same
internal dimensions but some have a high thermal capacity and some have a low
thermal capacity.
When hot drinks are poured into the mugs, the temperature of the drink always
drops because of the thermal energy absorbed by the mug.
State which mug, high thermal capacity or low thermal capacity, causes the least
fall in temperature of the hot drink, and explain why.
mug ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................... [2]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Total: 8]
[Turn over

10
7

The electric lamp in Fig. 7.1 has 240 V, 100 W marked on it. Its filament is a coiled coil of
fine tungsten wire, as shown in Fig. 7.2.

Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)

Fig. 7.2

To give out white light, the filament has to reach a very high temperature.
Suggest why having the filament as a coiled coil helps to achieve this high
temperature.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

If your hand is close to the lamp when it is switched on for a few seconds, you can
feel warmth from the lamp but the glass will remain cool.
By what method has the thermal energy reached your hand? Tick one box.
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
[1]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

For
Examiners
Use

11
(b) (i)

The markings on the lamp give electrical information about the lamp when it is
operating normally.

For
Examiners
Use

State the value of


1.

the normal operating potential difference across the lamp,


...........................................................................................................................

2.

the power of the lamp.


..................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii)

When the lamp is working normally, its resistance is 576 .


Calculate the current in the lamp.

current = ................................................ [4]


[Total: 8]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Turn over

12
8

Fig. 8.1 shows how an image is formed by a converging lens.


24 cm

For
Examiners
Use

10 cm

8cm

I
O

F2

F1

Fig. 8.1
(a) State the value of the focal length of the lens.
focal length = .......................................... cm [1]
(b) The object O is moved a small distance to the left.
State two things that happen to the image I.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) Points F1 and F2 are marked on Fig. 8.1.
(i)

State the name we give to these two points.


............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

On Fig. 8.1, draw the ray from the top of the object which passes through F2.
Continue your ray until it meets the image.

[4]
[Total: 8]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

13
9

(a) A warning on the packaging of a light switch purchased from an electrical store reads

SAFETY WARNING

For
Examiners
Use

This push-button switch is not suitable for use in a washroom. Lights in washrooms should be
operated by pull-cord switches.
(i)

Explain why it might be dangerous to use a push-button switch in a washroom.


..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii)

Why is it safe to use a pull-cord switch in a washroom?


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) An electric heater, sold in the electrical store, has a current of 8 A when it is working
normally.
The cable fitted to the heater has a maximum safe current of 12 A.
Which of the following fuses would be most suitable to use in the plug fitted to the cable
of the heater? Tick one box.
5A
10 A
13 A
20 A
[1]
(c) The cable for connecting an electric cooker is much thicker than the cable on a table
lamp.
(i)

Why do cookers need a much thicker cable?


..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii)

What would happen if a thin cable were used for wiring a cooker to the supply?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Total: 6]
[Turn over

14
10 A transformer has 500 turns in both its primary and its secondary coils. It is connected to a
240 V mains supply. There are 4 possible connections to the secondary, labelled W, X, Y and
Z on Fig. 10.1.
P

W
X
Y
Z

240 V

primary coil
500 turns

secondary coil
500 turns
Fig. 10.1

Between W and X there are 300 turns.


Between X and Y there are 175 turns.
Between Y and Z there are 25 turns.
(a) A person wishes to run a 12 V electric bell, using the transformer.
Between which two of the labelled terminals should the bell be connected?
Show your working.

bell connected between terminal ............. and terminal ............ [4]


(b) State the voltage between terminals W and Z.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

For
Examiners
Use

15
(c) State the name given to the part labelled P and the material from which it is made.
name ................................................................................................................................

For
Examiners
Use

material ...................................................................................................................... [2]


(d) Why are the coils normally made from copper wire?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Turn over

16
11 Fig. 11.1 shows apparatus being used to project a visible spectrum onto a screen, using a
lamp with a white-hot filament.
glass
prism
glass
lens

screen
P

A
visible spe

ctrum

B
Q

filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 11.1
(a) State two things that happen to the white light as it passes through surface PQ of the
prism.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) What colour light will be seen at
(i)

edge A of the spectrum, ...........................................................................................

(ii)

edge B of the spectrum? ..........................................................................................


[2]

(c) A thermometer with a blackened bulb is moved very slowly across the screen.
(i)

On Fig. 11.1, mark using a cross () the position where the thermometer will show
its largest reading.
[2]

(ii)

What type of radiation would cause this high reading?


............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

For
Examiners
Use

17
12 (a) A scientist, who is also an antiques collector, buys an old watch at an antiques market.
The figures on the dial of the watch are painted with a type of luminous paint that is
radioactive.

For
Examiners
Use

In his laboratory, he puts the watch close to a radiation detector and then places sheets
of different materials in the gap between them, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
radiation
detector

watch

counter

sheet
Fig. 12.1
The results of his investigation are given in the following table.
material

effect

sheet of paper

no observable change in count rate

1 mm thick sheet of aluminium

a noticeable decrease in the count rate

1 mm thick sheet of lead

considerable decrease in the count rate


but still above background

(i)

From this information, deduce the type or types of radiation escaping from the
watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii)

The back of the watch is made of steel 1 mm thick.


State one reason why there would be a health hazard when wearing this watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

[Turn over

18
(b) Radioactive materials are stored in a cupboard.
(i)

Which of the symbols shown in Fig. 12.2 is used on the door of the cupboard to
warn of the radiation hazard? Tick one box.

Fig. 12.2
[1]
(ii)

State one other safety precaution that should be taken when storing the radioactive
substances in the cupboard.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

For
Examiners
Use

19
BLANK PAGE

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

20
BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

UCLES 2010

0625/21/M/J/10

w
ap
eP

e
tr
.X

w
om
.c

s
er

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS


International General Certificate of Secondary Education

*2512877189*

0625/21

PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core

October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.


No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 16 printed pages and 4 blank pages.


DC (NF/SW) 24995/3
UCLES 2010

[Turn over

2
1

(a) (i)

Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of a rectangular block being measured using a
ruler. They are not shown full size.
Use the scales shown to find the length and the width of the block, giving your answers
in cm.

length of block ................. cm [1]

140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
millimetres
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300
millimetres

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Fig. 1.1

width of block ...................... cm [1]

Fig. 1.2
(ii)

When the block was made, it was cut from a piece of metal 2.0 cm thick.
Calculate the volume of the block.

volume = ................................................. cm3 [2]


UCLES 2010

0625/21/O/N/10

3
(b) Another block has a volume of 20 cm3.
Fig. 1.3 shows the reading when the block is placed on a balance.
block

40 50 60 70
grams

Fig. 1.3
Find the density of this block.

density = ......................................................... [4]


[Total: 8]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/O/N/10

[Turn over

4
2

A boy cycles a distance of 960 m from home to school in 8.0 minutes.


(a)

Calculate his average speed for the journey.

average speed = ......................................................... [4]


(b) The journey is all along a horizontal road. At the end of the journey the boy is tired because of
the work he has done.
Against which force has this work been done?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]

(a) Name three different energy resources used to obtain energy directly from water (not steam).
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Choose one of the energy resources you have named in (a) and write a brief description of
how the energy is converted to electrical energy.
Which energy resource are you describing? ............................................................................
description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

UCLES 2010

0625/21/O/N/10

5
4

Fig. 4.1 shows four parallel rays of light reaching a thin converging lens. Point F is a principal focus
of the lens.

Fig. 4.1
(a) What name do we give to the distance PF? ....................................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the paths of the rays through the lens and into the air as far as the
broken line.
[2]
(c) A flat white screen is placed at F, parallel to the broken line.
Describe what is seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The screen is moved so that it is along the broken line.
Describe what is now seen on the screen.
.............